Home

MPC500 Family MPC509 User`s Manual

1. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 BSIZE SBLK SUPV DSP WP CI RESERVED EN TADLY RESET 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 j 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 TAD LY PS PCON BYTE REGION RESERVED ITYPE RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 s 3 From data bus reset configuration word CSBTSBOR CSBOOT Sub Block Option Register 0x8007 FDF4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 BSIZE SBLK SUPV DSP WP CI RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CSORO CSO Option Register 0x8007 FDEC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED PCON BYTE REGION RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0010 if pins are configured as chip selects at reset otherwise 0011 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA 5 41 CSOR1 CS1 Option Register CSOR2 CS2 Option Register CSOR3 CS3 Option Register CSOR4 CS4 Option Register CSOR5 CS5 Option Register 0x8007 FDE4 0x8007 FDDC 0x8007 FDD4 0x8007 FDCC 0x8007 FDC4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 BSIZE SBLK SUPV DSP WP CI RESERVED Ej TADLY RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2. 2 2 2e MPOS509 Power CODICE Bed mcd emicat n t cS dte ada entis 2 3 2 4 Pins with Internal Pull ps Pulldowns eere 2 4 ens Mm Tm mm 2 4 26 Byte Enable Encoding T TS 2 10 2 7 Address Type DONDE DB ees 2 12 3 1 Execution eee 3 5 T2 MP 3 11 453 DiS e tee 3 12 3 4 Floating Point Result Flags den bed xx E XE Hn enr lc tiia 3 13 o5 Bik Serings for CRU Field Bl DP 3 14 3 6 Bit Settings for CR1 Field of CR aes 3 15 3 7 CRn Field Bit Settings for Compare Instructions 4 22 3 15 3 8 Integer Exception Register Bit Definitions 3 16 59 lime Base Held DSEnIBOIB aae ie aad medic niai adam md tasti iii nsa ab dei nd 3 17 3 10 Machine State Register Bit Settings eiiis eniti naue 3 18 8 11 Floating Point Exception Mode Bits 3 19 3 12 Time Base Field DRIED SK FEMA LEM nba Md our RENE qu Ra EE 3 20 S 19 Usas of SPRGU SPRGI E 3 22 3 14 Processor Version Register Bit Settings 22 3 23 3 15 Manipulat
3. 6 5 3 3 Interrupt Enable Register The interrupt enable register IRQENABLE is a read write register The bits in this reg ister are affected only by writes from the CPU or other bus master and by reset CAUTION Be sure the EE external interrupt enable bit in the MSR is cleared before changing any masks in this register MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 9 IROENABLE Interrupt Enable Register 0x8007 EFA8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LO L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 RESET 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 RESET 6 5 3 4 PIT Port Q Interrupt Levels Register The PIT port Q interrupt levels register PITQIL contains four 5 bit fields for program ming the interrupt request level of the periodic interrupt timer PIT and the IRQ 0 2 interrupt request pins Refer to 6 5 2 Interrupt Sources for more information PITQIL PIT Port Q Interrupt Levels Register 0x8007 EFAC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 IRQOL IRQ1L IRQ2L RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED PITIRQL RESET 0 0 0
4. ICTRL 1 Support Control Register SPR 158 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CTA CTB CTC CTD IWO IW1 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SIWO SIW1 SIW2 SIW3 DIWO DIW1 DIW2 DIW3 IW2 IW3 EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN ISCT SER RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 47 Table 8 30 ICTRL Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description Function 0 2 CTA Compare type of comparator A Oxx not active reset value 3 5 CTB Compare type of comparator B 100 equal 101 less than 6 8 CTC Compare type of comparator C 110 greater than 9 11 CTD Compare type of comparator D 111 not equal l bus 1st watchpoint programming not active reset value 12 13 IWO 10 match from comparator A 11 match from comparators A amp B l bus 2nd watchpoint programming not active reset value 14 15 W1 10 match from comparator B 11 match from comparators A B l bus 3rd watchpoint programming not active reset value 16 17 IW2 10 match from comparator C 11 match from comparators C amp D l bus 4th watchpoint programming not active reset value 18 19 IW3 10 match from comparator D 11 match from comparators C D Software trap enable selection of 29 SIWOEN the 1st l bus wa
5. 8 3 cM Fotech Show Cycles MT RTT 8 4 VF Pins Encodings 2 aai 8 5 VF Pins Qubus Flush Encodings sssaaa este 8 6 8 6 8 6 Cycle Type Encodings mec n 8 7 8 7 Detecting the Trace Buffer Starting Point 8 10 8 8 l bus Watchpoint Programming Options eese 8 17 s EBr DAA eae 8 18 8 10 L Bus Watchpoints Programming 8 19 8 11 Trap Enable Data Shifted Into Development Port Shift Register 8 31 8 12 Breakpoint Data Shifted Into Development Port Shift Register 8 31 8 13 CPU Instructions Data Shifted into Shift 8 31 8 14 Status Shifted Out of Shift Register Non Debug Mode 8 32 8 15 Status Data Shifted Out of Shift Register 00 8 32 DA Sgguencinig Emor BOBO auia oneal dedu 8 33 MPC509 LIST OF TABLES MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 xvii Table Title Page 8 17 Checkstop State and Debug MOC ey 8 38 8 18 Debug Mode Development Port Usage
6. 8 39 8 19 Non Debug Mode Development Port Usage 8 41 Prologus Ee PNE m 8 41 xt a Oana teks vd ctrl lane 8 42 8 22 Peek ique pc o RET naa a ai 8 42 8 23 Poke Instruction Segquenbe ue eee eer err rre rio lorc ik raa aia 8 42 8 24 Development Support Programming Model 8 45 8 25 Development Support Registers Read Access Protection 8 45 8 26 Development Support Registers Write Access Protection 8 46 B 27 OMPA CMPD canines 8 46 8 28 CMPE CMPF BR Settings 8 46 8 29 CMPG CMPH Bit Settings 8 47 8 48 Te Proc ol NU m E EP 8 50 8 32 1 1 Bit Settings d 8 51 8 33 Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control Register COUNTA 8 52 8 34 Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register COUNTB 8 53 Bun BUR BE dk DER Hi 8 54 DER Ee Fco LA 8 55 9 1 JIAG interface Pin DO 9 2 9 2 Instruction Register 0 9 3 MOTOROLA LIST OF TABLES MPC509 xviii Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL PREFACE This manual
7. controlr control with jtag reset output2 output two state 0 1 safe X for input output2 bidir 0 for control cells 0 input 11 controlling cell dsval disable value 0 0 input rslt result of putting dsval in control cell Z num cell port function safe 11 dsval tdo first bit to be shifted out during ShiftDR 0 BC_4 MODCK input X amp 1 4 DSDI input Rj amp 2 BC 4 DSCK input cs amp 3 BC 6 L 0 bidir X 4 0 4 BG 2 Ey controlry ys amp 6 L 1 bidir X 6 0 6 amp 7 BC 4 RESET L input X 05 amp 8 BC 2 SRESET L output2 X amp 9 BC 2 PDWU output2 X amp 10 BC 2 CLKOUT output2 X amp DL BC_2 ECROU output2 X amp 12 BG CR bidir X 103 0 WT3 2 controlr 0 amp 14 BC 6 ARETRY L bidir X 15 0 SIS BG 2 Gontrolbb 20 g amp 16 6 BDIP I bidir X 17 0 T7 BC 2 7 controkr 9 amp 18 6 BURST L bidir X T9 Oz NE9S BG 2 Gontrowr 20 5 amp num 11 port function safe ccell dsval 20 6 1 X 21 0 21 BG 25 controlr 0 amp 22 6 BE L 0 bidir X 23 Oi 23 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 24 6 L 1 bidir X 25 0 25 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 26
8. 1 1 4 6 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupts provide a mechanism for asynchronous real time communication between devices and the CPU The MPC509 interrupt controller joins the simple interrupt structure of the CPU with the complex structure of interrupt sources in the system The CPU has a single maskable external interrupt A complete MPC509 based system can have multiple interrupting modules each with multiple interrupt sources The interrupt controller consolidates all the interrupt sources into a single interrupt sig nal to the processor Interrupt sources include the periodic interrupt timer external interrupt pins and any IMB2 peripherals External interrupt input pins are grouped into a general purpose port port Q When not used as interrupt inputs any of these pins can be used for digital input or output Port Q operation is described in 6 6 Port Q 6 5 1 Interrupt Controller Operation The following control and status registers associated with the interrupt controller indi cate which of 32 possible interrupt levels are pending and control which interrupt sources are passed on to the CPU The pending interrupt request register IRQPEND contains a status bit for each of the 32 interrupt levels The interrupt enable register IRQENABLE contains an enable bit for each of the MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 5 32 interrupt levels The inter
9. 5 39 5 5 4 2 Chip Select Option 5 40 5 5 5 Chip Select RAJONS iua x mee x a m xm pA Rod 5 44 6 06 CU ER Hrs e PE 5 46 5 5 6 1 Main Block and Sub Block Rue RR Y RA RR RR RR 5 46 5 5 6 2 Programming the Sub Block Option 5 47 5 5 6 3 Multi Level Protection for 5 47 5 5 7 ACCESS PIOIGOUOIL sues sees eme X xg he e RR 5 48 5 57 1 Supervisor Space Protection ARX Rn akri atine 5 48 B5 Dan Space ad dre sub qur dodi dba 5 48 5 5 7 2 Write Protectloni 25 6052 eese xu e rx RR XE RR X Rex 5 48 ng Cache uuu qx i be DR CRI D Cd edens 5 49 558 WONG 224442 5 49 5 5 10 Wait State A dade Chie or 5 49 EEUU 5 50 php select Pim deed ae 5 50 Xt Ere dq ias 5 51 55 122 Byte Enable Donte 4 5 51 5 51 rs Wace
10. Mnemonic Operand Syntax Name eqv eqv rA rS rB Equivalent extsb extsb rA rS Extend Sign Byte extsh extsh rA rS Extend Sign Half Word fabs fabs frD frB Floating Absolute Value fadd fadd frD frA frB Floating Add Double Precision fadds fadds frD frA frB Floating Add Single fcmpo crfD frA frB Floating Compare Ordered fcmpu crfD frA frB Floating Compare Unordered fctiw fctiw frD frB Floating Convert to Integer Word fotiwz fctiwz frD frB ind T to Integer Word with Round fdiv fdiv frD frA frB Floating Divide Double Precision fdivs fdivs frD frA frB Floating Divide Single fmadd fmadd frD frA frC frB Floating Multiply Add Double Precision fmadds fmadds frA frC frB Floating Multiply Add Single fmr fmr frD frB Floating Move Register fmsub fmsub frD frA frC frB Floating Multiply Subtract Double Precision fmsubs fmsubs frD frA frC frB Floating Multiply Subtract Single fmul fmul frD frA frC Floating Multiply Double Precision fmuls fmuls frD frA frC Floating Multiply Single fnabs fnabs frD frB Floating Negative Absolute Value fneg fneg frD frB Floating Negate fnmadd_ fnmadd frD frA frC frB Por 27 Multiply Add Double fnmadds fnmadds frD frA frC frB Floating Negative Multiply Add Single fnmsub fnmsub frD frA frC frB pct Multiply Subtract Double fnmsubs fnmsubs frD frA frC frB Floating Negative Multiply Subtract Single frsp frD frB Floating Round t
11. Figure 5 20 Synchronous Write Zero Wait States 5 5 16 4 Synchronous Interface with Early Synchronous OE Devices with ITYPE 3 have a synchronous interface with a synchronous output enable OE is asserted at the earliest one clock cycle after CE The synchronous OE should be sampled by the external device using the rising edge of its clock signal For read accesses the early OE signal allows the responding device to prepare for the next data cycle If OE is asserted the device can prepare to drive the next data or re MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 61 fill its internal data queue If OE is not asserted the device can place the data lines in a high impedance state for fast relinquishing of the data bus CLKOUT um X ge UNDEFINED DON T CARE DEVICE CAN 3 STATE ITS DRIVERS FROM CLOCK ONE WAIT STATE Figure 5 21 Synchronous Read with Early OE One Wait State 5 5 16 5 Synchronous Interface with Synchronous OE Early Overlap Devices with ITYPE 9 are synchronous with a synchronous output enable They are different from devices with ITYPE 3 in that they support early overlapping of accesses That is the region is capable of accepting a second address one clock cycle before the data phase of the first access terminates Notice in Figure 5 22 t
12. 5 67 5 8 Clock Submodulg oc crc mac eem eee ehem tS 5 67 5 6 1 Clock Submodule Signal 5 70 DEP LIB Power quos ud e Rad RR PPP CEP EE 5 70 5 0 9 System Clock BOURGES cu specus thee Kee RE Rx edt een es 5 71 mos PhaseLocked LOOP oaa cz added ERR UN RR a Cu 5 71 Bee Gws 5 72 554 2 Phase DEO 2 5 73 Charge Pomp and Loop Filler sissa eaae dede ag iba ied edd 5 73 BOX pa saure pecus mex 5 74 5 6 4 5 Multiplication Factor Dividers seas 5 74 BOB Chok Day pubs qaas quum xad RAE quid d E dca 5 74 5 8 5 CLKOUT Freguengy 22 55 om en 5 74 5 6 5 1 Mul plication Factor BIS sese b e dae cte 5 75 5 6 5 2 Reduced Frequency Divider 0 3 Rem 5 77 566 Low Power Modes c 465 0 poke KA ISOS 5 78 9061 Noma PTATEM 5 78 50 6 2 Single Chip Mod usce ze RR x RERO ERR Rex ERR ERR 5 78 BG DONO uiua gr RRR eps 5 78 BED MOIS caasa quide qoc decay b
13. Figure 5 18 Asynchronous Write Zero Wait States 5 5 16 2 Asynchronous Interface with Latch Enable Devices with an address latch enable signal such as the Motorola MCM62995A mem ory chip also support unlatched asynchronous read and write interfaces as shown in Figure 5 17 and Figure 5 18 The chip select module supports this type of device in the unlatched asynchronous mode only 5 5 16 3 Synchronous Interface with Asynchronous OE Devices with ITYPE 2 have a synchronous interface with an asynchronous output enable Devices of this type clock the address and the data on the rising edge of CLK OUT On a read access these devices drive the data out as soon as the OE is asserted In addition the interface has the ability to latch the address so the next access to the same device can be overlapped with the previous access MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 60 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Figure 5 19 and Figure 5 20 illustrate reads and writes for devices with this type of interface CLKOUT ADDR OVERLAP ACCESS WR m 0 2 ADDRESS FOR READ Bios CE ENABLE DATA OUTPUT OE ASYNCHRONOUS G DATA UNDEFINED DON T CARE UNDEFINED 77 DONT CARE
14. L BUS CYCLE SIZE ADDR 30 31 COMPARE SIZE COMPARE TYPH BYTE QUALIFIER LOGIC EVENTS GENERATOR I BUS WATCHPOINTS CONTROL BITS EVENTS GENERATOR L WATCHPOINT 0 L WATCHPOINT 1 BYTE QUALIFIER LOGIC L BREAKPOINT AND OR LOGIC Figure 8 4 L Bus Support General Structure Using the match indication signals four L bus data events are generated as shown in Table 8 9 Table 8 9 L Bus Data Events Event Name Event Function G GmatchO Gmatch1 Gmatch2 Gmatch3 H 0 Hmatch1 Hmatch2 Hmatch3 G amp H GmatchO amp Gmatch1 amp Hmatch1 Gmatch2 amp Hmatch2 Gmatch3 amp Hmatch3 G H GmatchO HmatchO Gmatch1 Hmatch1 Gmatch2 Hmatch2 Gmatch3 Hmatch3 NOTES 1 amp denotes a logical AND denotes a logical OR MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 18 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The four L bus data events together with the match events of the L bus address com parators and the I bus watchpoints are used to generate the L bus watchpoints and breakpoint according to the user s programming of the CMPE CMPF CMPG CMPH LCTRL1 and LCTRL2 registers Table 8 10 shows how the watchpoints are deter mined from the programming options Table 8 10 L Bus Watchpoints Programming Options Events L Address Events L Data Events Pme Description Programming Option
15. 2 5 4 5 Instruction Flush Count _5 0 1 2 546 cine dato dead ak acce 29 5 Chip Select Signals 240s sae euam qud eu RE eaae do ace ius 2 5 5 1 Chip Select for System Boot Memory CSBOOT 2 5 5 2 Chip Selects for External Memory 5 0 11 2B aco ime m ERES aem 2 5 6 1 Glock Output OLISOLTY 2 5 6 2 Engineering Clock Output 2 5 6 3 Crystal Oscillator Connections EXTAL 2 5 6 4 External Filter Capacitor Pins XFCP XFCN 2 5 6 5 Clock Mode MODGLK issus esancuauaecsanzekae ek sema 2 5 6 6 Phase Locked Loop Lock Signal 2 5 6 7 Power Down Wake Up 2b Reset Signal Ue EX X RE GU RUE EHE aes ae 2573 Pass IBESET au 2572 Output IBEBETOUT 2 5 8 SIU General Purpose Input Output 2 5 8 1 Ports A and B IPA G 7 usse a 2 5 8 2 Ports I J and L PI B 7 PJ O 7 20508 da 25 9 Interrupts and Port Q 5 2 5 9 1 Interrupt Requests 0 6 2 59 3 Pot POMCI
16. nd PoawerOn Mese iussi lack Cd CR E Le Api dde 5 9 General Purpose VO x Rp E dca XR Red Y PRU CIC or pb PR ROC PEEL eto ed S urs 5 9 3 Pure AS ees x PEE ERES D94 Ports LJ K 524525425448 ow Ca a Re d 5 9 5 Port Replacement Unit PRU Mode Section 6 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT B PEL EID DA id cre edd ded a eae RA 8 2 POU Address Map ase ser n RR RR Rx GO 6 3 Module Configuration Rap RR 64 Suam Vaid eu hewn opa dad aa aor 6 4 1 Software Watchdog Service 6 4 2 Software Watchdog Control Register Timing Count 6 4 3 Software Watchdog 5 6 5 Interrupt ControllBF iiis esu 6 5 1 Interrupt Controller 86 5 2 interrupt SOUS ene 6 5 2 1 External Interrupt Requests 6 5 2 2 Periodic Interrupt Timer 6 5 2 3 Interrupt Request 0 MPC509 TABLE OF CONTENTS USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 MOTOROLA ix Number Number
17. 5 10 5 3 5 Response to Freeze ASSOITIOR iu uaa exw saw BORRAR dea de A RU dC 5 11 5 3 5 1 Effects of Freeze and Debug Mode on the Bus 5 11 5 3 5 2 Effects of Freeze on the Programmable Interrupt Timer 5 11 5 3 5 3 Effects of Freeze on the 5 12 5 3 5 4 Effects of Freeze on Register Lock 5 12 54 External Bus Interface ius oa Che x SORS Soon does Sedet E dod p 5 12 me PC ETT 5 12 Bus Single 5 12 5 15 5134 Read FOW sed 5 15 5422 Wite Cycle XR RO 5 17 mas DESC ado des d gate aces A br de Wie he af 5 18 nao Bus Phases seid Sees n e xU Re eee RON KE we Ve Cade d d pres 5 20 545 1 Phase Lush asd Ey e RR Xx dev 5 20 5455 2 ndis 5 20 5 4 5 3 Data eius sse 5 21 le CEU 5 22 5461 Termination or Buret 5 23 246 2 Borst MDE CYS Ya edu
18. 1 1 1 only for data array When the data array is read from the 32 bits of the word selected by the ICADR are placed in the target general purpose register When the tag array is read the 21 bits of the tag selected by the ICADR along with additional information are placed in the target general purpose register Table 4 6 illustrates the bits layout of the data register when tag is read Table 4 6 ICDAT Layout During a Tag Read 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 31 0 not valid 0 not locked Tag value Reserved 1 locked LRU bit Reserved MOTOROLA INSTRUCTION CACHE MPC509 4 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 5 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT The system interface unit SIU consists of modules that control the buses of the chip provide the clocks and provide miscellaneous functions for the system such as chip selects test control reset control and I O ports The MPC509 has an internal Harvard architecture and a single external bus The inter nal buses are the instruction bus I bus and the load store bus L bus The external bus interface connects each of these internal buses with the external bus E bus The chip select block provides user programmable chip selects to select external memory or peripherals The clock block controls the generation of the system clocks and such features as programmability of the clocks and low power modes
19. Yes Input unless configured driven if configured as Input port output three as an output port stated output port ABETRY 3 state Yes Input unless configured Input driven if config Input port output three as output port ured as output port stated Arbitration BH 3 state No Output unless configured as input port Not affect Float ed by BG BG 3 state Weak pull Input unless configured Output only if config Float down as output port ured as output port If relinquishing drive Output unless config high then float unless BB ured as input port configured as output Foal port Miscellaneous CR DS 3 state Yes Not affected by BG Input unless configured for Float secondary function RESETOUT Output No Not affected by BG RESET Input No Not affected by BG CLKOUT Output No Not affected by BG Not affected NOTES 1 Weak pull ups can maintain an internal logic level one but may not maintain a logic level one on external pins 2 3 Power Connections Table 2 3 shows the MPC509 power connections Table 2 3 MPC509 Power Connections Pin Description 55 External periphery power Vssi Internal module power VppsN VsssN Clock synthesizer power Keep alive power for the internal oscillator time base and decrementer VDDKAP2 Keep alive power for the SRAM array CAUTION The keep alive power pins VDDKAP1 and VDDKAP2 must be pow ered up
20. Note that the PLL frequency is equal to the CLKOUT frequency when the RFD bits are programmed to 0b0000 divide by one Note also that the value of MFO is ignored However this bit should be written to zero in case it is used in future implementations CAUTION The MF bits must not be programmed to a value that requires the VCO to operate at greater than 180 MHz Fyco 4 x MF factor x Specifically if the reference crystal frequency is 5 MHz the MF settings of X110 times 10 and X111 times 11 must be avoided The MF bits can be read and written at any time However the MF bit field can be write protected by setting the MF lock MPL bit in the SCSLR Changing the MF bits causes the PLL to lose lock If the loss of lock reset enable bit LOLRE is set the loss of lock condition causes the clock module to signal a reset condition to the reset controller The reset controller may wait for the PLL to lock before negating reset Thus the PLL can still be out of lock when RESETOUT is negated After changing the MF bits software should monitor the system PLL lock status SPLS bit in the SCSLR to determine lock status The RFD bits should always be written to a value of 0x1 or greater before changing the MF bits to ensure the system frequency does not exceed the system s design mar gin since the VCO overshoots in frequency as it tries to compensate for the change in frequency For example to change from the default sy
21. an cti d 5 52 Soto Interace Type Describe eR dar Rae de 5 53 5 5 13 2 Turn Off Times for Different Interface 5 54 5 5 13 3 Interface and BI Generation 5 55 5 5 14 Chip Select Operation 5 55 550195 gt as easier on eC or phen poe oder ak nod odor 5 56 5 5 15 1 Pipelined Accesses to the Same 5 57 5 5 15 2 Pipelined Accesses to Different 5 5 57 5516 Ohip seleer Timing Diagrams eub AER RO RERO OR dict dc tdt din 5 58 5 9 ASYNCHRONOUS issue sus a3 qur deed x EU ARR E DEI RR dA 5 59 MPC509 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 vii Number Number 5 5 16 2 Asynchronous Interface with Latch Enable 5 60 5 5 16 3 Synchronous Interface with Asynchronous OE 5 60 5 5 16 4 Synchronous Interface with Early Synchronous 5 61 5 5 16 5 Synchronous Interface with Synchronous OE Early Overlap 5 62 55 160 Synchronous Burst IHIBITSOB xu re deeb eae eO REGE 5 63 Sots Burst Bardo 2a p pak BOR P X eX S aed oe ORE 5 66 5 5 18 Chip Select Reset Operation
22. Bits Mnemonic Description Function 0 LWOEN 1st L bus watchpoint enable bit 0 watchpoint not enabled reset value 1 watchpoint enabled 1st L bus watchpoint l addr 00 first I bus watchpoint watchpoint selection 01 second l bus watchpoint 10 third watchpoint 11 fourth watchpoint 1st L bus watchpoint 0 don t care 3 QUUD care don care l addr events 1 1st L bus watchpoint 00 match from comparator E L addr events selection 01 match from comparator F 45 10 match from comparators E amp F 11 match from comparators E F 1st L bus watchpoint 0 don t care 6 ENOEADE care don t care L addr events 1 care 1st L bus watchpoint 00 match from comparator G L data events selection 01 match from comparator H 7 8 LWoLD 10 match from comparators G amp H 11 match from comparators G H 151 L bus watchpoint 0 don t care DEDE care don t care L data events 1 10 LWIEN 2nd L bus watchpoint enable bit 0 watchpoint not enabled reset value 1 watchpoint enabled 2nd L bus watchpoint l addr 00 first l bus watchpoint watchpoint selection 01 second l bus watchpoint 1112 Ee 10 third watchpoint 11 fourth watchpoint 2nd L bus watchpoint 0 don t care 13 care don care l addr events 1 2nd L bus watchpoint 00 match from comparator E L addr events selection 01 match from comparator F inim ee 10 matc
23. Y Y te ees 8 46 8 8 4 Comparator G H Value Registers 8 47 8 8 5 Bus Support Control Register auae or durs ed ON A ee Oe a 3433 OW aS 8 47 L Bus Support Control Register de dec 8 49 B 8 7 L Bus Support Control Regislel 2 5 0 0 ccc ieee m mme kon erem 8 50 8 8 8 Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control 8 52 8 8 9 Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control 8 53 8 8 10 Exception Cause Register 8 53 8 8 11 Debug Enable Register DER ou ouest link ep RR REO OW ee ERR ax ecg Rb d 8 55 Section 9 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE 8 1 JTAG Inieriace Block Diagram Xu deeds be 9 1 9 2 JTAG Signal CRC TS ade do a 9 2 93 Operaling Freoueliey tege eee qb e Rp d a lc 9 3 CUR RE ard RAR ob oer Redon dC RR anda eee 9 3 9 5 Insects BOISE e bbb dub 9 3 ST BATES IDODO chee cd eue ded s Feds Depas 9 4 9 4 95 3 SAMPLEPRELOAD 9 5 954 CLAMP IG Roe dol I doe bd Rot lC beoe CR Rd dde ce 9 5 9 OD
24. 1 oy bit 0 is not equal to the carry out of bit 1 and clear it otherwise The OV bit is not altered by com pare instructions or other instructions that cannot overflow Carry CA In general the carry bit is set to indicate that a carry out of bit O occurred during execution of an instruction Add carrying subtract from carrying add extended and subtract 2 CA from extended instructions set CA to one if there is a carry out of bit 0 and clear it otherwise The CA bit is not altered by compare instructions or other instructions that cannot carry except that shift right algebraic instructions set the CA bit to indicate whether any 1 bits have been shifted out of a negative quantity 3 24 Reserved This field specifies the number of bytes to be transferred by a load string word indexed Iswx 29 31 BYTES or store string word indexed stswx instruction 3 7 6 Link Register LR The 32 bit link register supplies the branch target address for the branch conditional to link register bclrx instruction and can be used to hold the logical address of the instruction that follows a branch and link instruction Note that although the two least significant bits can accept any values written to them they are ignored when the LR is used as an address Both conditional and unconditional branch instructions include the option of placing the effective address of the instruction following the branch instructi
25. CR Ll 25 WU amp ARETRY L 24 amp SBDLP 235 Ww BURST L 22 amp BI L 24 ECROUT 27 amp CLKOUT 28 amp PDWU 30 amp VDDKAP1 31 amp XTAL 32 Wu EXTAL 33 M amp VSSSN 34 amp XFCN 35 amp 36 amp VDDSN 37 SRESET L 38 amp RESET L 39 amp ERO Bo 2 43 425 5354 54 55 56 97 amp DSCK 44 amp DSDI 45 amp VDDKAP2 46 amp 47 amp TRST L 48 lt a TMS 49 amp TC 203 lt a 5d lt amp TDI D ce cr WP 65 64 63 62 59 58 amp VELS 69 68 amp VE 572 ce PLLL Jue M Ck AT 72 6 y y MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 10 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 78 19 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 296 98 99 D 102 103 104 105 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 11 5 116 117 8 118 1719 122 123 124 125 128 129 230 137 132 133 134 535 138 139 140 141 amp BB 1 144 amp BG L 145 amp BR DL 146 M amp TEA L TAT 3 5992 9 TA L 148 amp AACK L 149 amp WES ans 150 amp WR L 1 54 Nos Other Pin Maps here when documented attribute TAP SCAN IN of TDI signal is true attribute TAP SCAN OUT of TDO signal is true a
26. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U Unaffected by reset MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 104 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL When a port A or port B pin is configured as a general purpose output the value in the port A or port B data register is driven onto the pin PORTA and PORTB are unaffected by reset PAPAR PBPAR Port A B Pin Assignment Register 0x8007 FC84 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PAPA PAPA PAPA PAPA PAPA PAPA PAPA PAPA PBPA PBPA PBPA PBPA PBPA PBPA PBPA PBPA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RESET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset setting depends on the value of the configuration word at reset Each bit in this register controls the function of the associated pin provided the pin is configured for non chip select function in the corresponding chip select options regis ter Setting a bit in the PAPAR or PBPAR configures the corresponding pin as an address bus pin clearing the bit configures the pin as an I O pin Table 5 52 Port A Pin Assignments PMPAR Bit Port A Signal Bus Control Signal PAPAO PAO ADDRO PAPA1 PA1 ADDR1 PAPA2 PA2 ADDR2 PAPA3 PA3 ADDR3 PAPA4 PA4 ADDR4 5 5 ADDR5
27. 2 9 2524 Be Enables BE ae 2 10 2525 Visser SU 2 10 2528 Address Admowhdose 45 Ee 2 10 2557 Bond IBI Bh chk cede d oboe OR Be XE eer AERA et lC pd ad 2 11 2 5 2 8 Address Retry 2 12 2 5 2 9 Address Type mx RR RR Rex 2 12 25 2 10 Cycle Types Iva 2 13 253 Data Phase Signale AUR ROBUR A 2 13 2 5 3 1 Data Bus 1 lt lt lt lt lt qe 2 13 2522 Burst Data in Progress 2 14 25583 Transfer Acknowledge 2 14 2524 Transfer Error Acknowledge TEA 55 2 15 2535 Dala Sobe DS X ACA COE RO dca a ab 2 15 254 Development Support Signals iussisse ose Res mmm rdr nderi dd nr mmn 2 16 2 5 4 1 Development Port Serial Data Out 5 2 16 2 5 4 2 Development Port Serial Data In 0501 2 16 MPC509 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 iii Number 2 5 4 3 Development Port Serial Clock Input DSCK 2 5 4 4 Instruction Fetch Visibility Signals 0 2
28. 5 5 4 1 Chip Select Base Address Registers Base address registers contain the base address of the range of memory to which the chip select circuit responds All base address registers contain the same fields but have different reset values CSBTBAR CSBOOT Base Address Register 0x8007 FDF8 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 BA RESERVED RESET IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP 00000000000000000000 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 39 The reset value of the field in the CSBTBAR equals 0x00000 if the exception prefix IP bit in the MSR is zero default and OxFFFOO if IP equals one CSBTSBBAR CSBOOT Sub Block Base Address Register 0x8007 FDFO CSBAR1 CS1 Base Address Register CSBAR2 CS2 Base Address Register CSBAR3 CS3 Base Address Register CSBARA CS4 Base Address Register 5 5 CS5 Base Address Register 0x8007 FDEO 0x8007 FDD8 0x8007 FDDO 0x8007 FDC8 0x8007 FDCO 012 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 BA RESERVED RESET 00000000000000000000000000000000 Table 5 18 Chip Select Base Address Registers Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 19 BA Base address Bits 0 through 19 of the base address of the block to which the chip select responds Register bit O corresponds to address bit 0 register bit 19
29. OY 1 y XTAL 2 1 MUX a EXTAL 4 SI S FREEZE VDDSN MODCLK LPM2 TB DEC SYSTEM CLKOUT CLOCKS gt SIU CLOCK BLOCK Figure 5 26 SIU Clock Module Block Diagram MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 69 5 6 1 Clock Submodule Signal Descriptions Table 5 30 describes the signals used by the clock module Table 5 30 Clocks Module Signal Descriptions up Mnemonic Name Direction Description CLKOUT System clock out Output System clock Used as the bus timing reference by external devices Connections for external crystal to the internal oscilla EXTAL XTAL Crystal oscillator Input Output tor circuit An external oscillator should serve as input to the EXTAL pin when used External filter These pins are used to add an external capacitor to capacitor Input the filter circuit of the phase locked loop The state of this input signal during reset selects the MODCLK Clock mode select Input source of the system clock Refer to 5 6 3 System Clock Sources VppsN VsssN Synthesizer power Input These pins supply a quiet power source to the VCO Einem slack Buffered output of the crystal oscillator The ECROUT ECROUT 9 9 Output output frequency is equal to the crystal oscillator fre reference output quency PLL lock status or PLLL DSDO debug output Output Phase locked loop status output or debug ou
30. 82 BC 2 83 BC_6 84 BC_2 85 BC_6 86 BC_2 87 _6 88 2 89 6 90 BC_2 6 92 BC 2 93 6 94 2 6 96 2 NO 6 98 22 6 num cell 100 BC 2 101 6 MPC509 USER S MANUAL WR L BR L 00 e E UJ Ta GS SEU WU GES N N N w K Ww gt e N D 21 port D 20 bidir bi bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi fu co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi fu co bi co bi co bi co bi co bi bi bi bi co bi co bi fu co n d n d n d n d n d n d n d n n d n d n d n d n d n d n di n d n d n d n n d n d n d n d n d n d n d n d n d n d n nt trolr ix LErolr sq trolr BE trolr Sie CEOLE YE trolr TY trolr IE ction trolr Lrolr zb on trolr ae trolr CEOLE TE TE trolr aT trolr d 1 trolr ir trolr ction trolr qd CEOLE ir trolr trolr ir trolr ix trolr trolr i trolr Lrolr Yr Erolr d ction
31. DAR Data Address Register SPR 19 0 31 Data Address RESET UNCHANGED 3 9 4 Time Base Facility TB OEA As described in 3 8 PowerPC VEA Register Set Time Base the time base TB pro vides a 64 bit incrementing counter The VEA defines user level read only access to the TB Writing to the TB is reserved for supervisor level applications such as operat ing systems and bootstrap routines The OEA defines supervisor level write access to the TB TB Time Base Writing SPR 284 285 0 31 32 63 TBU TBL RESET UNCHANGED Table 3 12 Time Base Field Definitions Bits Name Description 0 31 TBU Time Base Upper The high order 32 bits of the time base 32 63 TBL Time Base Lower The low order 32 bits of the time base The TB can be written at the supervisor privilege level only The mttbl and mttbu sim plified mnemonics write the lower and upper halves of the TB respectively The mtspr mttbl and mttbu instructions treat TBL and TBU as separate 32 bit registers setting one leaves the other unchanged It is not possible to write the entire 64 bit time base in a single instruction For information about reading the time base refer to 3 8 PowerPC VEA Register Set Time Base 3 9 5 Decrementer Register DEC The decrementer DEC SPR 22 is a 32 bit decrementing counter defined by the Pow erPC architecture to provide a decrementer exception after a programma
32. Refer to 5 5 5 Chip Select Regions for more information SBLK Sub block 0 Address space is a main block 1 Address space specified by the BA and BSIZE fields of the corresponding base address and option registers respectively is a sub block within a larger main block Pairing of main blocks and sub blocks is as follows CSBOOT and CS1 CS2 and CS3 CS4 and CS5 Refer to 5 5 6 Multi Level Protection for more information SUPV Supervisor mode 0 Access is permitted in supervisor or user mode 1 Access is permitted in supervisor mode only Refer to 5 5 7 1 Supervisor Space Protection for more information DSP Data space only 0 Address block may contain both instructions and data 1 Address block contains data only Refer to 5 5 7 2 Data Space Protection for more information WP Write protect 0 Block is available for both read and write operations 1 Block is read only Refer to 5 5 7 3 Write Protection for more information Cl Cache inhibit 0 Information in this block can be cached 1 Information in this block should not be cached Refer to 5 5 8 Cache Inhibit Control for more information Reserved ACKEN Acknowledge enable 0 Chip select logic will not return TA and AACK signals 1 Chip select logic will return TA and AACK signals Refer to 5 5 9 Handshaking Control for more information MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTORO
33. 5 52 5 27 Interface Types eoe 5 53 5 28 Pipelined Reads Writes RH a da asc E DER Sad ek dde 5 56 5 29 Data Bus Configuration Word Settings for Chip Selects 5 67 5 30 Clocks Module Signal 5 70 5 31 Clock Module Power Supplies 5 70 5 71 5 33 CLKOUT Frequencies with a 4 MHz Crystal 22 2 22 5 75 5 84 Factor 5 76 5 35 Reduced Frequency Divider Bits kat nike orina 5 77 5 36 Low Power PADO 5 79 5 37 System Clock Lock Bits 5 80 DOR GOOR 5 83 539 SOLSA Atc 5 85 5 40 System Protection Address 2222 222 5 86 PEFS S m 5 87 5 42 Recommended Settings for 5 0 2 5 88 5 43 Example 5 88 5 44 Bit Settings 1 444 4 5 90 eee retina 5 92 MOTOROLA LIST OF TABLES MPC509 xvi Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL Table Title Page 5 46 Reset Sta
34. 8 0 8007 1 S 0x8007 20 Mapping MEMMAP S 0x8007 FC24 Speculative Address Register SPECADDR S 0x8007 FC28 Speculative Mask Register SPECMASK Test 0x8007 FC2C Termination Status Register TERMSTAT _ 0 8007 FC30 Reserved 0x8007 S U 0x8007 FC40 Periodic Interrupt Control and Status Register PICSR S U 0 8007 FC44 Periodic Interrupt Timer Register PIT S 0x8007 FC48 Bus Monitor Control Register BMCR S 0x8007 Reset Status Register RSR S 0x8007 FC50 System Clock Control Register SCCR S 0x8007 FC54 System Clock Lock and Status Register SCLSR m 0x8007 FC58 Reserved 0x8007 FC5C S 0x8007FC60 Port M Data Direction DDRM S 0x8007FC64 Port M Pin Assignment PMPAR S U 0x8007FC68 Port M Data PORTM M 0x8007FC6C 0x8007FC80 S 0x8007FC84 Port A B Pin Assignment PAPAR PBPAR S U 0x8007FC88 Port A Data PORTA PORTB 0x8007FC8C Reserved 0x8007FC94 S 0x8007FC98 Port I J K L Data Direction DDRI DDRJ DDRK S 0x8007FC9C Port I J K L Pin Assignment PIPAR PJPAR PKPAR PLPAR S U 0x8007FCAO0 Port 1 J L Data PORTI PORTJ PORTK PORTL 0x8007 4 Beservad 0x8007 FD94 S 0x8007 FD94 511 Option Register CSOR11 S 0x8007 FD98 Reserved S 0x8007 FD9C 10 Option Register CSOR10 S 0x8007 FDAO Reserved S 0x8007 FDA4 CS9 Option Register CSOR9 S 0x8007 FDA8 Reserved S 0x
35. Figure 5 3 Placement of Internal Memory in Memory Map 5 3 3 2 Accesses to Unimplemented Internal Memory Locations If an access is made to a location within the 2 sized memory block that is not imple mented in any memory module on the chip then the CPU takes a machine check exception 5 3 3 3 Control Register Block The internal control registers include all of the SIU registers and all of the configura tion control and status registers of each module on the I bus or L bus The internal control registers and the IMB2 are allocated a 512 Kbyte block from 0x8000 0000 to 0x8007 FFFF The internal control registers always occupy the highest numbered four Kbytes of this address range 0 8007 F000 to 0x8007 FFFF The IMB2 modules MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 9 the MPC509 this includes only the PCU are allocated the remainder of the 512 Kbyte block Unlike the memory arrays the internal control registers and IMB2 modules cannot be disabled for development purposes In addition the IMB2 and control register block are only available in data space not in instruction space An instruction access to the address of a control register results in a data error on the causing the internal TEA signal to be asserted 5 3 3 4 Internal Memory Mapping Field LMEMBASE The LMEMBASE field in the MEMMAP register maps the L bus memory i e the SRAM to one of four possible locations in the m
36. PA 0 7 Ports Output Port A discrete output signals PB 0 7 Ports Output Port B discrete output signals PDWU Clocks Output Power down wakeup to external power on reset circuit PI 0 7 Ports Input Output Port discrete input output signals PJ 0 7 Ports Input Output Port J discrete input output signals PK 0 7 Ports Input Output Port K discrete input output signals PL 2 7 Ports Input Output Port L discrete input output signals PN 3 7 Ports Input Output Port M discrete input output signals PQ 0 6 PCU Input Output Port Q discrete input output signals PLLL Clock Output Indicates whether phase locked loop is locked RESET EBI Input Hard reset When asserted devices on the bus must reset Reset output signal Asserted by MCU during reset When asserted in RESETOUT EBI Output structs all devices monitoring this signal to reset all parts within them selves that can be reset by software TA EBI input Transfer acknowledge When asserted indicates the slave has received p the data during a write cycle or returned the data during a read cycle MPC509 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 2 5 Table 2 5 Signal Descriptions Continued Mnemonic Module Direction Description TCK JTAG Input Test clock input with a pull down resistor to synchronize the test logic TDI JTAG Input Test data input with a pull up resistor sampled on the rising edge of TCK T
37. S MANUAL tion status is shifting out The port terminates the current CPU access with a bus error The next transmission to the port should be a new instruction or trap enable data 8 3 8 4 Null Output Finally the null encoding is used to indicate that no data has been transferred from the CPU to the development port shift register It also indicates that the previous transmis sion did not have any associated errors 8 3 9 Use of the Ready Bit To minimize the overhead required to detect and correct errors the external develop ment system should wait for the ready bit on DSDO before beginning each input transmission This ensures that all CPU activity if any relative to the previous trans mission has been completed and that any errors have been reported When the ready bit is used to pace the transmissions the error status is reported dur ing the transmission following the error Since any transmission into the port which occurs while shifting out an error status is ignored by the port the error handler in the external development tool does not need to undo the effects of an intervening instruction To improve system performance however an external development system may begin transmissions before the ready bit is asserted If the next transmission does not wait until the port indicates ready the port will not assert ready again until this next transmission completes and all activity associated with it has finished Transmissio
38. USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 Number Number Section 4 INSTRUCTION CACHE Ad suction sche scisco te rad qe de RR Cr Cet eur dada y x PW 4 1 4 2 Instruction Cache Organizam eases 4 2 4 3 Instruction Cache Programming 4 3 A Cache Operant EMT 4 5 485 Cache CommandE 4 6 Section 5 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT g1 SU Block DIGGING MP 5 1 Hs s Address T RCRP Peed RP 5 2 5 3 SIU MOSS COH OR 266 0 po uade e 5 4 5 3 1 SIU Module Configuration Register 5 4 5 3 2 Memory Mapping Register eu 5 6 5 3 3 Internal Module Select Logic 5 7 5 3 3 1 Memory Block Mapping 5 8 5 3 3 2 Accesses to Unimplemented Internal Memory 5 9 5 2 3 2 Control Register BIDOK deca e RR X RR ROB RR E XR 5 9 5 3 3 4 Internal Memory Mapping Field 5 10 5 3 3 5 Memory Mapping Cones ccccccacnecadacistacadeveseneadasaaannes 5 10 5 3 4 Internal Cross Bus
39. be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs S9 ADDR9 PB1 Can be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs CS10 ADDR10 PB2 Can be WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs CS11 ADDR11 PB3 WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs NOTE During the first two clock cycles of power on reset the state of the pins listed in Table 5 16 is unknown When a chip select is configured as a chip enable of a memory or I O device the MCU asserts the chip select when it drives the address onto the external bus For non pipe lineable devices the CE is asserted until the access is completed For pipelineable devices when CE is asserted the device should clock in the address at the rising edge of the clock Note that devices that the chip select unit regards as pipelineable are always synchronous The WE signal is used during write accesses When a chip select is configured as a write enable signal of a memory device the MCU asserts the chip select as it drives data onto the external bus to signal the external device to strobe in the data For synchronous devices if WE is asserted the device should clock in the data at the rising edge of the clock The OE signal is used during read accesses When the MCU asserts a chip select sig nal that is configured as an output enable of a memory or I O device the device can drive its data onto the E bus 5 5 4 Chip Select Registers and Address Map Chip select registers are 32 bits wide Reads of unimplemented bits in these r
40. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RESET Reset setting depends on the value of the configuration word at reset The bits in these registers control the function of the associated pins Setting a bit con figures the corresponding pin as a bus control signal clearing the bit configures the pin as an I O pin MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 5 54 Port Pin Assignments PIPAR Bit Port I Signal Bus Control Signal PIPAO PIO BURST PIPA1 PIPA2 PIPA4 BEO 5 PI5 PIPA6 6 2 PIPA7 PI7 BE3 Table 5 55 Port J Pin Assignments PJPAR Bit Port J Signal Bus Control Signal PJPA1 PJ1 ATO PJPA2 PJ2 AT1 PJPA3 PJ3 TS PJPA4 PJ4 CTO PJPA5 PJ5 CT1 6 PJ6 CT2 PJPA7 PJ7 CT3 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 107 Table 5 56 Port K Pin Assignments PKPAR Bit Port K Signal Bus Control Signal PKPAO PKO BDIP PKPA1 PK1 WR PKPA2 PK2 PLLL DSDO PKPA3 VFO PKPA4 PK4 VF1 5 VF2 PKPA6 PK6 VFLSO PKPA7 PK7 VFLS1 Table 5 57 Port L Pin Assignments PLPAR Bit Port L Signal Bus Control Signal PLPA2 PL2 WPO PLPA3 PL3 WP1 PLPA4 PL4 WP2 PLPA5 PL5 WP3 PLPA6 PL6 WP4 PLPA7 PL7 WP5 5 9 5 Port Replacement Unit PRU Mode The entire external bus interface must be supported in order to build an emu
41. 6 ORE RE RA 25 10 JTAG Interface Sighals ues sae sap seg ARR RARE vanessa 2 5 10 1 Test Data Input TDI 2 5 10 2 Test Data Output TDO os nc ses aduer e debeo 2 5 10 3 Test Mode Select 5 2 5 10 4 Test Glock 25 105 Test Reset TRST cn ade Section 3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT ROPU V ooa pce ac C RO ORO OC RR e ER ee dk dar Qe eie dt dog dic odi 3 3 instruction Sequence beeen cede RR RR E REA REX 3 4 Independent Execution 2341 Branch Processing Unit SPU 332 Integer Unit II he th ERR mn 343 Dim EU ocsid kids iode Bor d 9 4 4 Floating pent Umt uua aas decoder Eee RR Peau 3 5 Levels of the PowerPC Architecture MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS iv Rev 15 June 1998 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Paragraph Page Number Number 3 8 ROPU Programming Model eR Rack HERE 3 7 mr PowerPC UISA Register GEL ua aad iria d d dep dc d ed cda 3 10 3 7 1 General Purpose Registers lt 3 10 3 52 Floating Point Registers PPRS as esr
42. 8 3 8 Serial Data Out of Development Port Debug Mode The encoding of data shifted out of the development port shift register when the pro cessor is in debug mode is shown in Table 8 14 Table 8 15 Status Data Shifted Out of Shift Register Ready Status 0 1 Data 7 or 32 Bits Indication 0 0 0 Data Valid Data from CPU 0 0 1 Ones Sequencing Error 0 1 0 Ones CPU Exception 0 1 1 Ones Null NOTES 1 Depending on input mode 8 3 8 1 Valid Data Output The valid data encoding is used when data has been transferred from the CPU to the development port shift register This is the result of executing an instruction in debug mode to move the contents of a general purpose register to the development port data register DPDR The valid data encoding has the highest priority of all status outputs and is reported even if an exception occurs at the same time Any exception that is recognized during the transmission of valid data is not related to the execution of an instruction There fore a status of valid data is output and the CPU exception status is saved for the next transmission Since it is not possible for a sequencing error to occur and for valid data MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 32 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL to be received on the same transmission there is no conflict between a valid data sta tus and the sequencing error status 8 3 8 2 Sequencing Error Output The
43. 8 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 9 10 11 12 13 window Assert VSYNC Return to the regular code run The first report on the VF pins is a VSYNC VF 0 2 011 The external hardware starts sampling the program trace information upon the report on the VF pins of VSYNC The hardware generates a breakpoint when the programmed event is detected and the machine enters debug mode Negate VSYNC Return to the regular code run The first report on the VF pins is a VSYNC VF 0 2 011 The external hardware stops sampling the program trace information upon the report on the VF pins of VSYNC A second method allows the trace window to be synchronized to internal processor events without stopping execution and entering debug mode at the two events 1 2 9 10 Enter debug mode either immediately out of reset or using the debug mode re quest Program a watchpoint for the event that marks the start of the trace window us ing the control registers defined in 8 8 Development Support Registers Program a second watchpoint for the event that marks the end of the trace win dow Return to regular code execution by exiting debug mode The watchpoint logic signals the starting event by asserting the appropriate watchpoint pin Upon detecting the first watchpoint assert VSYNC using the development port serial interface The external program trace hardware starts sampling the program tr
44. ADDR 0 29 Address bus Address bus TS Transfer start Control WR Write read Address attribute BE 0 3 Byte enables Address attribute AT 0 1 Address type Address attribute CT 0 3 Cycle type Address attribute BURST Burst Address attribute TS is a control signal that is valid for only one clock cycle at the start of the address phase The address attributes listed in Table 5 8 are updated at the start of the address phase and are maintained until the start of the next address phase MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 20 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The address phase is the period of time from the assertion of TS until the address phase is terminated by one of the following signals Address acknowledge AACK e Address retry ARETRY e Transfer error acknowledge If the external memory is under chip select control and the chip selects are enabled to return handshakes then the chip selects normally generate AACK internally How ever if the external AACK pin is asserted before the chip select module generates the signal the chip select module accepts the external pin information and does not gen erate the AACK signal internally Burst inhibit BI is sampled when AACK is asserted BI is asserted by the slave to indi cate to the SIU that the addressed device does not have burst capability Refer to 5 4 6 2 Burst Inhibit Cycles for more information ARETRY and can also be used to terminate the add
45. Aborted L bus cycles do not result in a show cycle The load store unit of the proces sor may abort the cycle when the previous cycle terminates with a transfer error or when an exception occurs during the current cycle Aborted I bus cycles do result in a show cycle The processor may abort an l bus cycle when it encounters a branch it aborts the fetch just starting on a wrong path In addition the processor aborts the cycle on a cache hit Note that I bus show cycles are not burst A show cycle involves transfer start TS address ADDR cycle type CT address type AT burst BURST and read write WR pins The data phase of an L bus show cycle looks like a write cycle going out on the external bus The address and data phases of a show cycle last one clock cycle each No termination is needed for either phase as all show cycles are automatically terminated inside the SIU For the L bus show cycles 5 show cycles are address only the data phase always follows the address phase by one clock cycle The L bus show cycle does not start until the inter nal cycle completes This allows all show cycles to complete in two clock cycles Show cycles require several holding registers in the SIU to hold address and data of an L bus cycle and address of an I bus cycle until the E bus is available and the show cycle is run When these holding registers are full the internal bus or buses are held up by the SIU while it waits for th
46. BIT ON DSDI AFTER DETECTING READY BIT ON PLLL DSDO WHEN IN DEBUG MODE THE START BIT IS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWED BY A LENGTH BIT AND A CONTROL BIT AND THEN 7 OR 32 INPUT DATA BITS DEBUG PORT DRIVES READY BIT ONTO PLLL DSDO WHEN READY FOR A NEW TRANSMISSION Figure 8 9 Synchronous Clocked Serial Communications In Figure 8 9 the frequency on the DSCK pin is equal to CLKOUT frequency divided by two DSDI and DSCK transitions must meet setup and hold timing requirements with respect to CLKOUT MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 29 PLLL DSDO INT S R CLK DEBUG PORT DETECTS THE START BIT ON DSDI AND FOLLOWS THE READY BIT WITH TWO STATUS BITS AND N 7 OR 32 OUTPUT DATA BITS DEVELOPMENT TOOL DRIVES THE START BIT ON DSDI AFTER DETECTING READY BIT ON PLLL DSDO WHEN IN DEBUG MODE THE START BIT IS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWED BY A LENGTH BIT AND A CONTROL BIT AND THEN N 7 OR 32 INPUT DATA BITS DEBUG PORT DRIVES READY BIT ONTO PLLL DSDO WHEN CPU READY FOR A NEW TRANSMISSION Figure 8 10 Synchronous Self Clocked Serial Communications In Figure 8 10 the DSCK pin is not used and the transmission is clocked by CLKOUT DSDI transitions must meet setup and hold timing requirements with respect to CLKOUT 8 3 4 Development Port Transmissions The development port starts communications by setting PLLL DSDO the ready bit or MSB of the 35 bit development port shift r
47. Note that the timing of output port pins does not match the timing of the corresponding bus control pins SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 USER S MANUAL 5 9 2 Port M PORTM Port M Data Register 0 1 2 3 0x8007 FC68 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 PM4 5 6 7 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 U U U U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U Unaffected by reset Writes to PORTM are stored in internal data latches If any bit of the port is configured as an output the value latched for that bit is driven onto the pin A read of PORTM returns the value at the pin only if the pin is configured as a discrete input Otherwise the value read will be the value stored in the internal data latch PORTM can be read or written at any time This register is unaffected by reset DDRM Port M Data Direction Register 0 1 2 3 0x8007 FC60 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 DDMS DDM4 DDM5 DDM6 DDM7 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The bits in this register control the direction of the port M pin drivers when the pins are configured as pins Setting a bit in this register to one configures the corresponding pin as an output clear
48. PAPA6 PA6 ADDR6 PAPA7 PA7 ADDR7 Table 5 53 Port B Pin Assignments PMPAR Bit Port B Signal Bus Control Signal PBPAO PBO ADDR8 PBPA1 PB1 ADDR9 PBPA2 PB2 ADDR10 PBPA3 PB3 ADDR11 PBPA4 PB4 ADDR12 5 5 ADDR13 PBPA6 PB6 ADDR14 PBPA7 PB7 ADDR15 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 105 5 9 4 Ports J and L PORTI PORTJ PORTK PORTL Port J L Data Registers 0x8007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 o PJi PJ2 PJ5 PJ6 PJ7 RESET U U U U U U U U 0 U U U U U U U 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 PKO PK1 PK2 PK4 PKS 0 0 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 PL7 RESET U U U U U U U U 0 0 U U U U U U U Unaffected by reset Writes to port I J K and L data registers are stored in internal data latches If any pin in one of these ports is configured as an output the value latched for the correspond ing data register bit is driven onto the pin A read of one of these data registers returns the value at the pin only if the pin is configured as a discrete input Otherwise the value read is the value stored in the internal data latch Port 1 J and L data registers can be read at any time
49. The encodings are shown in Table 5 24 Table 5 24 Pin Configuration Encodings PCON Pin Assignment 0b00 Chip enable CE 0b01 Write enable WE 0b10 Output enable OE 0611 Address or discrete output Note that only the CSBOOT and CS 1 5 pins can be CE pins If the pin is a CE pin the REGION field does not affect it since each CE pin has its own base address reg ister and decoding logic The CS0 and CS 6 11 pins cannot be CE pins If one of these pins is configured as a chip enable the pin is never asserted A PCON encoding of 0b11 assigns the pin to its alternate function In this case the value in the port A B pin assignment register PABPAR determines whether the pin operates as an address pin or discrete output pin Refer to 5 9 3 Ports A and B for more information 5 5 12 2 Byte Enable Control The BYTE field is applicable only for pins configured as WE pins This field is used to determine to which of the four E bus byte enables the pin corresponds That is the WE pin will be asserted only when the corresponding E bus byte enable is asserted The encoding is shown in Table 5 25 If the region can always be written in 32 bit quantity this field can be programmed to any value Table 5 25 BYTE Field Encodings BYTE Byte Enabled 0500 Byte enable 0 0b01 Byte enable 1 0b10 Byte enable 2 0611 Byte enable 3 If the pin is configured as an OE this field is n
50. UISA register set 3 10 Unimplemented internal memory accesses 5 9 Unlock all 4 7 Unlock line 4 7 Unordered exceptions 3 31 User level registers 3 10 UX bit 3 12 Valid data encoding 8 32 VCO 5 74 VDDKAP1 5 70 Vppsn 5 70 VE bit 3 13 Vector table exception 3 33 VF 2 17 8 5 VFLS 2 17 8 6 Vsssn 5 70 VSYNC 5 29 8 10 VX bit 3 12 VXCVI bit 3 13 VXIDI 3 12 VXIMZ bit 3 12 VXISI 3 12 VXSNAN 3 12 VXSOFT bit 3 13 VXSQRT bit 3 13 VXVC bit 3 12 VXZDZ bit 3 12 INDEX MPC509 Rev 15 June 1998 User s Manual W Wake up request 5 80 5 85 Watchpoint signals See WP Watchpoints 8 1 1 WE 5 35 Window trace 8 8 WP 2 17 5 43 5 48 WR 2 9 5 13 5 20 Write cycle 5 17 Write enable See WE Write protection 5 43 5 48 Write read signal See WR WUR 5 80 5 85 XE bit 3 13 XER 3 15 2 19 5 70 XFCP 2 19 5 70 XTAL 2 19 5 70 XX bit 3 12 2 ZE bit 3 13 ZX bit 3 12 MPC509 User s Manual INDEX Rev 15 June 1998 MOTOROLA Index 9 MOTOROLA INDEX MPC509 Index 10 Rev 15 June 1998 User s Manual
51. _ 0x8007 EFBO Reseved 0x8007 EFBC S 0x8007 Software Service Register SWSR Reserved S 0x8007 EFC4 Software Watchdog Control Field Timing Count SWCR SWTC S U 0x8007 EFC8 Software Watchdog Register 0x8007 EFCC Reserved S U 0x8007 EFDO Port Q Edge Detect Data PQEDGDAT Reserved S 0x8007 EFD4 Port Pin Assignment Register PQPAR _ 0x8007 EFD8 Reserved 0x8007 CAUTION Avoid writing to test location 0x8007 EF98 Setting the high order bit in this reserved register causes the MCU to enter test mode 6 3 Module Configuration The peripheral control unit module configuration register PCUMCR contains fields for stopping the system clock to IMB2 modules assigning certain PCU registers to either supervisor or unrestricted memory space and assigning the number of interrupt request levels available to IMB2 peripherals MOTOROLA 6 2 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL PCUMCR Peripheral Control Unit Module Configuration Register 0x8007 EF80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 STOP IRQMUX RESERVED SUPV RESERVED RESET 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 6 2 PCUMCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description Stop system clock to peripherals controller 0 STOP 0 Enable system clock to IMB2 modules 1 Disable system
52. chip select 5 39 BB 2 8 5 14 5 20 BDIP 2 14 5 5 5 14 5 21 5 23 5 53 5 63 BE and chip selects 5 51 BE 2 10 5 13 5 15 5 20 5 27 5 44 BE bit 3 19 BG 2 7 5 14 5 20 BI 2 11 5 13 5 23 Block size 5 43 5 45 BMCR 5 11 BME 5 11 5 91 5 92 BMLK 5 91 5 92 BMT 5 91 5 92 Boundary scan cells 9 1 descriptor language 9 8 register 9 1 BPU 3 5 MPC509 User s Manual INDEX Rev 15 June 1998 BR 2 6 5 14 5 20 Branch prediction 3 5 processing unit 3 5 trace enable 3 19 Breakpoint counter A value and control register 8 52 Breakpoint counter B value and control register 8 53 Breakpoints 8 11 BRKNOMSK 8 51 BSC 9 1 BSDL 9 8 BSIZE 5 43 5 45 BSR 9 1 Buffers I O 2 2 BURST 2 9 5 13 5 20 Burst cycles 5 22 data in progress See BDIP inhibit cycles 5 23 See also interface 5 63 transfers 5 66 type 1 5 54 type 2 5 54 Burstable device 5 52 Bus busy See BB Bus cycle address phase 5 20 arbitration phase 5 20 data phase 5 21 Bus grant See BG Bus monitor 5 90 and debug mode 5 11 enable bit BME 5 11 5 91 5 92 lock 5 91 5 92 timing 5 91 5 92 Bus request See BR BYPASS 9 4 BYTE 5 44 5 51 Byte enables See BE BYTES field 3 16 C bit 3 12 CA bit 3 16 Cache inhibit 5 43 5 49 Cancel reseration See CR Carry 3 16 CCER 4 4 MOTOROLA Index 1 5 35 CGBMSK 8 50 Charge pump 5 73 CHBMSK 8 50 Checkstop reset 5 28 5 48 5 93 enable 5 5 Checkstop state and debug mode 8 37 Chip enable See CE
53. however they cause a breakpoint only when they change from cleared to set If they remain set they do not cause an additional breakpoint until they are cleared and set again External breakpoints are not referenced to any particular instruction they are refer enced to the current or following L bus cycle The breakpoint is taken as soon as the processor completes an instruction that uses the L bus 8 2 4 Breakpoint Masking The processor responds to two different types of breakpoints The maskable break point is taken only if the processor is in a recoverable state This means that taking the breakpoint will not destroy any of the internal machine context The processor is defined to be in a recoverable state when the recoverable exception bit is set Maskable breakpoints are generated by the internal breakpoint logic modules on the IMB2 and the development port Non maskable breakpoints cause the processor to stop without regard to the state of the MSR RI bit If the processor is in a non recoverable state when the breakpoint occurs the state of the SRRO SRR1 and the DAR may have been overwritten by the breakpoint It will not be possible to restart the processor since the restart address and MSR context may not be available in SRRO and SRR1 Only the development port and the internal breakpoint logic are capable of generating a non maskable breakpoint This allows the user to stop the processor in cases where it would
54. inhibit 4 8 invalidate all 4 7 load and lock 4 7 miss 4 5 operation 4 5 reading 4 8 unlock all 4 7 unlock line 4 7 Instruction fetch visibility signals See VF Integer exception register 3 15 Integer unit 3 5 Interface type See ITYPE Internal default mode 5 99 memory mapping 5 10 reset flow 5 97 Interrupt controller 6 5 enable register See IRQENABLE external 6 7 See also IRQ multiplexing 6 7 PIT 6 7 request levels 6 7 6 10 register See PITQIL request multiplexer control 6 3 Sources 6 7 Invalidate all 4 7 IP 5 40 5 46 INDEX MPC509 Rev 15 June 1998 User s Manual IRQ 2 21 6 10 IRQAND 6 8 6 9 IRQENABLE 6 8 6 9 IRQMUX 6 3 6 8 IRQPEND 6 8 6 9 ISCTL 5 30 8 1 ISE 8 54 ISEE 8 55 ITYPE 5 44 5 52 5 53 IU 3 5 IW 8 48 J Joint test action group See JTAG JTAG 9 1 instruction register 9 3 non IEEE 1149 1 1990 operation 9 8 reset 5 93 signals 9 1 9 2 zi LAST 5 5 5 23 5 53 5 54 5 63 LBRK 8 54 L bus 5 7 IMB2 interface 5 7 memory 5 30 enable 5 6 show cycles 5 5 to 1 cross bus access enable 5 6 L bus support 8 17 control register 1 8 49 control register 2 8 50 LCK 7 3 LCTRL1 8 49 LCTRL2 8 50 LE bit 3 19 LEN 5 6 LIMB 5 7 Link register 3 16 Little endian mode 3 19 LIX 5 6 5 11 LMEMBASE 5 6 5 8 7 1 Load and lock 4 7 Load store unit 3 5 3 6 Lock bits and freeze assertion 5 12 Lock PLL 5 93 status 5 82 LOK 5 5 5 38 LOL 5 93 LOLRE 5 76 5 82 5 83 LOO 5 82 5 85 5 93
55. nal clocks are turned off However the oscillator and the PLL continue to operate normally The low power mode exit signal is the logical OR of the external reset pin the IRQ 0 1 pins if LPMM 1 the decrementer interrupt and the PIT interrupt Since the oscillator and PLL are still running and locked the low power mode exit signal must be a minimum of two system clock cycles and exiting this state does not incur a PLL lock time MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 78 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 6 6 4 Sleep Mode Mode 0x3 is sleep mode In this state a clocks are turned off including the oscillator and the PLL The low power mode exit signal is the logical OR of the external reset pin and the IRQ 0 1 pins if LPMM 1 The decrementer interrupt and the PIT interrupt are not active in this mode Since all clocks are stopped this signal is asynchronous Exiting state 0x3 requires the normal crystal start up time plus PLL lock time or time out 5 6 6 5 Exiting Low Power Mode Table 5 36 summarizes the events that cause the MCU to exit from each of the three low power modes Table 5 36 Exiting Low Power Mode a Mode 0 1 0 2 0 3 RESETOUT assertion Yes Yes Yes pin assertion if LPMM 1 Yes Yes Yes Decrementer interrupt Yes Yes No PIT interrupt Yes Yes No The low power mode mask LPMM bit in the SCCR is used to mask the IRQ 0 1 pins to the low power m
56. processor is ready to read the next instruction Reading an instruction is the first action the processor takes after entering debug mode The processor and development port activity is determined by the instruction or data shifted into the shift register The instruction or data shifted into the shift register also determines the status shifted out during the next transmission The next step column indicates which step has the appropriate status response MOTOROLA 8 38 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 8 18 Debug Mode Development Port Usage This Serial Data Shifted In Shifted Out Development Port Activity Next Ste DSDO Indicates This P Activit Ste READY Transmission BOOS SON ACHYIY CPU instruction Port transfers instruction to CPU non DPDR CPU executes instruction fetches next 1 instruction CPU instruction DPDR Port transfers instruction to CPU 2 read CPU executes instruction reads DPDR CPU instruction DPDR Port transfers instruction to CPU 3 write CPU writes DPDR fetches next instruction 1 CPU instruction Null Port transfers instruction to CPU instruction execution CPU signals exception to port fetches next 4 causes exception instruction Data for CPU Port ignores data terminates fetch with error latches sequence error 5 CPU signals exception to port fetches next ins
57. rmoo xz The sequence of activity shown in Table 8 18 is summarized below in Figure 8 13 The numbers in the large circles correspond to the steps in Table 8 18 The letters in the large circles indicate the status that will be shifted out during the transmission The letters in the small circles show the activity of the development port and the CPU as a result of the transmission CPU TRAP ENABLI DATA NSTRUCTIO NON DPDR INSTRUCTIO CPU DATA EL DPDR WRITE INSTRUCTION ANY INSTRUCTION WITH EXCEPTION DPDR READ NSTRUCTION CPU INSTR TRAP CPU ENABLE C DATA CPU cp DATA NETR ENABLE SHIFT OUT NULL STATUS SHIFT OUT EXCEPTION STATUS SHIFT OUT SEQUENCE ERROR STATUS SHIFT OUT DATA FROM CPU TERMINATE CPU READ WITH ERROR LATCH SEQUENCE ERROR l TRANSFER INSTR TO CPU R TRANSFER DATA TO CPU READ T TRANSFER DATA TO TECR Figure 8 13 General Port Usage Sequence Diagram 8 5 3 Port Usage in Normal Non Debug Mode The sequence of events for communication with the development port when the CPU is not in debug mode freeze is not indicated on the VFLS pins is shown below in Table 8 18 Note that any instructions or data for the CPU result in a sequence error status response when the processor is not in debug mode Only data for the trap enable control register is allowed MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 40 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 8 19 Non Debug Mode
58. rolr bidir ee y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 safe 0 0 0 0 097 0 0 0 0 safe 0 X 46 0 amp 48 0 amp 50 amp 525 0 amp 54 0 amp 56 o amp 58 0 amp 60 0 ccell dsval amp 62 0 amp 64 03 amp 66 0 amp 68 0 amp 70 0 amp T23 0 amp 74 0 amp T 5 0 amp 78 0 amp 80 05 ccell dsval amp 82 0 amp 84 0 amp 86 0 amp 88 0 amp 90 Oi amp 925 amp 94 0 amp 965 0 amp 98 0 amp 100 0 ccell dsval amp 102 0 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE Rev 15 June 98 rslt MOTOROLA 9 13 LOZ ox controlr 0 amp 103 BC 6 D 19 bidir Xy 104 0 Ziyts a amp 104 BC 2 controlr 0 amp v E05 6 D CE8 bidir X 106 0 Z y v amp 25 Ky controlr 10 amp 107 6 D 17 bidir X 08 0 Zu amp 55 08 2 control 07a amp 109 BC 6 D 16 bidir X 110 0 amp VELO BG 2 controlr 0 amp 111 BC 6 D 15 bidir X 112 0 5 amp VEL2 Q2 controlr 00 7 amp 113 BC 6 D 14 bidir X 114 0 VAM amp NELE 25 controlr 0 amp 115 BC 6 D 13 bidi
59. they are updated at the start of the address phase and maintained until the start of the next address phase High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists Depending on the state of the pipeline the data phase starts either one clock cycle after the address phase starts or as soon as the previous data phase completes The data phase completes when it is terminated by transfer acknowledge TA or transfer error acknowledge If the cycle is a burst cycle then multiple assertions are required to terminate the data phase Refer to 5 4 5 3 Data Phase for additional infor mation on data phase signals 2 5 3 1 Data Bus DATA 0 31 Input output Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MPC509 USER S MANUAL Asserted Negated Represents the state of data during a read or write 16 bit devices must reside on DATA 0 15 32 bit devices reside on DATA 0 31 Assertion negation On write cycles the SIU drives data one clock after driving TS The data is available until the slave asserts TA During reads the data must be available from the slave with TA The data bus is driven once for non burst transac tions and four times for burst transactions High impedance The pins are placed in a high imped ance state during reads or while the bus is idle or when the SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 13 bus is arbitrated away For write cycles the hig
60. those conditions are encountered sequentially After the exception handler handles an exception instruction execu tion continues until the next exception condition is encountered When the exception is taken no program state is lost 3 11 3 Unordered Exceptions Unordered exceptions may be reported at any time and are not guaranteed to pre serve program state information The processor can never recover from a reset exception It can recover from other unordered exceptions in most cases However if a debug port non maskable interrupt or machine check exception occurs during the servicing of a previous exception the machine state information in SRRO and SRR1 and in some cases the DAR and DSISR may not be recoverable the processor may be in the process of saving or restoring these registers To determine whether the machine state is recoverable the user can read the HI recoverable exception bit in SRR1 During exception processing the HI bit in the MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 31 MSR is copied to SRR1 and then cleared The operating system should set the RI bit in the MSR at the end of each exception handler s prologue after saving the program state and clear the bit at the start of each exception handler s epilogue before restor ing the program state Then if an unordered exception occurs during the servicing of an exception handler the RI bit in SRR1 will contain the correct v
61. 0 or supervisor ATO 1 privilege level If the chip select logic detects a protection violation SUPV 1 and ATO 0 it asserts the internal TEA signal and does not assert the external chip enable signal This protection applies to data address space only The chip select logic does not check for supervisor access protection on instruction accesses 5 5 7 2 Data Space Protection The DSP bit in the option registers for CSBOOT the CSBOOT sub block and CS 1 5 controls whether instruction access is allowed to the address block associated with the chip select If DSP is set the address block is designated as data space no instruction access is allowed This feature can be used to prevent the system from inadvertently executing instructions out of data space When an access is made to the region controlled by the chip select the chip select logic compares the DSP bit with the internal AT1 signal which indicates whether the access is to instruction or data space If the chip select logic detects a protection vio lation DSP 1 and AT1 1 it asserts the internal signal and does not assert the external chip enable signal 5 5 7 3 Write Protection The WP bit in the option registers for CSBOOT the CSBOOT sub block and CS 1 5 controls whether the address block is write protected If WP is set read accesses only MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 48 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL are permitted If WP is cleared
62. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 149 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 2 30 31 TAD PS PCON BYTE REGION RESERVED ITYPE RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0b00 if pins are configured as chip selects at reset otherwise 0611 CSOR6 CS6 Option Register CSOR7 CS7 Option Register CSORS8 CS8 Option Register CSOR9 CS9 Option Register CSOR10 CS10 Option Register CSOR11 CS11 Option Register 0x8007 FDBC 0x8007 FDB4 0x8007 FDAC 0x8007 FDA4 0x8007 FD9C 0x8007 FD94 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED PCON BYTE REGION RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0b00 if pins are configured as chip selects at reset otherwise 0611 Table 5 19 describes the fields in the chip select option registers MOTOROLA 5 42 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 5 19 Chip Select Option Register Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 3 BSIZE Block size This field determines the size of the block associated with the base address 0000 Disables corresponding region 0001 4 Kbytes 0010 8 Kbytes 0011 16 Kbytes 0100 32 Kbytes 0101 64 Kbytes 0110 128 Kbytes 0111 256 Kbytes 1000 512 Kbytes 1001 1 Mbyte 1010 2 Mbytes 1011 4 Mbytes 1100 8 Mbytes 1101 16 Mbytes 1110 32 Mbytes 1111 64 Mbytes
63. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 6 6 PITQIL Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 Reserved 1 5 IRQOL Interrupt request level for the IRQO pin 6 10 IRQ1L Interrupt request level for the pin 11 15 IRQ2L Interrupt request level for the IRQ2 pin 16 26 Reserved 27 31 PITIRQL Interrupt request level for PIT interrupts 6 6 Port Q When not used as interrupt inputs the IRQ 0 6 PQ 0 6 pins can be used for general purpose The following registers control port operation Port Q Pin Assignment Register PQPAR allows the user to configure each pin as a digital input digital output edge or level sensitive interrupt request to the MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MPC509 6 10 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CPU or edge or level sensitive interrupt request to the interrupt controller Port Edge Detect Data Register PQEDGDAT contains the following fields The port Q data field PQ 0 6 monitors or controls the state of port Q pins depending on the encoding for each pin in the PQPAR The port Q edge detect status field PQE 0 6 monitors when the proper tran sition occurs on a port Q or interrupt request pin 6 6 1 Port Q Edge Detect Data Register The port edge detect data register PQEDGDAT consists of the port edge detect status field PQE 0 6 and the port Q data field PQ 0 6 Port Q edge status PQE bits indicate when the proper transition has occurred on a
64. 0 7 09 VER m 09 Figure 6 3 Time Multiplexing Protocol For IRQ Pins The IRQMUxX field the PCU module configuration register PCUMCR selects the type of multiplexing the interrupt controller performs Refer to Table 6 4 Table 6 4 IMB2 Interrupt Multiplexing IRQMUX 0 1 5 ng Maximum Latency 00 IRQ O 7 None One clock cycle 01 IRQ 0 15 Two to one Two clock cycles 10 IRQ 0 23 Three to one Three clock cycles 11 IRQ 0 31 Four to one Four clock cycles Time multiplexing is disabled during reset but the reset default value enables time multiplexing as soon as reset is released 6 5 3 Interrupt Controller Registers Control and status registers associated with the interrupt controller indicate which of 32 possible interrupt levels are pending and control which interrupt sources are passed on to the CPU Table 6 5 lists these registers Table 6 5 Interrupt Controller Registers Register Description Contains a status bit for each of the 32 interrupt levels Each bit of IRQPEND is a read only status bit that reflects the current state of the corresponding interrupt signal Pending Interrupt Request Register IRQPEND Interrupt Enable Register IRQENABLE Contains an enable bit for each of the 32 interrupt levels Logical AND of the IRQPEND and IRQENABLE registers This register Enablea Active Interrupt reflects which levels are actually causing th
65. 01 2 e gt PQ 0 6 IRQ 0 6 UNIT PCU 9 amp J 0 7 0 7 0 7 tc EM M 658 11 11 0 3 CHIP SELECTS e amp h ADDR 12 15J PB 4 7 ADDR 16 29 DATA 0 31 BURST 93 lt BURST PIO _ lt gt gt TEA PI Em AACK PI2 46 lt TA PI3 BE 0 3 BE 0 1 PI 4 5 EXTERNAL BUS 2 3 6 7 INTERFACE lt gt ATO PJ1 1 m Td gt AT1 PJ2 gt CT 0 3 9 gr TS PJ3 4 7 CR lt CR DS 4 3 lt SIU E gt BR PM4 BB PM5 4 m BG PM6 ARETRY lt lt ARETRY PM7 DSCK lt DSCK DSDI DSDI BDIP x gt BDIP PKO WR a gt I WR PK1 PLLL DSDO amp g CM gt PLLL DSDO PK2 VF 0 2 gt 5 l VF 0 2 PK 3 5 VFLS 0 1 f l VFLS 0 1 YPK 6 7 CLOCKS 4 H WP 0 5 p 5 A 0 5 2 7 a a RESET RESETOUT PDWU XTAL lt EXTAL EI XFCN XFCP MODCLK CLKOUT ECROUT MOTOROLA 1 4 Figure 1 3 MPC509 Signals INTRODUCTION Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MAN
66. 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 8 11 Debug Enable Register DER This register enables the user to selectively mask the events that may cause the pro cessor to enter into debug mode DER Debug Enable Register SPR 149 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CH FPU DE SY FPA RESERVED STPE MCEE DSEE ISEE EXTIE ALEE PREE VEE CEE RESERVED SEE TRE SEE RESET 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 SEEE RESERVED RENS IBRKE E DPIE RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Table 8 36 DER Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 1 Reserved Checkstop enable bit 2 CHSTPE 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 Debug mode entry enabled reset value Machine check exception enable bit 3 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Data storage exception type of machine check exception enable bit 4 DSEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Instruction storage exception type of machine check exception enable bit 5 ISEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled External interrupt enable bit 6 EXTIE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Alignment exception enable bit 7 ALEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mo
67. 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 4 1 Enabling Debug Mode Debug mode is enabled by asserting the DSCK pin during reset The state of this pin is sampled immediately before the negation of RESETOUT If the DSCK pin is sam pled low debug mode is disabled until a subsequent reset when the DSCK pin is sampled high When debug mode is disabled the internal watchpoint breakpoint hard ware is still operational and can be used by a software monitor program for debugging purposes The DSCK pin is sampled again eight clock cycles following the negation of RESETOUT If DSCK is negated following reset the processor jumps to the reset vec tor and begins normal execution If DSCK is asserted following reset and debug mode is enabled the processor enters debug mode before executing any instructions A timing diagram for enabling debug mode is shown in Figure 8 11 SRESET DSCK DM EN NMBKPT DSCK ASSERTED PRIOR TO RESETOUT NEGATION ENABLES DEBUG MODE DEBUG MODE IS ENABLED IF DSCK IS HIGH IMMEDIATELY BEFORE RESETOUT NEGATES DSCK IS NEGATED WITHIN EIGHT CLOCKS FOLLOWING RESETOUT NEGATION TO AVOID ENTRY INTO DEBUG MODE INTERNAL BREAKPOINT SIGNAL DOES NOT ASSERT BECAUSE DSCK IS NEGATED LESS THAN EIGHT CLOCKS AFTER RESETOUT NEGATION THEREFORE CPU DOES NOT ENTER DEBUG MODE FOLLOWING RESET Figure 8 11 Enabling Debug Mode at Reset 8 4 2 Entering Debug Mode Debug mode is entered whenever debug mode is enabled an except
68. 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 3 20 Exception Vector Offset Table Vector Offset Exception Type Hexadecimal 00000 Reserved 00100 System reset 00200 Machine check 00300 Data access 00400 Instruction access 00500 External interrupt 00600 Alignment 00700 Program 00800 Floating point unavailable 00900 Decrementer 00A00 Reserved 00B00 Reserved 00C00 System call 00D00 Trace 00 00 Floating point assist 01000 Software emulation 01C00 Data breakpoint 01D00 Instruction breakpoint 01E00 Maskable external breakpoint 01F00 Non maskable external breakpoint 3 12 Instruction Timing The MPC509 processor is pipelined Because the processing of an instruction is bro ken into a series of stages an instruction does not require the entire resources of the processor The instruction pipeline in the MPC509 has four stages 1 4 MPC509 The dispatch stage is implemented using a distributed mechanism The central dispatch unit broadcasts the instruction to all units In addition scoreboard in formation regarding data dependencies is broadcast to each execution unit Each execution unit decodes the instruction If the instruction is not implement ed a program exception is taken If the instruction is legal and no data depen dency is found the instruction is accepted by the appropriate execution unit and the data found in the destination register is copied to
69. 1y Output No Driven Driven high five clock cycles after ADDR 0 11 only reset source is negated ADDR 12 29 acetate Driven unless config Float unless configured Float ured as input port as output port DATA 0 31 3 state No Driven if write float if Float unless configured Float read as output port Transfer Attributes WR 3 state No BURST 3 state No 0 3 3 state No Output unless config Float unless configured Float ured as input ports as output port 0 1 3 state No CT 0 3 3 state No Transfer Handshakes TS 3 state No Output unless config Float unless configured Input port output three ured as input port as output port stated AACK 3 state Yes Input unless configured Float unless configured Input port output three as an output port as output port stated BDIP LAST 3 state No Output unless config Float unless configured Input port After reset ured as input port as output port driven by CPU BI 3 state Yes Input unless configured as output port Float Float listen only only _ 3 state Yes Input unless configured driven if configured as Input port output three as an output port stated output port MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 2 2 Pin Definitions Continued Buffer Weak 5 When Bus Is Not Mnemonic Type Pull Up When Bus is Granted Granted During Reset Float listen only only
70. 3 18 TECR 8 25 user level 3 10 Reservation start 5 29 RESET 2 20 5 14 5 93 5 94 Reset 5 92 and chip selects 5 67 clock 5 81 configuration 5 98 word 5 99 flow 5 93 power on 5 101 sources 5 92 status register See RSR RESET bit 5 93 RESETOUT 2 20 5 14 5 95 5 97 RFD 5 72 5 74 5 77 5 84 RFDL 5 78 5 80 5 85 RN field 3 13 RSR 5 92 MPC509 User s Manual E S0 7 3 SAMPLE PRELOAD 9 5 SBLK 5 43 5 46 SCCR 5 83 SCLSR 5 84 SE bit 3 19 SEE 8 54 Sequencer instruction 3 3 Sequencing error encoding 8 33 Serialization fetch 8 1 Show cycles 5 30 8 4 Signals 1 3 2 1 Simplified mnemonics 3 30 Single chip mode 5 78 Single step trace enable 3 19 SIU address map 5 2 block diagram 5 1 module configuration register 5 4 module configuration register See SIUMCR SIUFRZ 5 5 5 11 5 81 SIUMCR 5 4 SIWOEN 8 48 SIW1EN 8 48 SIW2EN 8 48 SIWSEN 8 48 Sleep mode 5 79 SLWOEN 8 52 SLW1EN 8 52 SO bit 3 16 Software monitor support 8 42 Software trap enable selection 8 48 Software watchdog 6 3 control register timing count 6 4 enable 6 4 6 5 lock 6 4 6 5 register 6 5 service register 6 4 time out 5 93 timing count 6 4 6 5 SPECADDR 5 26 Special purpose registers general 3 22 SPECMASK 5 26 Speculative loads preventing 5 25 SPLS 5 76 5 77 5 82 5 85 SPLSS 5 82 5 85 SPRGO SPRGS 3 22 SPRGs 3 22 SPRs general 3 22 SRAM 7 1 data space only 7 3 disabling 7 3 locking 7 3 placement in memory map 7 1 read only 7 3 register
71. 32 Bit Port Access Use During 16 Bit Port Access BEO Byte enable for DATA 0 7 Byte enable for DATA 0 7 BE1 Byte enable for DATA 8 15 Byte enable for DATA 8 15 BE2 Byte enable for DATA 16 23 ADDR30 0 Operand size is word Byte enable for DATA 24 31 1 Operand size is byte or half word Timing Comments 2 5 2 5 Transfer Start TS Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments Assertion Negation The BE 0 3 signals are address at tributes they are updated at the start of the address phase and maintained until the start of the next address phase High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists Asserted Indicates the start of a bus cycle Assertion Coincides with the assertion of BB Negation Occurs one clock cycle after TS is asserted High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists 2 5 2 6 Address Acknowledge AACK Input only Module EBI State Meaning MOTOROLA 2 10 Asserted Indicates that the address phase of a transac tion is complete If the external access is to a chip select region for which the chip select is programmed to return AACK and TA then the external bus interface uses the logical OR of the external AACK pin and the AACK signal returned by the chip select If the chip select returns AACK it is not visible on the exter SIGNAL DESCRIPTI
72. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RESERVED BMLK BME BMT RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 91 Table 5 45 BMCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 3 Reserved Bus monitor lock 4 BMLK 0 Enable changes to BMLK BME BMT 1 Ignore writes to BMLK BME BMT Bus monitor enable 5 BME 0 Disable bus monitor 1 Enable bus monitor Bus monitor timing These bits select the time out period in system clocks for the bus monitor 00 256 system clocks 6 7 BMT 01 64 system clocks 10 32 system clocks 11 2 16 system clocks 8 31 Reserved 5 8 Reset Operation Reset procedures handle system initialization and recovery from catastrophic failure The MPC509 performs reset with a combination of hardware and software The SIU determines whether a reset is valid asserts control signals performs basic system configuration based on hardware mode select inputs and then passes control to the CPU Reset is the highest priority CPU exception Any processing in progress is aborted by the reset exception and cannot be restarted Only essential tasks are performed during reset exception processing Other initialization tasks must be accomplished by the exception handler routine 5 8 1 Reset Sources The following sour
73. 5 e gt A DEBUG BUS CONTROL Q 2 OES AND WES INPUT AND OUTPUT 3 STATE BUFFERS 32 BITS gt x o a 32 2 lt LENGTH STATUSO CONTROL STATUS1 START READY SHIFT CONTROL AND COUNTER SHIFT REGISTER 35 BITS o a a 2 DSDO INTERNAL J DSDI INTERNAL DEVELOPMENT PORT PINS Figure 8 6 Development Port Registers and Data Paths MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 24 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 3 2 1 Development Port Shift Register The development port shift register is a 35 bit shift register Instructions and data are shifted into it serially from DSDI These instructions or data are then transferred in par allel to the processor or the trap enable control register TECR When the processor enters debug mode it fetches instructions from the development port shift register These instructions are serially loaded into the shift register from DSDI When the processor is in debug mode data is transferred to the CPU by shifting it into the shift register The processor then reads the data as the result of executing a move from special purpose register DPDR development port data register instruction In debug mode data is also parallel loaded into the development port shift register from the CPU by executing a move to special purpose register instruction It is then shifted out serially to PLLL DSDO 8 3 2 2 Trap Enable Control Register The trap enable control register T
74. 5 23 5 4 7 Decomposed Cycles and Address 0 5 24 5 4 8 Preventing Speculative Loads 5 25 MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS MPC509 vi Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL Paragraph Page Number Number 5 4 8 Accesses to 16 Bit POTIS CREVERA ORARE ERR REC RE E 5 27 cr MICE gen c3 P PDT chek Bat ak TT 5 28 5 4 11 Transfer Error Acknowledge 5 28 SII Dy eh EP TP Rd d Np P Rp EA P REI 5 29 E ps CMU e Rud a duds s 5 30 5 4 14 Storage Reservation Support cence km 5 31 5 4 14 1 PowerPC Architecture Reservation 5 32 5 4 14 2 E bus Storage Reservation 5 33 5 4 14 3 Reservation Storage 5 0 5 33 Hs A dba 5 34 5 5 1 Chip Select dank 5 35 5 5 2 Chip Select Black Diagram RE 5 35 En DH OBS TB ael qu dca Sa hd ace de ae aedi dod acp dried dau dod ar piod 5 36 5 5 4 Chip Select Registers and Address 5 37 5 5 4 1 Chip Select Base Address
75. After VSYNC is negated the trace buffer will contain the program flow trace of the pro gram executed before the programmed event occurred 8 1 4 2 Window Trace Window trace provides a record of the program trace between two events VSYNC should be asserted between these two events After VSYNC is negated the trace buffer will contain information describing the pro gram trace of the program executed between the two events 8 1 4 3 Synchronizing the Trace Window to Internal CPU Events In order to synchronize the assertion or negation of VSYNC to an event internal to the processor internal breakpoints can be used together with debug mode This method is available only when debug mode is enabled Refer to 8 4 Debug Mode Functions The following steps enable the user to synchronize the trace window to events internal to the processor 1 Enter debug mode either immediately out of reset or using the debug mode re quest 2 Program the hardware to break on the event that marks the start of the trace window using the control registers defined in 8 8 Development Support Regis ters 3 Enable debug mode entry for the programmed breakpoint in the debug enable register DER 4 Return to the regular code run 5 The hardware generates a breakpoint when the programmed event is detected and the machine enters debug mode 6 Program the hardware to break on the event that marks the end of the trace MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509
76. BC 6 L 2 bidir Ky 2 Tor 07 277 BE 25 controlr Q amp 28 BC 6 BE L 3 bidir X 29 0 29 2 2 Gontrolb 2o20 4 w amp 30 CROJ bidir X 05 M31 BC_2 controlr 0 amp 32 6 1 bidir X 33 3 3 BC 2 COntEzcodln Q j amp 34 BC 6 CI 2 bidir X 35 0 35 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 86 BC 6 CT 3 bidir X 3T 9 37 2 controlr 0 X amp 433 BC_2 CSBOOT_L output2 Xy amp 39 BC 6 CS 0 bidir X 40 0 num cell port function safe ccell dsval 40 Gontrolr 0 3 amp 41 BC 6 CS 1 bidir X 42 0 42 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 43 BC 6 C912 5 bidir X 44 0 44 controelr 0 amp MOTOROLA 9 12 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE Rev 15 June 98 rslt 71 509 USER S MANUAL 45 BC 6 46 2 47 6 48 2 49 BC 6 50 2 51 6 52 BC_2 53 BC_6 54 BC 2 RIS 6 56 2 57 6 58 2 259 _6 num 11 60 2 61 6 62 BC 25 X63 BC 6 64 2 69 BC_6 66 BC_2 67 _6 68 2 69 BG 6 70 BC_2 BC 6 72 2 73 _6 74 2 75 BC_6 76 BC_2 77 BC_6 7 2 WES 6 num cell 80 2 81 6
77. Byte Reverse Indexed sthu rS d rA Store Half Word with Update sthux rS rA rB Store Half Word with Update Indexed sthx rS rA rB Store Half Word Indexed stmw rS d rA Store Multiple Word stswi rS rA NB Store String Word Immediate stswx rS rA rB Store String Word Indexed stw rS d rA Store Word stwbrx rS rA rB Store Word Byte Reverse Indexed stwcx rS rA rB Store Word Conditional Indexed stwu rS d rA Store Word with Update stwux rS rA rB Store Word with Update Indexed MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 29 Table 3 18 Instruction Set Summary Continued Mnemonic Operand Syntax Name stwx rS rA rB Store Word Indexed subf subf subfo subfo rD rA rB Subtract From subfc subfc subfco subfco rD rA rB Subtract from Carrying subfe subfe subfeo subfeo rD rA rB Subtract from Extended subfic rD rA SIMM Subtract from Immediate Carrying subfme subfme subfmeo subfmeo rD rA Subtract from Minus One Extended subfze subfze subfzeo subfzeo rD rA Subtract from Zero Extended sync Synchronize tw TO rA rB Trap Word twi TO rA SIMM Trap Word Immediate xor xor rA rS rB XOR xori rA rS UIMM XOR Immediate xoris rA rS UIMM XOR Immediate Shifted 3 10 2 Recommended Simplified Mnemonics To simplify assembly language coding a set of alternative mnemonics is provided for some frequently used operations such as no op load immediate load address mov
78. DD i ete odd ok rte bcd er esc 9 6 So EXTEST PULLUP 10004 het ERR RESP E RES E EA P ex ees 9 7 un POODE ike beh ep hid 9 7 usu DMSCBN COHBO usas aues endac dtd E PARE S SEIS adage nus 9 8 Pr 9 8 9 7 Norn IEEE 1149 1 1990 Operation 9 8 9 8 Boundary Scan Descriptor Language BSDLI 9 8 INDEX MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS MPC509 xii Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL 5 10 5 13 MPC509 LIST OF FIGURES Title Page 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Output Only and Three State I O Buffers 2 2 BIGGE DIa MPO RM Mit 3 2 Sequencer Data Path 2 3 4 ROPU Programming Model MEET 3 9 Basic Instruction 3 34 Cache Dani BEIDE AENEA 4 2 Instruction Cache 4 3 SIU 5 2 Internal Module 1 5 8 Placement
79. External memory chips can use these signals to determine which byte location is enabled Table 5 7 shows the encod ings for these pins during accesses to 32 bit and 16 bit ports BE 0 3 MS A device need only observe the byte enables corresponding to the data lanes on which it resides For example a device on data lane DATA 0 7 should use BEO and a device on DATA 0 15 should use BE 0 1 The device should not respond to the bus cycle unless its byte enables are active at the start of the bus cycle Address types These address attribute signals define addressed space AT 0 1 MS as user or supervisor data or instruction Refer to Table 5 6 for encod ings These signals have the same timing as ADDR 0 29 Cycle type signals These address attribute signals indicate what type of CT 0 3 5 5 bus cycle the bus master is initiating Used for development support Re fer to Table 5 14 for encodings Burst cycle This address attribute indicates that the transfer is a burst BURST MS transfer If a burst access is burst inhibited by the slave the BURST pin is driven during each single beat decomposed cycle Address acknowledge When asserted indicates the slave has received the address from the bus master This signal terminates the address AACK SM phase of a bus cycle When the bus master receives this signal from the slave the master can initiate another address transfer This signal must be asserted at the s
80. FPSCR OX at the completion of the instruction 3 7 4 3 Condition Register CRn Field Compare Instruction When a specified CR field is set by a compare instruction the bits of the specified field are interpreted as shown in Table 3 7 A condition register field can also be accessed by the mfcr mcrf and mterf instructions Table 3 7 CRn Field Bit Settings for Compare Instructions Bit Description Less than floating point less than LT FL For integer compare instructions rA SIMM UIMM or rB algebraic comparison or rA SIMM UIMM or rB logical comparison For floating point compare instructions frA frB Greater than floating point greater than GT FG For integer compare instructions rA gt SIMM UIMM or rB algebraic comparison or rA SIMM UIMM or rB logical comparison For floating point compare instructions frA gt frB Equal floating point equal EQ FE 2 For integer compare instructions rA SIMM UIMM or rB For floating point compare instructions frA frB Summary overflow floating point unordered SO FU For integer compare instructions this is a copy of the final state of XER SO at the completion of the in struction For floating point compare instructions one or both of frA and frB is not a number NaN NOTES 1 Here the bit indicates the bit number in any one of the four bit subfields CRO C
81. Floating point invalid operation exception for x x This is a sticky bit VXZDZ Floating point invalid operation exception for 0 0 This is a sticky bit VXIMZ Floating point invalid operation exception for x 0 This is a sticky bit VXVC Floating point invalid operation exception for invalid compare This is a sticky bit FR Floating point fraction rounded The last floating point instruction that potentially rounded the intermediate result incremented the fraction This bit is not sticky Fl Floating point fraction inexact The last floating point instruction that potentially rounded the intermediate result produced an inexact fraction or a disabled exponent overflow This bit is not sticky 15 19 FPRF Floating point result flags This field is based on the value placed into the target register even if that value is undefined Refer to Table 3 4 for specific bit settings 15 Floating point result class descriptor C Floating point instructions other than the compare instructions may set this bit with the FPCC bits to indicate the class of the result 16 19 Floating point condition code FPCC Floating point compare instructions always set one of the FPCC bits to one and the other three FPCC bits to zero Other floating point instructions may set the FPCC bits with the C bit to indicate the class of the result Note that in this case the high order three bits of the FPCC retain their relational sig
82. MPC509 Pin List Primary Function s Port Function Address Bus Data Bus Chip Selects ADDR 0 11 CS 0 11 PA 0 7 PB 0 3 ADDR 12 15 PB 4 7 ADDR 16 29 DATA 0 31 CSBOOT Bus Control Clock Development Support BURST TEA AACK TA BE 0 1 BE2 ADDR30 BE3 PI 0 7 AT 0 1 TS CT 0 3 PJ 1 7 BDIP WR PLLL DSDO VF 0 2 VFLS 0 1 PK 0 7 WP 0 5 PL 2 7 BI BR BB BG ARETRY PM 3 7 CR DS DSCK DSDI XTAL EXTAL XFCN XFCP CLKOUT ECROUT PDWU MODCLK Reset Interrupts RESET RESETOUT IRQ 0 6 0 6 Test TDI TDO TCK TMS TRST Power VppsN VsssN Vssl VDDE VssE VDDKAP1 VDDKAP2 MPC509 USER S MANUAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 2 1 2 2 Pin Characteristics Table 2 2 shows the characteristics of the MPC509 pins Assume the model for output only and three state I O buffers shown in Figure 2 1 Vpp D IN D EN OUTPUT OUT PIN D OUT PIN OUTPUT ONLY BUFFER 3 STATE BUFFER MPC500 I O BUFFERS Figure 2 1 Output Only and Three State I O Buffers Table 2 2 EBI Pin Definitions Buffer Weak When Bus Is Not Mnemonic Type Pull Up When Bus is Granted Granted During Reset Address and Data Bus Initially high changes
83. Main Block and Sub Block Pairings Multi level protection is accomplished using a paired set of chip select decoding cir cuits The decoding pairs are specified in Table 5 21 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 46 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 21 Main Block Sub Block Pairings Main Block Sub Block CSBOOT CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 If the address of an access falls within a sub block the protection of the sub block overrides that of the main block The sub block decoding logic overrides the decoding logic of the main block If all match conditions are met the chip select pin of the main block is asserted Notice that only CSBOOT and CS 1 5 are involved in the sub block protection scheme These are the chip selects with address decoding logic i e they can act as chip enables 5 5 6 2 Programming the Sub Block Option Register When the SBLK bit in CSOR1 or CSOR5 is set the corresponding address block defined by the BA and BSIZE fields is designated a sub block Table 5 21 indi cates the main block to which the sub block is assigned When the SBLK bit in one of these registers is set the following fields in the sub block option register must be programmed to the same values as in the option register for the corresponding main block ITYPE ACKEN TADLY and PS If there is a discrep ancy in the encoding of any of these bits in the two option registers the chip select unit u
84. Prospective new master should wait until the current master ne gates this signal Burst data in progress Asserted at the beginning of a burst cycle and BDIP EBI Output negated prior to the last beat This signal can be negated prior to the end of a burst to terminate the burst data phase early BE 0 3 EBI Output Byte enables One byte enable per byte lane of the data bus Bus grant When asserted by bus arbiter the bus is granted to the bus BG EBI Input i master Each master has its own bus grant signal Bl EBI Input Burst inhibit When asserted indicates the slave does not support burst mode Bus request When asserted indicates the potential bus master is BR EBI Output questing the bus Each master has its own bus request signal MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 2 5 Signal Descriptions Continued Mnemonic Module Direction Description BURST EBI Output If asserted indicates cycle is a burst cycle CLKOUT EBI Output Continuously running clock All signals driven on the E bus must be syn chronized to the rising edge of this clock aD Cancel reservation Each RCPU has its own CR signal When asserted CR EBI Input instructs the bus master to clear its reservation ASGBAAT Chip CSBOOT Selects Output Chip select of system boot memory Chip
85. RESERVED 0x8007 E000 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT PCU 0x8007 EFFC 0x8007 F000 NTROL REGISTER co ale 0 8007 EXTERNAL VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 1 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES OxFFFO 6FFF OxFFFO 0000 EXTERNAL OxFFFF 8000 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES OxFFFF EFFF Figure 7 1 Placement of Internal SRAM in Memory Map 7 3 SRAM Registers The control block for the SRAM module contains one control register for configuring the array and one control register for use in testing MOTOROLA STATIC RAM MODULE MPC509 7 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SRAMMCR SRAM Module Configuration Register 0x8007 F000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LCK DIS 2CY RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RO DO S0 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Each SRAM module configuration register contains bits for setting access rights to the array Table 7 2 provides definitions for the bits Table 7 2 SRAMMCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description LCK Lock bit 0 Writes to the SRAMMCR are accepted 1 Writes to the SRAMMCR are ignored DIS Module disable 0 SRAM module is enabled 1 SRAM module is disabled Module can be subsequently re enabled by software set ting this bit or by reset Attempts to read SRAM array when it is
86. SPR151 Time Base Facility SPR152 for Reading SPR153 TBR268 Time Base Lower Read TBL Spe TBR269 Time Base Upper Read TBU SER SS 0 1 SPR156 SPR157 SPR158 SPR159 SPR630 Development Port Data Register DPDR 0 31 Specific to the RCPU implementation of the PowerPC Architecture Figure 3 3 RCPU Programming Model MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 9 Where not otherwise noted reserved fields in registers are ignored when written to and return zero when read An exception to this rule is XER 16 23 These bits are set to the value written to them and return that value when read 3 7 PowerPC UISA Register Set The PowerPC UISA registers can be accessed by either user or supervisor level instructions The general purpose registers and floating point registers are accessed through instruction operands 3 7 1 General Purpose Registers GPRs Integer data is manipulated in the integer unit s thirty two 32 bit GPRs shown below These registers are accessed as source and destination registers through operands in the instruction syntax GPRs General Purpose Registers 81 GPRO GPR1 GPR31 RESET UNCHANGED 3 7 2 Floating Point Registers FPRs The PowerPC architecture provides thirty two 64 bit FPRs These registers are accessed as source and destination registers through operands in floating point instructions Each F
87. Set Summary Continued Mnemonic Operand Syntax Name nor nor rA rS rB NOR or or rA rS rB OR orc rA rS rB OR with Complement ori rA rS UIMM OR Immediate oris rA rS UIMM OR Immediate Shifted rfi Return from Interrupt riwimi rlwimi rA rS SH MB ME Rotate Left Word Immediate then Mask Insert rlwinm rlwinm rA rS SH MB ME M Left Word Immediate then AND with rlwnm rlwnm rA rS rB MB ME Rotate Left Word then AND with Mask sc System Call slw slw rA rS rB Shift Left Word sraw sraw rA rS rB Shift Right Algebraic Word srawi srawi rA rS SH Shift Right Algebraic Word Immediate srw srw rA rS rB Shift Right Word stb rS d rA Store Byte stbu rS d rA Store Byte with Update stbux rS rA rB Store Byte with Update Indexed stbx rS rA rB Store Byte Indexed stfd frS d rA Store Floating Point Double stfdu frS d rA Store Floating Point Double with Update frS rB Store Floating Point Double with Update Indexed stfdx frS rB Store Floating Point Double Indexed stfiwx frS rB Store Floating Point as Integer Word Indexed stfs frS d rA Store Floating Point Single stfsu frS d rA Store Floating Point Single with Update stfsux frS rB Store Floating Point Single with Update Indexed stfsx frS r B Store Floating Point Single Indexed sth rS d rA Store Half Word sthbrx rS rA rB Store Half Word
88. TB Different SPR encodings are provided for reading and writing the time base TB Time Base Reading TBR 268 269 0 31 32 63 TBU TBL RESET UNCHANGED Table 3 9 Time Base Field Definitions Bits Name Description 0 31 TBU Time Base Upper The high order 32 bits of the time base 32 63 TBL Time Base Lower The low order 32 bits of the time base In 32 bit PowerPC implementations such as the RCPU it is not possible to read the entire 64 bit time base in a single instruction The mftb simplified mnemonic copies MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 17 the lower half of the time base register TBL to a GPR and the mftbu simplified mne monic copies the upper half of the time base TBU to a GPR 3 9 PowerPC OEA Register Set The PowerPC operating environment architecture OEA includes a number of SPRs and other registers that are accessible only by supervisor level instructions Some SPRs are RCPU specific some RCPU SPRs may not be implemented in other Pow erPC processors or may not be implemented in the same way 3 9 1 Machine State Register MSR The machine state register is a 32 bit register that defines the state of the processor When an exception occurs the current contents of the MSR are loaded into SRH1 and the MSR is updated to reflect the exception processing machine state The MSR can also be modified by the mtmsr s
89. The reset control function interfaces to the reset pins and provides a reset status register The general purpose I O ports provide untimed I O functions on pins that are not used for their primary function 5 1 SIU Block Diagram A block diagram of the SIU is shown in Figure 5 1 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 1 L BUS I BUS 5 2 SIU Address Map Table 5 1 is an address map of the SIU registers An entry of S in the Access column indicates that the register is accessible in supervisor mode only S U indicates that the register can be programmed to the desired privilege level Test indicates that the L BUS BIU I BUS BIU L DATA CROSS BUS ARB amp CNTL ADDRESS DECODE SELECTS ADDRESS INTERFACE DATA MUX SUBBUS INTERFACE BUS MONITOR CLOCKS POWER PC TIMER amp DECREMENTER Figure 5 1 SIU Block Diagram register is accessible in test mode only MOTOROLA 5 2 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 E BUS a 509 USER S MANUAL Table 5 1 SIU Address Map Access Address Register S 0x8007 00 SIU Module Configuration Register SIUMCR Test 0x8007 FC04 510 Test Register 1 SIUTEST1 __ 0 8007
90. These registers are unaffected by reset DDRI DDRK DDRL Port J L Data Direction Registers 0x8007 FC98 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DDIO DDI1 0014 0015 DDI6 DDI7 0 DDJ1 DDJ2 DDJ3 DDJ4 0045 DDJ6 DDJ7 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDKO DDK1 DDK2 DDK3 DDK4 DDK5 DDK6 DDK7 0 0 DDL2 DDL3 DDL4 DDL5 DDL6 DDL7 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The bits in these registers control the direction of the associated pin drivers when the pins are configured as I O pins Setting a bit in these registers configures the corre sponding pin as an output clearing the bit configures the pin as an input MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 106 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL PIPAR PJPAR PKPAR PLPAR Port J Pin Assignment Registers 0x8007 FC9C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PIPAO PIPA1 PIPA2 PIPA4 5 6 PIPA7 0 PJPA1 2 PUPA4 PUPAS RESET 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 PKPA PKPA PKPA PKPA PKPA PKPA PKPA PKPA 0 0 PLPA2 PLPA3 PLPA4 PLPA7
91. Type 1 Synchronous Burst Read Interface 5 64 Type 1 Synchronous Burst Write Interface 5 65 2 Synchronous Burst Read Interface 5 66 SIU Clock Module Block Diagram iuuenes 5 69 LIST OF FIGURES MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 xiii Figure Title Page 5 27 Phase Loched Loop Block Diagram A EHE He bri de 5 72 Do DEI 80 o R 5 73 5 29 Charge Pump with Loop Filter Schematic 222 5 73 5 30 Periodic Interrupt Timer Block Diagram 5 87 5 31 Reset Reguest FID 5 94 5 32 Internal Reset Request A 5 96 6 1 Peripherals Control Unit Block 6 1 6 2 Interrupt Structure Block Diagram 2 6 6 6 3 Time Multiplexing Protocol For IRQ Pins 2 6 8 7 1 Placement of Internal SRAM in Memory Map 7 2 8 1 Watchpoint and Breakpoint Support in the ROPU 8 12 8 2 Partially Supported Watchpoint Breakpoint Example 8 15 8 3 I Bus Support General Structure 8 16 8 4 L Bus Support General ai tec sue lae
92. USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 47 instructions to reconfigure the chip select registers to provide multi level protection shortly after power on 5 5 7 Access Protection The SUPV DSP and WP bits in the option registers for CSBOOT the CSBOOT sub block and CS 1 5 control access to the address block assigned to the chip select These bits are present in the option registers for chip selects with address decoding logic only they are not present in the option registers for CSO or CS 6 11 In addition the bits take effect only if the chip select is programmed either as a CE or as a sub block If the chip select unit detects a protection violation it asserts the internal TEA signal and does not assert the external chip enable signal Assertion of TEA causes the pro cessor to enter the checkstop state enter debug mode or process a machine check exception Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details 5 5 7 1 Supervisor Space Protection The SUPV bit in the option registers for CSBOOT the CSBOOT sub block and CS 1 5 controls user level access to the associated region If the bit is set access is permitted at the supervisor privilege level only If the bit is cleared both supervisor and user level accesses are permitted When an access is made to the region assigned to the chip select the chip select logic compares the SUPV bit with the internal ATO signal which indicates whether the access is at the user ATO
93. X 204 0 amp 204 BO 2 CcontErolr 0 Y amp 205 BC 6 WP 5 bidir X 206 0 Zo amp 206 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 207 BC 6 L 2 bidir X 208 0 amp 208 T BO 2 Fy controlr Q amp 209 BC 6 IRQ L 3 bidir X 210 0 Zu amp 210 2 controli 0 5 amp 211 BC 6 IRQ L 4 bidir X 207 0 Z amp 212 BEA 2p Gontrolr 0 2 amp 213 BC 6 IRQ L 5 bidir X 214 0 75 7 amp 214 BQ 2 controlr 0 amp 215 BC 6 IRQ L 6 bidir X 21 6 0 a amp BG 2 controlr 0 509 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 15 tdi end MPC509 MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 16 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL INDEX 2 10 5 13 5 21 5 49 5 50 5 43 5 49 Acknowledge enable 5 43 5 49 ADDR 2 9 5 13 5 20 Address acknowledge signal See AACK bus See also ADDR phase 5 20 retry See ARETRY type See AT wrapping 5 24 ADR field in ICADR 4 5 ALE 8 54 ALEE 8 55 Alternate functions of chip select pins 5 36 ALU BFU 3 6 Arbitration phase 5 20 ARETRY 2 12 5 13 5 21 5 28 5 34 Asynchronous interface 5 53 5 59 with latch enable 5 60 OE 5 53 5 54 5 60 AT 2 12 5 13 5 14 5 20 BA 5 40 5 45 Back trace 8 8 Base address 5 45 of I bus memory block See IMEMBASE of L bus memory block See LMEMBASE registers
94. also been negated by the previous bus master The SIU cannot start a cycle on the external bus if the current master is holding the BB pin asserted even if the SIU has received a bus grant BG asserted from the bus arbiter Negated Indicates the MCU is not requesting the ad dress bus The MCU may have no bus operation pending it may be parked or the MCU may be in the process of re leasing the bus in response to ARETRY Assertion Occurs when the MCU is not parked and a bus transaction is needed Negation Occurs as soon as the SIU starts a bus cycle after receiving a qualified bus grant Asserted By bus arbiter indicates the bus is granted to the requesting device The signal can be kept asserted to allow the current master to park the bus Single master sys tems can tie this signal low permanently Negated Indicates the requesting device is not granted bus mastership Assertion May occur at any time to indicate the MCU is free to use the address bus After the MCU assumes bus mastership it does not check for a qualified bus grant again until the cycle during which the address bus tenure is com pleted assuming it has another transaction to run The MCU does not accept a BG in the cycles between the as sertion of any TS and AACK Negation May occur at any time to indicate the MCU cannot use the bus The MCU may still assume bus mas tership on the clock cycle of the negation of BG because du
95. be loaded into a modulus counter Reserved bits in this register return zero when read This register can be read or written at any time PICSR Periodic Interrupt Control and Select Register 0x8007 FC40 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 PTE PIE RESERVED PCFS RESERVED PS RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 PITC RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 89 Table 5 44 PICSR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 Reserved Periodic timer enable 1 PTE 0 Disable decrementer counter 1 Enable decrementer counter Periodic interrupt enable 0 Disable periodic interrupt 2 PIE 1 Enable periodic interrupt Caution Be sure the EE external interrupts enable bit in the MSR is cleared before changing the value of this bit 3 4 Reserved 5 7 PCFS PIT clock frequency select To achieve PIT setting of approximately 1 MHz program the PCFS field as shown in Table 5 42 8 14 Reserved PIT status 15 PS 0 No PIT interrupt asserted 1 Periodic interrupt asserted 16 31 PITC Periodic interrupt timing count Number of counts to load into the PIT 5 7 3 6 Periodic Interrupt Timer Register The periodic interrupt timer PIT register is a read only register that shows the current value in the periodic interrupt down
96. before or at the same time as Vpp Vppg and Vppsy Otherwise an excessive draw may result 2 4 Pins with Internal Pull Ups and Pulldowns Table 2 4 lists MPC509 pins with internal pull ups or pulldowns SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 2 3 509 USER S MANUAL Table 2 4 Pins with Internal Pull Ups Pulldowns Pin Pull Up Pulldown AACK ARETRY CR BI Pull Up BB IRQ 0 6 TMS TRST Pulldown 2 5 Signal Descriptions 509 signals are summarized in Table 2 5 and described in the following subsec tions Since pins often have more than one function more than one description may apply to a pin Table 2 5 Signal Descriptions Mnemonic Module Direction Description 32 bit address bus Driven by the bus master to index the bus slave ADDR 0 29 EBI Output Low order bit ADDR31 not pinned out use byte enables instead BE2 functions as ADDR30 during accesses to 16 bit ports AACK EBI Input Address acknowledge When asserted indicates the slave has received the address from the bus master ARETRY EBI Input When asserted indicates the master needs to retry its address phase AT 0 1 EBI Output Address types Define addressed space as user or supervisor data or instruction E Bus busy Asserted by current bus master to indicate the bus is currently BB EBI Input Output in use
97. both read and write accesses are allowed This feature permits the user to protect certain regions such as ROM regions from being inadvert ently written When an access is made to the region controlled by the chip select the chip select logic compares the WP bit with the internal WR signal which indicates whether the access is a read or a write If the chip select logic detects a protection violation WP 1 and WR 0 it asserts the internal TEA signal and does not assert the external chip enable signal 5 5 8 Cache Inhibit Control The CI cache inhibit bit in the option registers for CSBOOT the CSBOOT sub block and CS 1 5 controls whether the information in the address block can be cached The chip select logic provides the status of this bit to the cache during the data phase of an access If Cl is set the data in the region is not cached 5 5 9 Handshaking Control The acknowledge enable ACKEN bit in the option registers for CSBOOT and CS 1 5 determines whether the chip select logic returns address acknowledge AACK and transfer acknowledge TA signals for the region When ACKEN is set the chip select logic returns these signals When ACKEN is set external logic can still return these signals If it does it must assert them before the chip select logic asserts the signals internally When ACKEN is cleared the external device must return them When ACKEN is cleared the chip select logic still returns the BI and PS 0
98. by clearing data bus configuration bit 19 at reset While RESETOUT is being asserted the SIU requests control of the I bus and L bus The IMB2 interface requests control of the IMB2 bus Internal reset is released when RESETOUT is released however the internal buses are not released until 16 clock cycles after RESETOUT is negated If an external reset is asserted any time during this process this process begins again 5 8 2 2 Internal Reset Request Flow Figure 5 32 is a flow diagram for internal reset requests MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 95 EXTERNAL RESET FLOW IF RESET 0 a IS LOO LOL RST NOTE INT RST IS EITHER LOO OR LOL OR JTAG OR SWDOG TIMER OR CHECKSTOP RESET REQUEST gent RESET CLOCKS AND PLL REQUEST THE INTERNAL BUSES IF RESET 0 WAIT FOR 32 CLOCKS OR EBI IDLE INDICATION IS CNT 2 32 OR EBI IDLE ASSERT RESETOUT AND INTERNAL RESETS START THE COUNTER lt WAIT FOR CNT 17 AND WAIT FOR PLL TO LOCK THIS STATE DEPENDS ON PLL MODE AND RESET CONFIG WORD IS CNT 17 OR PLL LOCKED CONTINUE REQUESTING BUSES RELEASE RESETOUT AND INTERNAL RESET START THE COUNTER YES y RELEASE BUS REQUESTS AND GO TO IDLE Figure 5 32 Internal Reset Request Flow MOTOROLA 5 96 SYSTEM
99. by pipelining of consecutive accesses to different regions 5 5 15 1 Pipelined Accesses to the Same Region The chip select unit overlaps consecutive accesses to the same region provided the following conditions are met The second access is a read The region is pipelineable as determined by its ITYPE The TA signal is generated by the chip select logic ACKEN 1 When these conditions are met the address and CE assertion for the second access can overlap the data phase of the first access Figure 5 15 illustrates the concept of overlapped accesses to the same region Note that the diagram cannot be assumed to be accurate in timing CLKOUT 2ND ADDRESS OVERLAP WITH 1ST DATA Figure 5 15 Overlapped Accesses to the Same Region NOTE If the region is programmed to return its own handshaking signals ACKEN 0 the chip select logic does not know whether the device has an address latch hence whether the device is programmable The chip select control logic takes this into account and asserts the CE of the second access only after AACK has been asserted for the first access 5 5 15 2 Pipelined Accesses to Different Regions The chip select unit supports pipelined accesses to different memory regions depend ing on the properties of the two regions The chip select module tracks the incoming Cycles and uses the information in the opt
100. comparator has eight output signals These signals are used to generate the equal and less than signals according to the compare size programmed by the user byte half word word In byte mode all signals are significant In half word mode only four signals from each 32 bit comparator are significant In word mode only two signals from each 32 bit comparator are significant From the new equal and less than signals depending on the compare type pro grammed by the user one of the following four match events is generated equal not equal greater than less than Therefore from the two 32 bit comparators eight match indications are generated Gmatch 0 3 Hmatch 0 3 According to the lower bits of the address and the size of the cycle only match indica tions that were detected on bytes that have valid information are validated the rest are negated Note that if the cycle executed has a smaller size than the compare size e g a byte access when the compare size is word or half word no match indication is asserted Figure 8 4 shows the general structure of L bus support MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 17 BYTE MASK COMPARE SIZECOMPARE TYPE COMPARATOR G EQ BYTE 0 BYTE 1 BYTE 2 BYTE 3 BYTE MASK COMPARATOR H EQ BYTE 0 BYTE 1 BYTE 2 BYTE 3 COMPARATOR E COMPARATOR F Lili TYPE Peroa TYPE
101. corresponds to address bit 19 20 31 Reserved 5 5 4 2 Chip Select Option Registers CSBTOR the option register for CSBOOT has the same field definitions as the option registers for CS 1 5 but has different reset values The CSO and CS 6 10 option reg isters contain a subset of the fields in the CSBTOR The CSBOOT sub block option register contains a different subset of the fields in the CSBTOR The reset values of several bits in the chip select option registers depend on the data bus configuration word the state of the internal data bus at reset The TADLY field in the CSBOOT option register is read from the internal DATA 6 8 bits and the PS field is determined from DATA4 In addition the reset value of the PCON field in the option registers for CS 0 11 depends on the value of internal DATAO at reset If DATAO 1 the CS 0 11 ADDR 0 11 pins are configured as chip selects and the PCON field at reset is 0b10 output enable for CSO and 0b00 chip enable for CS 0 11 If internal DATAO 0 at reset the pins are configured as address pins and the PCON field val ues for all option registers are 0611 non chip select function Refer to 5 8 3 Configuration During Reset for more information on the data bus configuration word MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 40 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CSBTOR CSBOOT Option Register 0x8007 FDFC
102. cycles only A write bus cycle starts only when the pipe depth is zero or would have gone to zero if a new cycle had not started A read bus cycle will start when the pipe depth is either zero or one or would have gone to one if a new cycle had not started An example of bus pipelining is shown in Figure 5 7 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 18 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLKOUT PIPE DEPTH 0 1 2 2 2 Figure 5 7 Example of Pipelined Bus Figure 5 8 illustrates a write access followed by two read accesses on the external bus CLKOUT ADDR PHASE w1 R1 R2 DATA PHASE W1 R1 R2 DEPTH 0 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 Figure 5 8 Write Followed by Two Reads on the E Bus Using Chip Selects MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 19 5 4 5 Bus Cycle Phases The following paragraphs describe the three bus cycle phases arbitration phase address phase and data phase Note that there is no separate arbitration for the address and data buses 5 4 5 1 Arbitration Phase The SIU supports multiple masters but is optimized for single master systems Each master must have bus request bus grant and bus busy signals Arbitratio
103. data in DSDI Development serial data out DSDO The development port signal DSDO shares a pin with the PLLL signal MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 22 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 3 1 1 Development Serial Clock In clocked mode see 8 3 3 Development Port Clock Mode Selection the develop ment serial clock DSCK is used to shift data into and out of the development port shift register The DSCK and DSDI inputs are synchronized to the on chip system clock thereby minimizing the chance of propagating metastable states into the serial state machine The values of the pins are sampled during the low phase of the system clock At the rising edge of the system clock the sampled values are latched internally One quarter clock later the latched values are made available to the development support logic In clocked mode detection of the rising edge of the synchronized clock causes the synchronized data from the DSDI pin to be loaded into the least significant bit of the shift register This transfer occurs one quarter clock after the next rising edge of the system clock At the same time the new most significant bit of the shift register is pre sented at the PLLL DSDO pin Future references to the DSCK signal imply the internal synchronized value of the clock The DSCK input must be driven either high or low at all times and not allowed to float A typical target environment would pull this input low with a resistor To allow th
104. disabled result in internal TEA assertion 2CY Two cycle mode 0 SRAM module is in single cycle mode normal operation 1 SRAM module is in two cycle mode In this mode the first cycle is used for decoding the address and the second cycle is used for accepting or providing data This mode provides some power savings while keeping the memory active Reserved 20 RO Read only 0 4 Kbyte block is readable and writable 1 4 Kbyte block is read only Attempts to write to this space result in internal TEA as sertion 21 DO Data only 0 4 Kbyte block can contain data or instructions 1 4 Kbyte block contains data only Attempts to load instructions from this space result in internal TEA assertion 22 S0 Supervisor only 0 4 Kbyte block is placed in unrestricted space 1 4 Kbyte block is placed in supervisor space Attempts to access this space from the user privilege level result in internal TEA assertion 23 31 Reserved SRAMTST SRAM Test Register 0x8007 F004 The SRAM test register is used for factory testing only MPC509 USER S MANUAL MOTOROLA 7 3 STATIC RAM MODULE Rev 15 June 98 STATIC RAM MODULE MPC509 7 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Development tools are used by a microcomputer system developer to debug the hard ware and software of a target system These tools are used to give t
105. eT RRREXad er AA UE Y COE 3 10 3 7 3 Floating Point Status and Control Register 5 3 11 3 7 4 Condition Register UM eer Rex 3 13 3 7 4 1 Condition Register CRO Field 3 14 3 7 4 2 Condition Register CR1 Field 3 14 3 7 4 3 Condition Register CRn Field Compare 2 15 3 7 5 Integer Exception Register XER 3 15 3 7 6 Link Register LE isses eem mg 3 16 7 7 Count Register ES 3 17 3 8 PowerPC VEA Register Set Time Base 3 17 2 9 PowerPC QEA Register RE RENE S 3 18 291 Machine State Register MSR iiia Rar ba RARE 3 18 3 9 2 DAE Source Instruction Service Register DSISR 3 19 3 9 3 Data Address Register DAR RR ERREUR 3 20 3 94 Time Base Faolily TB ee ede 3 20 2 9 5 Decrementer Register DEC Lies deo 3er RAGEREQRe HERE PR Re XH ERR RR 3 20 3 9 6 Machine Status Save Restore Register 0 6 3 21 3 9 7 Machine Status Save Restore Register 1 1 3 22 3 9 8 General SPAs SPRGO SPRS see RR x xm
106. feedback loop The MF and fields determine the CLKOUT frequency Refer to Table 5 33 X000 x 4 X001 x5 X010 x6 9 12 MF X011 x7 X100 x8 101 x9 X110 x 10 X111 x 11 Caution The MF bits must not be programmed to a value that requires the VCO to operate at greater than 180 MHz Fyco 4 x MF factor x Specifically if the reference crystal fre quency is 5 MHz the MF settings of X110 times 10 and X111 times 11 must be avoided MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 83 Table 5 38 SCCR Bit Settings Continued Bit s Name Description 13 21 Reserved 22 23 LPM Low power mode select bits Refer to Table 5 35 and Table 5 36 00 Normal operating mode 01 2 Low power mode 1 single chip 10 2 Low power mode 2 doze 11 Low power mode 3 sleep Since all clocks are stopped in sleep mode exiting this mode requires the normal crystal start up time plus the PLL lock time Minimum length of the exit signal is two clocks in single chip mode three clocks in doze mode and until the PLL is stable in sleep mode 24 27 Reserved 28 31 RFD Reduced frequency divider The RFD field controls a prescaler at the output of the PLL In normal mode the MF and RFD fields determine the CLKOUT frequency In bypass mode only this field and not the MF field affects CLKOUT frequency In one to one mode this field has no effec
107. floating point instruction in the instruction stream could begin execution before the floating point instruction is retired If the floating point instruction generates an exception the result of the load instruction is discarded the exception is processed and the proces sor automatically re issues the load instruction However if the address of the speculative load represents a FIFO device the specu latively loaded data is lost when the exception is processed and the re issued load instruction loads the next data item in the queue Preventing speculative loads is nec essary to prevent this scenario from occurring MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 25 As another example a memory mapped l O device could have a status register that is updated whenever its data register is read If the data register is read speculatively the status register is updated even if the result of the read is subsequently discarded for example if a previously issued instruction generates an exception Two registers and their associated logic allow a block ranging in size from 1 Kbyte to 64 Kbytes or parts of the block to be protected from speculative accesses The most significant 22 bits of the address of each L bus cycle are bitwise compared to the non speculative base address register SPECADDR with each result bit equal to one if the bits match A bitwise OR is performed on the lower six bits of the resulting word
108. if the IFM ignore first match bit in the I bus support control register ICTRL is set used for continue This allows the processor to be stopped at a breakpoint and then later to continue from that point without the breakpoint immediately stopping the processor again before executing the first instruction When the IFM bit is cleared every matched instruction can cause an l bus breakpoint used for go from x where x is an address that would not cause a breakpoint The IFM bit is set by the software and cleared by the hardware after the first I bus breakpoint match is ignored MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 20 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Since L bus breakpoints are treated after the instruction is executed L bus break points and counter generated l bus breakpoints are not affected by this mode 8 2 3 External Breakpoints Breakpoints external to the processor can come from either an on chip peripheral or from the development port For additional information on breakpoints from on chip peripherals consult the users manual for the microcontroller of interest or the refer ence manual for the peripheral of interest The development port serial interface can be used to assert either a maskable or non maskable breakpoint Refer to 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions for more infor mation about generating breakpoints from the development port The development port breakpoint bits remain asserted until they are cleared
109. input synchronizers the data will be valid at the rising edge of the serial clock even if DSCK and DSDI do not meet the setup and hold time requirements of the pins Asynchronous clocked mode allows communications with the port from a development tool that does not have access to the CLKOUT signal or where the CLKOUT signal has been delayed or skewed Because of the asynchronous nature of the inputs and the setup and hold time requirements on DSDI this clock mode must be clocked at a fre quency less than or equal to one third of CLKOUT MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 25 The second clock mode is called synchronous clocked because the input clock and input data meet all setup and hold time requirements with respect to CLKOUT Since the input synchronizers must sample the input clock in both the high and low state DSCK cannot be faster than one half of CLKOUT The third clock mode is called synchronous self clocked because it does not require an input clock Instead the port is clocked by the system clock The DSDI input is required to meet all setup and hold time requirements with respect to CLKOUT The data rate for this mode is always the same as the system clock rate which is at least twice as fast as in synchronous clocked mode In this mode an undelayed CLKOUT signal must be available to the development tool and extra care must be taken to avoid noise and crosstalk on the serial lines The selecti
110. interrupt or other indication generated when the count rolls over The period of the time base depends on the driving frequency The time base is not affected by any resets and should be initialized by software The decrementer is a 32 bit decrementing counter defined by the PowerPC architec ture The decrementer causes an interrupt unless masked by MSR EE when it passes through zero The time base and decrementer use the stand by power supply VDDKAP1 This allows them to be used while normal power is off The time base and decrementer also continue to function in all low power modes except sleep mode LPM 0b1 1 in which the oscillator is turned off MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 80 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The state of the decrementer and time base after standby power is restored is indeter minate The decrementer runs continuously after power up unless the decrementer clock enable bit is cleared System software is necessary to perform any initialization The decrementer is not affected by reset and continues counting while reset is asserted Reads and writes of the time base and decrementer are restricted to special instruc tions Refer to SECTION 3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT and to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for instructions on reading and writing the time base and decrementer 5 6 9 1 Time Base and Decrementer Clock Source The frequency source is the crystal oscillator divided by four The clock sou
111. mero RR RR RR OR RR AR 3 22 3 9 9 Processor Version Register PVR isses RR RR RR ERE DERE 3 22 3910 Implementation Specii SP BS ARA Rare IRR en 3 23 3 9 10 1 EIE EID and NRI Special Purpose 3 23 3 9 10 2 Instruction Cache Control 5 5 3 23 3 9 10 3 Development Support 3 24 3 9 10 4 Floating Point Exception Cause Register 3 24 draco d ou dci dede Cn GR c E eec qi 3 24 3 101 lngtniobon Sel SUMMA exe spe REX ERE ORE X EORR X REM X RR 3 26 3 10 2 Recommended Simplified lt 3 30 3 10 3 Calculating Effective 3 30 4 11 Exception Modal E e E Rx dE Ree 3 31 a ipid doa ecd Beca i dca qe 3 31 pne Sere Eee MONS cursa DO e eu d e recs ubere qub 3 31 211 3 Unordered EXCBDUDIIS ausa Rx REPRE RP ad baad OR C RECEN 3 81 2 13124 Pico E OEDDUONS LR halt Eddy M qund dc dox ded 3 32 3 11 5 Exception Vector Tabla ku mb 3 32 SE Inspection TIT a iiu pha a or 3 33 MPC509 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOROLA
112. mode the freeze indication is broadcast throughout the MCU This signal is generated by the CPU when debug mode is entered or when a software debug monitor program is entered as the result of an exception and the associated bit in the DER is set The software monitor can only assert freeze when debug mode is not enabled Refer to 8 7 Software Monitor Support for more information Freeze is indicated by the value 11 on the VFLS 0 1 pins This encoding is not used for pipeline tracking and is left on the VFLS 0 1 pins when the processor is in debug mode Figure 8 14 shows how the internal freeze signal is generated 8 4 5 Exiting Debug Mode Executing the rfi instruction in debug mode causes the processor to leave debug mode and return to normal execution The freeze indication on the VFLS pins is negated to indicate that the CPU has exited debug mode Software must read the ECR to clear it before executing the rfi instruction Other wise if a bit in the ECR is asserted and its corresponding enable bit in the DER is also asserted the processor re enters debug mode and re asserts the freeze signal imme diately after executing the rfi instruction 8 4 6 Checkstop State and Debug Mode When debug mode is disabled the processor enters the checkstop state if when a machine check exception is detected the machine check exception is disabled MSR ME 0 However when debug mode is enabled if a machine check exception is detected when MS
113. no effect Reduced frequency divide lock 7 RFDL 0 Writes to RF bits allowed 1 Writes to RF bits have no effect 8 13 Reserved System PLL test mode select 14 15 STMS 00 Normal operation 00 01 11 Special test modes for factory test only 16 22 Reserved Wake up request 23 WUR 0 pin forced low request power off 1 PDWU pin forced high request power on 24 28 Reserved System PLL lock status sticky bit 29 SPLSS 0 PLL has gone out of lock since software last set this bit 1 PLL has remained in lock since software last set this bit System PLL lock status 30 SPLS 0 PLL has not locked 1 PLL has locked Loss of oscillator status 31 LOO 0 Clock detected 1 Crystal not detected 5 7 System Protection SIU system protection features include a periodic interrupt timer and a bus monitor Additional MPC509 system protection features include the PowerPC decrementer and time base described in SECTION 3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT and a software watchdog described in 6 4 Software Watchdog 5 7 1 System Protection Features The bus monitor monitors any internal to external bus accesses Four selectable response time periods are available ranging from 16 to 256 system clock cycles An internal bus error signal is generated if a bus time out occurs The periodic interrupt timer generates an interrupt after a period specified by the user MP
114. occur at any rising edge of the bus clock This signal is sampled at the same time the MCU samples the arbitration pins for a qualified bus grant prior to starting a bus cycle 2 5 2 Address Phase Signals The address phase is the period of time from the assertion of transfer start TS until the address phase is terminated by one of the following signals address acknowledge AACK address retry ARETRY or transfer error acknowledge TEA TS is valid for one clock cycle at the start of the address phase The address bus and the address attributes described below are valid for the duration of the address phase Refer to 5 4 5 2 Address Phase for additional information on address phase signals MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 2 5 2 1 Address Bus ADDR 0 29 Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments 2 5 2 2 Write Read WR Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Negated Represents the physical address of the data to be transferred Driven by the bus master to in dex the bus slave Low order bit ADDR31 is not pinned out byte enable signals BE 0 3 are used instead see Ta ble 2 6 During accesses to 16 bit ports BE2 pin provides ADDR30 signal Assertion Negation Occurs one clock cycle after a qual ified bus grant Coincides with assertion of BB and TS High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified
115. only the icbi instruc tion can be performed at the user privilege level 4 5 1 Instruction Cache Block Invalidate The MPC509 implements the PowerPC instruction cache block invalidate icbi as if it pertains only to the MPC509 instruction cache This instruction does not broadcast on the external bus and the CPU does not snoop this instruction if broadcast by other masters MOTOROLA INSTRUCTION CACHE MPC509 4 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL This command is not privileged and has no error cases that the user needs to check 4 5 2 Invalidate To invalidate the whole cache set the invalidate all command in the ICCST This command has no error cases that the user needs to check The command makes all valid lines in the cache invalid except lines that are locked After this command is executed the LRU pointer of each set points to an unlocked way If both lines in the set are unlocked the LRU pointer points to way zero This last feature is useful in order to initialize the out of reset 4 5 3 Load and Lock The load amp lock operation is used to lock critical code segments in the cache The load amp lock operation is performed on a single cache line After a line is locked it oper ates as a regular instruction SRAM it will not be replaced during future misses and will not be affected by invalidate commands After the load amp lock command is written to the ICCST the cache checks if the line containing the b
116. otherwise not stop but with the penalty that it may not be restartable The value of the MSR RI bit as saved in the SRR1 register indicates whether the proces sor stopped in a recoverable state or not Internal breakpoints are made maskable or non maskable by clearing or setting the BRKNOMSK bit of the LCTRL2 register Refer to 8 8 7 L Bus Support Control Register 2 509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 21 8 3 Development Port The development port provides a full duplex serial interface for communications between the internal development support logic including debug mode and an exter nal development tool The relationship of the development support logic to the rest of the MCU is shown in Figure 8 5 Although the development port is implemented as part of the system inter face unit SIU it is used in conjunction with RCPU development support features and is therefore described in this section 2 DEV SUPPORT SPRs S BREAKPOINT LOGIC E e T I BUS E fou BUS DEVELOPMENT PORT CONTROL LOGIC BKPT TE VSYNC gt DEVELOPMENT PORT PLLL DSDI SHIFT REGISTER k DSDO VFLS FRZ TECR Figure 8 5 Development Port Support Logic 8 3 1 Development Port Signals The following development port signals are provided Development serial clock DSCK Development serial
117. peek sequence of instructions is used to read a memory location and transfer the data to the development port It starts by moving the memory address into R1 from the development port Next the location is read and the data loaded into RO Finally RO is transferred to the development port Table 8 22 Peek Instruction Sequence Development Port Activity Instruction Processor Activity Purpose Shift in instruction mfspr R1 DPDR Transfer address from DPDR to R1 Point to memory address Shift in instruction Iwzu D R1 Load data from memory address R1 into RO Read data from memory Shift in instruction mtspr DPDR RO Transfer data from RO to DPDR Write memory data to the port Shift in instruction shift out memory data First instruction of next sequence Execute next instruction Output memory data 8 6 4 Poke Instruction Sequence The poke sequence of instructions is used to write data entered at the development serial port to a memory location It starts by moving the memory address into R1 from the development port Next the data is moved into RO from the development port Finally RO is written to the address in R1 Table 8 23 Poke Instruction Sequence Development Port Activity Instruction Processor Activity Purpose Shift in instruction mfspr R1 DPDR Transfer address from Point to memory address DPDR to R1 Shift in instruct
118. pleted 3 If the first access is to a region that is not under chip select control external glue logic generates all control and handshake signals for the region as for a DRAM controller for example and the second access is to a region that is un der chip select control the chip select module does not pipeline the second ac cess with the first 4 Ifthe first access is to a region under chip select control and the second access is a read access to a region that is not under chip select control the external glue logic designer must decide whether to pipeline the second access with the first The decision depends on system requirements and on the interface type of the region that is not under chip select control 5 Ifthe first access is a burst read access to a burstable region and the second is a read access to another region the chip select module pipelines the second read if the second access is to a region with an interface type that is pipeline able and can hold off its data If ITYPE 8 for the second region the chip select module does not pipeline the second access with the first 6 If the first access is to a synchronous region and the second access is to an asynchronous region the chip select module does not pipeline the accesses 7 Ifthe first access is to an asynchronous region the chip select module does not pipeline the second access with the first since both the external address and data bus must be available f
119. region If the region is pipelineable and the region is not busy with a pending access AACK is asserted after the address is latched by the region i e at the next rising clock edge If the region is pipelineable and the region is busy with a pending access AACK is asserted for the next access to the region at the end of the pending access to the region i e when TA is asserted for that access 5 5 11 Port Size The PS field indicates the port size of the region The chip select logic always returns PS 0 1 for regions under its control Port size encoding is shown in Table 5 23 The 0b00 and 0b11 encodings are reserved if one of these encodings is used the port size defaults to 32 bits Table 5 23 Port Size PS Field Port Size 0b00 Reserved 0b01 16 bits 0b10 32 bits 0611 Reserved 5 5 12 Chip Select Pin Control The PCON BYTE and REGION fields of each chip select option register control how the associated pin is used The PCON field determines pin function CE OE WE or alternate function The BYTE field determines which byte enable a WE pin corre sponds to The REGION field assigns a WE or OE pin to one of six chip select regions MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 50 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 5 12 1 Pin Configuration The PCON pin configuration field in the chip select option register configures the associated pin to be a CE WE OE or non chip select function pin
120. registers Table 8 8 shows how watchpoints are determined from the programming options Note that using the OR option enables out of range detection MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 16 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 8 8 l bus Watchpoint Programming Options Name Description Programming Options First I bus watchpoint 2 B IW1 Second I bus watchpoint IW2 Third I bus watchpoint 5 B Fourth I bus watchpoint 8 2 1 5 L Bus Support Detailed Description There are two L bus address comparators comparators E and F Each compares the 32 address bits and the cycle s read write attribute The two least significant bits are masked ignored whenever a word is accessed and the least significant bit is masked whenever a half word is accessed For more information refer to 8 2 1 2 Byte and Half Word Working Modes Each comparator generates two output signals equal and less than These signals are used to generate one of the following four events one from each comparator equal not equal greater than less than There are two L bus data comparators comparators G and H Each is 32 bits wide and can be programmed to treat numbers either as signed values or as unsigned val ues Each data comparator operates as four independent byte comparators Each byte comparator has a mask bit and generates two output signals equal and less than if the mask bit is not set Therefore each 32 bit
121. request since the PLL is off The LOLRE bit must not be set when the clock is in PLL bypass or special test mode 5 6 4 Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL is a frequency synthesis PLL that can multiply the refer ence clock frequency by a factor from 4 to 11 provided the system clock CLKOUT MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 71 frequency when RFD 06000 remains within the specified limits With a reference frequency of 4 MHz the PLL can synthesize frequencies from 16 MHz to 44 MHz The output of the PLL can be divided down to reduce the system frequency with the reduced frequency divider RFD The RFD is not contained in the feedback loop of the PLL so changing the RFD bits does not affect PLL operation Note that the system frequency programmed should not exceed the operating fre quency of any of the parts in the target system Figure 5 27 shows the overall block diagram for the PLL Each of the major blocks shown is discussed briefly below 1 1 MODE CLKOUT DIVIDER 5 1 VDDSN VDDSN PHASE CHARGE OSCILLATOR DETECTOR PUMP CIRCUITRY MPC509 EXTAL H XTAL XEGE aaa CIRCUIT BOARD 5 1 C 15 0 nF LL 7 1 NPO VW W
122. scan register and the EXTEST or CLAMP instructions requires a compatible circuit board test environ ment to avoid device destructive configurations The user must avoid situations in which the MPC509 output drivers are enabled into actively driven networks 9 7 Non IEEE 1149 1 1990 Operation In non IEEE 1149 1 1990 operation the IEEE 1149 1 1990 test logic must be kept transparent to the system logic by forcing the TAP controller into the Test Logic Reset controller state and keeping it there There are two methods of forcing the controller to this state The first is to assert the TRST signal forcing the TAP into the Test Logic Reset controller state The second is to provide at least five TCK pulses with TMS held high To ensure that the controller remains in the Test Logic Reset state several options are available e If TMS either remains unconnected or is connected to Vcc then the TAP control ler cannot leave the Test Logic Reset state regardless of the state of the TCK pin TRST can be asserted either by connecting it directly to ground or by means of a logic network The controller will remain in the Test Logic Reset state in the absence of a rising edge on the TCK pin regardless of the state of the TMS 9 8 Boundary Scan Descriptor Language BSDL This section provides an example of the boundary scan descriptor language BSDL Motorola MPC509 Model BSDL description Version 1 1 Modified 11 29 by Keeho Kang t
123. sequencing error encoding indicates that the inputs from the external develop ment tool are not what the development port or the CPU was expecting Two cases could cause this error 1 the processor was trying to read instructions and data was shifted into the development port or 2 the processor was trying to read data and an instruction was shifted into the development port When a sequencing error occurs the port terminates the CPU read or fetch cycle with a bus error This bus error causes the CPU to signal the development port that an exception occurred Since a status of sequencing error has a higher priority than a sta tus of exception the port reports the sequencing error The development port ignores the data being shifted in while the sequencing error is shifting out The next transmis sion to the port should be a new instruction or trap enable data Table 8 16 illustrates a typical sequence of events when a sequencing error occurs This example begins with CPU data being shifted into the shift register control bit 1 when the processor is expecting an instruction During the next transmission a sequencing error is shifted out of the development port and the data shifted into the shift register is thrown away During the third transmission the CPU exception status is output and again the data shifted into the shift register is thrown away During the fourth transmission an instruction is again shifted into the development port a
124. such as flash EEPROM or instruction RAM may be located on the I bus On the MPC509 however no memory modules are located on the I bus The L bus has at least two masters the RCPU and the SIU One or more slave mod ules may reside on the L bus These may include memory modules RAM flash EEPROM and on chip IMB2 peripherals which are connected via the L bus IMB2 interface LIMB On the MPC509 the SRAM module is located on the L bus Each module on either bus has one or more internal control registers which control the configuration and operation of the module On a memory module i e the SRAM on the MPC509 these registers are not mapped with the memory array but stay ata fixed address in the memory map Capability is provided to allow masters on one bus to access slaves on the opposite bus L bus masters must be able to access peripherals on the I bus to program their control registers or to program flash memory arrays This is because the CPU instruc tion fetch unit can only run read cycles Similarly l bus masters are able to execute diagnostic programs out of the RAM on the L bus These capabilities require that the addresses of the memory modules on the I bus be known to the L bus address decode logic and vice versa Refer to 5 3 4 Internal Cross Bus Accesses for details A block diagram of the internal module select scheme is shown in Figure 5 2 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 7 FIXE
125. the SPLSS bit even if the out of lock indication is active while the setting takes place The bit remains clear until software again sets it At clock reset the state of the SPLSS bit is zero since the PLL has not achieved lock 5 6 10 2 Loss of Oscillator The loss of oscillator LOO status bit in the SCLSR indicates the absence of an input frequency on the EXTAL pin A frequency below 125 kHz causes the loss of oscillator circuitry to assert the LOO bit and force the PLL into self clocked mode A frequency above 500 kHz causes the loss of oscillator circuitry to negate the LOO bit and the PLL operates normally The LOO bit can be read any time It can be written only in spe cial test mode The loss of oscillator reset enable LOORE bit in the SCCR indicates how the clock module should handle a loss of oscillator condition LOO asserted When LOORE is clear clock reset is not asserted if a loss of oscillator indication occurs When LOORE is set clock reset is asserted when a loss of oscillator indication occurs The reset module may wait for the PLL to lock before negating reset see 5 8 Reset Operation The LOORE bit is cleared when clock reset is asserted and may be re initialized by software Note that a loss of oscillator forces the PLL to go out of lock and into the self clocked mode SCM regardless of the state of the LOORE bit MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 82 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 6 11 System Clock Co
126. the periodic interrupt enable bit PIE in the periodic interrupt control and select register PICSR in the SIU This allows the count in the PIT to be preserved when execution stops MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 11 5 3 5 3 Effects of Freeze on the Decrementer When freeze is asserted and the SIUFRZ is set in the SIUMCR the decrementer is disabled This allows the value in the decrementer to be preserved when execution stops 5 3 5 4 Effects of Freeze on Register Lock Bits When freeze is asserted the lock bits in various registers can be set or cleared This allows the protected configurations to be changed and then re locked by a develop ment support system 5 4 External Bus Interface The external bus interface interfaces the external bus E bus with the two inter nal buses I bus and L bus The E bus is synchronous and supports pipelined and burst transfers Signals driven onto the E bus are required to meet the set up and hold times relative to the rising edge of the bus clock The bus has the ability to support mul tiple masters but its protocol is optimized for a single processor environment 5 4 1 Features No external glue logic required for a simple system e Supports different memory SRAM EEPROM types asynchronous synchro nous pipelineable burstable Fast one clock arbitration possible Bus is synchronous all signals are referenced to the rising ed
127. unit will generate the BI signal internally when appropriate 5 5 14 Chip Select Operation Flowchart Figure 5 14 illustrates the operation of the chip select logic for external accesses MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 55 IDLE IF NEW CYCLE NO MOR DECODES ADDRESS IF MATCH amp DOES NOT VIOLATE PROTECTION ASSERTS CE ASSERTS AACK IF ENABLED RETURNS BI PS 0 1 LAST DATA amp OVERLAP ACCESS WAITS UNTIL TURN IN THE PIPE WAITS UNTIL DELAY TIME IF WRITE IF READ y ASSERTS WE ASSERTS OE 1 SSERTS IF ENABLED lt IF BURST 500 CS FLOW Figure 5 14 Chip Select Operation Flowchart 5 5 15 Pipe Tracking The chip select module supports pipelined accesses to external devices Up to two cycles can be pending in the chip select module The chip select unit supports pipelined reads for certain types of interfaces Pipelined writes are not supported Table 5 28 summarizes the chip select pipelining of read and write accesses Table 5 28 Pipelined Reads and Writes First Access Second Access Mess Read Read Yes Write Read Yes Read Write No Write Write No MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 56 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The following subsections explain which types of interfaces permit pipelining of read accesses Pipelining of consecutive accesses to the same region is discussed first fol lowed
128. when the value of the ISCTL field is changed with the mtspr instruction the new value does not take effect until two instructions after the mtspr instruction The instruction immediately following mtspr is under control of the old ISCTL value In order to keep the pin count of the chip as low as possible VSYNC is not imple mented as an external pin rather it is asserted and negated using the development port serial interface For more information on this interface refer to 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions The assertion and negation of VSYNC forces the machine to synchronize and the first fetch after this synchronization to be marked as an indirect change of flow cycle and to be visible on the external bus This enables the external hardware to synchronize with the internal activity of the processor When either VSYNC is asserted or the ISCTL bits in the I bus control register are pro grammed to a value of 0b10 cycles resulting from an indirect change of flow are shown on the external bus By programming the ISCTL bits to show all indirect flow changes the user can thus ensure that the processor maintains exactly the same behavior when VSYNC is asserted as when it is negated The loss of performance the user can expect from the additional external bus cycles is minimal For additional information on the ISCTL bits and the ICTRL register refer to 8 8 Devel opment Support Registers For more information on the use of VSYNC during prog
129. with the mask in the non speculative mask register SPECMASK If all six result bits are ones and the upper 16 result bits are all ones then speculative accesses are pre vented during the current cycle SPECADDR Non Speculative Base Address Register 0x8007 FC24 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 BASE ADDRESS RESERVED 0 RESET 0000000000000000000000000000000 Table 5 10 SPECADDR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 21 BASE ADDRESS 22 bit base address of region protected from speculative loads 22 31 Reserved SPECMASK Non Speculative Mask Register 0x8007 FC28 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED MASK RESERVED 0 RESET 0000000000000000000000000000000 Table 5 11 SPECMASK Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 15 Reserved Six bit mask that specifies which block or blocks within region specified in SPECMASK reg 16 21 MASK ister are actually protected from speculative accesses 22 31 Reserved Because the mask register can contain any six bit value the mask can allow for blocks of up to 64 Kbytes and it can provide for smaller blocks of memory that alternately allow and prevent speculative loads Table 5 12 provides several examples In these examples the protected blocks are those that match the
130. 0 CS 0 11 ADDR 0 1 1 configured as address pins 1 CS 0 11 ADDR 0 1 1 configured as chip select pins default value 1 Exception prefix 0 Vector table begins at 0x0000 0000 vector table location 1 Vector table begins at OXFFFO 0000 default value 2 Burst mode type 0 Type 1 burst mode uses BDIP timing default value 0 Type 2 burst mode uses LAST timing 3 ITYPE of boot device 0 Boot device ITYPE 0x08 Synchronous burst 1 Boot device ITYPE 0x01 Asynchronous default value 4 Port size of boot device 0 Boot device has 16 bit port default value 1 Boot device has 32 bit port TA delay for CSBOOT 000 0 wait states 001 1 wait state 010 2 wait states 6 8 011 3 wait states 100 4 states 101 5 states 110 6 wait states 111 7 wait states default value The boot region can be a ROM or flash EPROM At power on it is assumed that no writing to the region is needed until the chip select logic has been configured Thus no WE is needed at power on time The boot device can be internal or external mem ory If internal memory the boot device is not under chip select control If the boot device is located externally the chip select logic decodes the address of the access and enables the CE and OE of the boot device appropriately If the external boot device has a type 2 burst interface the LAST signal must be supplied by the EBI Note that at
131. 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 4 2 ICCST Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description enable status bit This bit is a read only bit Any attempt to write it is ignored 0 IEN 0 I cache is disabled 1 l cache is enabled 1 3 Reserved Command 000 No command 001 Cache enable 010 Cache disable 4 6 CMD 011 Load amp lock 100 Unlock line 101 Unlock all 110 Invalidate all 111 Reserved 7 9 Reserved Error Type 1 sticky bit 10 CCER1 0 No error 1 Error Error Type 2 sticky bit 11 CCER2 0 No error 1 Error Error Type 3 sticky bit 12 CCER3 0 No error 1 Error 13 31 Reserved ICADR Address Register 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SPR561 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ADR RESET 00000000000000000000000000000000 MOTOROLA 4 4 INSTRUCTION CACHE Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 4 3 1 Address Register ICADR Bits Mnemonic Description 0 31 ADR The address to be used in the command programmed in the control and status register ICSDAT l Cache Data Register SPR 562 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DAT RESET 00000000000000000000000000000000 Table 4 4 Da
132. 003 and program for equal One L data comparator OxXXXX XXX7 and program for greater than One L data comparator OXXXXX XXXC and program for less than Both byte masks 0b0001 Both L data comparators program to byte mode Result The event will be detected regardless of the instruction the compiler chooses for this access 2 Afully supported scenario Looking for Data size Half word Address greater than 0x0000 0000 and less than 0x0000 000C Data value greater than Ox4E20 and less than 0x9C40 Programming option One L address comparator 0x0000 0000 and program for greater than One L address comparator 0x0000 000C and program for less than One L data comparator Ox4E20 4E20 and program for greater than One L data comparator 0x9C40 9C40 and program for less than Both byte masks 061111 Both L data comparators program to half word mode Result The event will be detected correctly provided that the compiler does not use a load store instruction with data size of byte 3 A partially supported scenario Looking for Data size Half word Address greater than 0x0000 0002 and less than 0x0000 000E Data value greater than Ox4E20 and less than 0x9C40 Programming option One L address comparator 0x0000 0002 and program for greater than MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 14 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL L address comparator 0x0000 000E and pro
133. 09 3 36 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 4 INSTRUCTION CACHE MPC509 instruction cache is 4 Kbyte two way set associative cache The cache is organized into 128 sets with two lines per set and four words per line Cache lines are aligned on four word boundaries in memory A cache access cycle begins with an instruction request from the CPU instruction unit In case of a cache hit the instruction is delivered to the instruction unit In case of a cache miss the cache initiates a burst read cycle four beats per burst one word per beat on the instruction bus I bus with the address of the requested instruction The first word received from the bus is the requested instruction The cache forwards this instruction to the instruction unit as soon as it is received from the I bus A cache line is then selected to receive the data which will be coming from the bus An LRU least recently used replacement algorithm is used to select a line when no empty lines are available Each cache line can be used as an SRAM allowing the application to lock critical code segments that need fast and deterministic execution time Cache coherency in a multi processor environment is maintained by software and supported by a fast hardware invalidation capability 4 1 Instruction Cache Features Four Kbytes two way set associative four words in a line LRU replacement policy Lockable SRAM cache line granularity Cr
134. 1 signals Since the chip select logic does not return the TA signal the TADLY field indicating the number of wait states before TA assertion is not used After power on the CSBOOT circuit is enabled to return AACK and TA If the external boot device returns the TA signal however before the chip select logic asserts TA internally the external TA assertion terminates the access 5 5 10 Wait State Control The TADLY field in the option registers for CSBOOT and CS 1 5 indicates the number of wait states for the chip select logic to insert before returning If this field is encoded for zero wait states TA is asserted one clock cycle after TS is asserted An encoding of one wait state means that TA is asserted two clock cycles after TS and so on Up to seven wait states are allowed The encodings are shown in Table 5 22 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 49 Table 5 22 TADLY and Wait State Control TADLY Wait States 06000 0 06001 06010 06011 06100 06101 06110 06111 NI 25 wo N Note this field is used only when the chip select logic returns the handshaking signals ACKEN 1 Note that the user does not program the number of wait states prior to AACK assertion The chip select logic uses the following scheme to determine when to assert AACK e If the region is an asynchronous type is asserted at the end of access to the
135. 1 1024 1110 1024 1111 1024 These bits be read at any time They should be written only when the system PLL lock status bit SPLS is set Writing the RFD bits especially to 0 0 when the PLL is not locked can cause the clock frequency to surpass the system operating frequency Software is responsible for monitoring the SPLS bit and preventing a write to RFD 0 3 while the PLL is out of lock The RFD bits should always be written to a value of Ox1 or greater before changing the MF bits to ensure the system frequency does not exceed the system s design mar gin since the VCO overshoots in frequency as it tries to compensate for the change in frequency The RFD bits should be changed to their final value only after the MF bits have been written to their final value and PLL lock at the new frequency has been established For example to change from the default system frequency to 16 MHz MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 77 write the RFD bits to Ox1 then write the MF bits to 0 0 After the PLL locks write the RFD bits to 0 0 The RFD bits can be protected against further writes by setting the RFD lock RFDL bit in the SCSLR register NOTE The RFD bits do not affect clock frequency when the system clock is operating in 1 1 mode 5 6 6 Low Power Modes The clock module provides one normal operating mode and three low power modes The low power mode LPM bits in the SCCR select one of the
136. 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 3 9 5 1 EXTEST 0000 The external test EXTEST instruction enables the boundary scan register between TDI and TDO including cells for all device signal and clock pins and associated control signals The XTAL EXTAL S C and pins are associated with ana log signals and are not included in the boundary scan register EXTEST also asserts internal reset for the MPC509 system logic for the duration of EXTEST in order to force a predictable internal state while performing external bound ary scan operations By using the TAP the boundary scan register is capable of e Scanning user defined values into the output buffer Capturing values presented to input signals and Controlling the direction and value of bi directional pins gt O l CHIP 1 gt CHIP 2 TDI spl SAMPLE INSTR YA ax EXTEST INSTR Figure 9 3 Sample EXTEST Connection The following steps show an example of how the EXTEST instruction is initialized and invoked for board interconnection test 1 Shift in the PRELOAD instruction in chip 1 2 Shift in data to the boundary scan cells of chip 1 through the TDI preload 3 Shift the EXTEST instruction into chip 1 As soon as the Update IR state is reached the data
137. 1 Development Port Shift Register 8 25 8 3 2 2 Trap Enable Control Register 8 25 8 3 3 Development Port Clock Mode 8 25 8 3 4 Development Port 5 556 5 8 30 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions uiu ua npe dba Rear eda ee 8 30 CPU ases es daa en m tto art Repo d tea 8 31 8 3 7 Serial Data Out of Development Port Non Debug 8 31 8 3 8 Serial Data Out of Development Port Debug 8 32 8381 Valid Data cesa serre Xx n RR 8 32 8 3 8 2 Sequencing Error Output 2 RR RR RR ERR RE 8 33 Poo DP UID suc ut e epe nad red pa dae ue 8 33 8 2 8 4 NUl OUMU d ee x PERIERE eS dS NEN dad 8 34 8 3 9 Use of the Bis ee ree eres dae Rar ew dedica DA a doe de OR 8 34 B Debs Mode Funcions qe OR ORCI deen idee d 8 34 8 4 1 Enabling Debug Mode yada re CERES sede REG E deb ERROR d 8 35 8 4 2 Entering Debug eck dae 8 35 84 39 Debug Mode Operallon dee cee sede E dee 8 36 5 44 2552523
138. 11 RCPU is fully serialized and no show cycles will be performed for fetched instructions 100 Illegal 101 RCPU is not serialized normal mode and show cycle will be performed for all changes in the program flow 110 RCPU is not serialized normal mode and show cycle will be performed for all indirect changes in the program flow 111 RCPU is not serialized normal mode and no show cycles will be performed for fetched instructions The ICTRL is cleared following reset Note that the machine is fetch serialized when ever SER 0b0 or ISCTL 0b00 8 8 6 L Bus Support Control Register 1 LCTRL1 L Bus Support Control Register 1 SPR 156 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CTE CTF CTG CTH CRWE CRWF RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CSG CSH SUSG SUSH CGBMSK CHBMSK UNUSED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 49 Table 8 31 LCTRL 1 Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description Function 0 2 CTE Compare type comparator E not active reset value 3 5 CTF Compare type comparator F 100 equal 101 less than 6 8 CTG Compare type comparator G 110 greater than 9 11 CTH Compare type comparator H 111 not equal Select match on read write of AR VENE comparator E OX don t care reset valu
139. 16 control the operation of the instruction cache Table 3 16 Instruction Cache Control Registers SPR Number Mnemonic Name Decimal 560 ICCST control and status register 561 ICADR address register 562 ICDAT data port read only MPC509 USER S MANUAL CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 3 23 Refer to 4 3 Instruction Cache Programming Model for details on these registers 3 9 10 3 Development Support Registers Table 3 17 lists the implementation specific RCPU registers provided for development support Table 3 17 Development Support Registers SPR Number Mnemonic Name Decimal 144 CMPA Comparator A Value Register 145 CMPB Comparator B Value Register 146 CMPC Comparator C Value Register 147 CMPD Comparator D Value Register 148 ECR Exception Cause Register 149 DER Debug Enable Register 150 COUNTA Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control Register 151 COUNTB Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register 152 CMPE Comparator E Value Register 153 CMPF Comparator F Value Register 154 CMPG Comparator G Value Register 155 CMPH Comparator H Value Register 156 LCTRL1 L Bus Support Control Register 1 157 LCTRL2 L Bus Support Control Register 2 158 ICTRL I Bus Support Control Register 159 BAR Breakpoint Address Register 630 DPDR Development Port Data Register Refer to the RCPU Refe
140. 19 531 23 438 27 344K 31 250 35 156 39 063K 42 969 11 1010 1024 15 65 19 531 23 438 27 344 31 250 35 156 39 063K 42 969 12 1010 1024 15 625 19 531 23 438 27 344K 31 250 35 156K 39 063K 42 969 s 15 1010 1024 15 625 19 531 23 438 27 344 31 250 35 156 39 063 42969 1 Settings resulting in CLKOUT frequencies the shaded areas should not be used the MPC509 2 Default setting Whenever clock reset is asserted the MF bits are set to Ox2 multiply by six and the RFD bits are set to 0x3 divide by eight These values program the PLL to generate the default system frequency of 3 MHz when a 4 MHz crystal is used 5 6 5 1 Multiplication Factor MF Bits The MF bits determine the operating frequency of the PLL The 4 MHz crystal refer ence frequency is multiplied by an integer from 4 to 11 depending on the value of the MF bits resulting in a PLL frequency of 16 MHz to 44 MHz Table 5 34 summarizes the effect of the MF bits MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 75 Table 5 34 Multiplication Factor Bits MF Field Binary Multiplication Factor nu ce x000 4 16 MHz x001 5 20 MHz x010 6 24 MHz x011 7 28 MHz x100 8 32 MHz x101 9 36 MHz x110 10 40 MHz x111 11 44 MHz
141. 3 5 6 Address EnDOOIBUR 5 14 5a Byle Werte nts sere et 5 15 5 8 Signals Driven at Start of Address 5 20 5 9 Burst Access Address Wrapping uuu adden t 5 25 5 10 SPECADDR e RDUM 5 26 5 11 SPEGMASK Bit Settings 5 26 5 12 Example Speculative Mask 2 5 27 5 13 EBI Read and Write Access to 16 Bit 5 27 sx cmo s i is rcr mmt 5 29 5 15 Storage Reservation Interface Signals 5 34 5 16 Chip Select Pin FUNCIONS HU a ree 5 37 5 17 Chip Select Module Address 1 three nnne nb anta urina 5 39 5 18 Chip Select Base Address Registers Bit Settings 5 40 5 19 Chip Select Option Register Bit Settings 2 5 43 5 20 Block Size Encoding Le ltd tetra inan dil 5 45 5 21 Block and Sub Bloek PalllbWiauu e pensa bs ads aicut 5 47 522 TADLY and Wat PDT 5 50 Du PO EE eia NENEA teed Geneseo 5 50 524 RE T m TT 5 51 5 20 BYTE Feld 5 51 5 26 REGION Field
142. 32 06100 64 06101 Reserved 0b110 Reserved 06111 Reserved To achieve a PIT setting of approximately 1 MHz program the PCFS field as shown in Table 5 42 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 87 Table 5 42 Recommended Settings for PCFS 0 2 Input Frequency Range PCFS 0 2 1 MHz lt FREQ lt 4 MHz 0b000 4 MHz lt FREQ lt 8 MHz 0b001 8 MHz FREQ lt 16 MHz 0b010 16 MHz FREQ 32 MHz 06011 32 MHz lt FREQ lt 64 MHz 06100 Reserved 0b101 Reserved 0b110 Reserved 06111 5 7 3 2 Time Out Period Selection The PIT time out period is determined by the input clock frequency the divider speci fied in the PCFS field and the timing count specified in the PITC field of the PICSR The time out period is calculated as follows PIT period PITC PIT frequency where the PIT frequency is equal to the PIT input clock frequency divided by a divisor determined by the PCFS bits as specified in 5 7 3 1 PIT Clock Frequency Selection With a 4 MHz clock frequency and a PCFS value of 0b000 divide by 4 reset value this gives a range from 1 us PITC 0x0001 to 65 5 ms PITC 0x0000 Table 5 43 Example PIT Time Out Periods PITC Value Time Out Period 1 decimal 1 us 5 decimal 5 us 10 decimal 10 us 100 decimal 100 us 1000 decimal 1 00 ms 10000 decimal 10 00 ms 50000 decimal 50 0 ms F
143. 5 5 9 interrupt 6 8 6 5 3 1 Pending Interrupt Request 6 9 6 5 3 2 Enabled Active Interrupt Requests 6 9 6 5 3 9 Inienupt Enable Register Lauda 2 Died aed cic aci d aci a ORC CE cuc 6 9 6 5 3 4 PIT Port Q Interrupt Levels Register 6 10 BB POR GA ein ORR 6 10 6 6 1 Port Q Edge Detect Data 6 11 6 6 2 Part Q Assignment Register iocos xn 6 11 6 6 2 1 Port Pin Assignment 6 12 6 6 2 2 Pot Q Edge FIRING 6 12 Section 7 STATIC RAM MODULE ae se hd he x rcm 7 1 7 2 Placement of SRAM in Memory e xara RR RR GAS RR 7 1 Ge 04625384 ASA dads Ada d 7 2 Section 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT BEI Pues Fou Wo ded qe eg duu dp gea 8 1 8 1 1 Change aPFlow Cycles eder bene deeds veda 8 2 8 1 1 1 Marking the Indirect Change of Flow 8 3 8 1 1 2 Sequential Instructions with the Indirect Change of Flow Attribute 8 3 8 1 2 Instruct
144. 54 EBI 5 12 EBRK 8 54 ECR 8 53 ECROUT 2 19 5 70 EE bit 3 18 3 23 Effective address 3 30 EID 3 23 EIE 3 23 MPC509 User s Manual ELE bit 3 18 Enabled active interrupt requests register See IRQAND Enabling debug mode 8 35 Engineering clock reference See ECROUT Entering debug mode 8 35 EP bit 3 19 Exception cause register 8 53 Exception prefix 3 19 5 40 5 46 Exceptions 3 31 classes 3 31 little endian mode 3 18 ordered 3 31 precise 3 32 unordered 3 31 vector table 3 32 3 33 Execution units 3 4 Exiting debug mode 8 37 EXTAL 2 19 5 70 External bus interface See EBI crystal connections See EXTAL XTAL filter capacitor connections See XFCN XFCP interrupt 6 7 disable 3 23 enable 3 18 3 23 memory cache hit 5 30 reset 5 93 5 94 EXTEST 9 4 EXTI 8 54 EXTIE 8 55 F FE bits 3 19 FE flag 3 12 Fetch serialized 8 1 FEX bit 3 12 FG bit 3 12 FI bit 3 12 FL bit 3 12 Floating point available 3 19 condition code 3 12 enabled exception summary 3 12 equal or zero 3 12 exception mode 3 19 exception summary 3 12 fraction inexact 3 12 fraction rounded 3 12 greater than or positive 3 12 inexact exception 3 12 enable 3 13 invalid operation exception enable 3 13 for 0 3 12 for x x 3 12 for x x 3 12 for 0 0 3 12 for invalid compare 3 12 for invalid integer convert 3 13 for invalid square root 3 13 INDEX MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 1998 Index 3 for SNaN 3 12 for software request 3 13 summary 3 12 less tha
145. 6 2 2 Port Q Edge Fields The port Q edge PQEDGE 0 6 fields select whether the port interrupt is edge sensitive or level sensitive When the selected transition occurs on a port Q pin a cor responding status bit is set in the PQEDGDAT register Table 6 8 explains the encodings for PQEDGE fields Table 6 8 Port Q Edge Select Field Encoding Value Edge Select Edge Detect Field 00 Level sensitive Returns zero when read 01 Falling edge sensitive Set on rising edge 10 Rising edge sensitive Set on falling edge 11 Either edge sensitive Set on either edge MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MPC509 6 12 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 7 STATIC RAM MODULE The static RAM SRAM module consists of a 4 Kbyte block of static RAM The pri mary function of this module is to serve as fast one cycle access general purpose RAM for the MCU The SRAM can be read or written as either bytes half words or words The bus interface and control logic for the SRAM module are powered by Vpp A sep arate pin VDDKAP2 supplies power to the memory arrays If main power is shut off VDDKAP2 can be maintained in order to retain the data in the SRAM array When the main power is off access to the SRAM array is blocked 7 1 Features Fast One Cycle Access Low Power Mode Two Cycle Access Pipelined for Back to Back Accesses Programmable Attributes Supervisor Only Data Only Read Only 7 2 Placemen
146. 8007 FDAC CS8 Option Register CSOR8 S 0x8007 FDBO Reserved S 0x8007 FDB4 57 Option Register CSOR7 S 0x8007 FDB8 Reserved S 0 8007 CS6 Option Register CSOR6 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 3 Table 5 1 510 Address Map Continued Access Address Register S 0x8007 FDCO CS5 Base Address Register 5 S 0x8007 FDC4 55 Option Register 5 S 0x8007 FDC8 54 Base Address Register CSBAR4 S 0 8007 FDCC 54 Option Register CSOR4 S 0x8007 FDDO CS3 Base Address Register CSBAR3 S 0x8007 FDD4 CS3 Option Register CSOR3 S 0 8007 FDD8 52 Base Address Register CSBAR2 S 0x8007 FDDC 52 Option Register CSOR2 S 0x8007 FDEO 51 Base Address Register CSBAR1 S 0x8007 FDE4 CS1 Option Register CSOR1 S 0x8007 FDE8 Reserved S 0 8007 CS0 Option Register CSORO S 0x8007 5 Sub Block Base Address Register CSBTSBBAR S 0x8007 FDF4 5 Sub Block Option Register CSBTSBOR S 0 8007 FDF8 CSBOOT Base Address Register CSBTBAR S 0x8007 FDFC CSBOOT Option Register CSBTOR 5 3 SIU Module Configuration The SIU module configuration register SIUMCR configures various aspects of SIU operation The internal memory mapping register MEMMAP enables and sets the base address of the L bus and l bus internal memory blocks These registers are access
147. 85 5 93 Output enable See OE OV overflow bit 3 16 Overlapped accesses 5 52 5 54 OX bit 3 12 p PA 2 20 PAPAR 5 105 PARTNUM 5 5 PB 2 20 PBPAR 5 105 PCFS 5 87 5 90 PCON 5 36 5 44 5 51 PCU address map 6 2 block diagram 6 1 module configuration register See PCUMCR PCUMCR 6 2 PDWU 2 19 5 70 5 80 Pending interrupt request register See IRQPEND Periodic interrupt enable bit 5 11 timer See PIT Phase detector 5 73 Phase locked loop See PLL PI 2 21 PIE 5 11 5 86 5 89 5 90 Pin characteristics 2 2 configuration field See PCON connections 1 3 PIPAR 5 107 Pipelined accesses 5 18 5 52 5 56 to different regions 5 57 to the same region 5 57 PIT 5 86 5 90 and freeze 5 11 and port Q interrupt levels register See PITQIL clock frequency select 5 87 5 90 count 5 90 enable 5 86 5 89 5 90 interrupt enable 5 86 5 89 5 90 interrupt request level 5 89 interrupts 6 7 status 5 86 5 89 5 90 MOTOROLA Index 6 Rev 15 June 1998 time out period 5 88 PITC 5 86 5 90 PITIRQL 5 89 PITQIL 6 8 6 10 PJ 2 21 PJPAR 5 107 PK 2 21 PKPAR 5 107 PL 2 21 PLL 5 71 lock signal See PLLL lock status 5 76 5 77 5 82 5 85 sticky bit 5 82 5 85 loss of lock 5 93 test mode enable 5 85 test mode select 5 85 PLLL 2 19 5 70 PLPAR 5 107 PM 2 21 PMPAR 5 104 Port 16 bit ports 5 27 replacement unit mode 5 102 5 108 size bit 5 44 5 50 Port M 5 103 data direction register 5 103 data register 5 103 discrete I O sig
148. 85 Kako E SIT X EE XS Y WE SQ dur 8 37 SAS Exiting Debug cc cadens 8 37 8 4 6 Checkstop State and Debug 8 37 8 5 Development Port Transmission 8 38 Dod Po Usage io Debug Mode 3 das m det peux aed qure qe p equ dd qe date 8 38 8 5 2 Debug Mode Sequence 8 40 8 5 3 Port Usage in Normal Non Debug 8 40 8 6 Examples of Debug Mode 8 41 8 6 1 Prologue Instruction Sequence 8 41 8 5 2 Epilogue Instruction Seguente 8 41 8 6 9 Peek Instruction Seguehbe crosses specum X CERE RA RR EORR qi cup ds d 8 42 8 6 4 Poke Instruction 8 42 8 7 Soliware Monitor SUPPO HIRES 8 42 MPC509 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 xi Number Number 8 8 Development Support Registers vce arbre hh rr rA 8 44 B8 UE RU RU RUE E SER EAE C deren Ghee RR EORR Qe d edd 8 45 8 8 2 Comparator A D Value Registers 8 46 8 8 2 Compalalor E F Value scons cies doves Bede
149. 9 is written to the SWSR however the entire sequence must start over MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 3 6 4 1 Software Watchdog Service Register A write of 0x556C followed by a write of OxAA39 to the software watchdog service reg ister SWSR causes the software watchdog register to be reloaded with the value in the software watchdog timing count SWTC field of the SWCR This register can be written at any time within the time out period A write of any value other than those shown above resets the servicing sequence requiring both values to be written to the SWSR before the value in the SWTC field is reloaded into the SWSR Reads of the SWSR return zero SWSR Software Watchdog Service Register 0x8007 EFCO 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SWSR RESERVED 0 RESET 0000000000000000000000000000000 6 4 2 Software Watchdog Control Register Timing Count The software watchdog control register timing count consists of the software watchdog enable SWE and software watchdog lock SWLK bits and the timing count field for the software watchdog The software watchdog timing count SWTO field contains the 24 bit value that is loaded into the SWSR upon completion of the software watchdog service sequence When the SWLK bit is cleared this register can be written Once the lock bit is set fur ther writes to this regi
150. ACK and TA signals These encodings in hit to CS2 region dicate that an access was made to an address on the external bus and that a cache hit or aborted fetch occurred An instruction access with an 1011 E Mem cache 270 NES hit to CS3 region address that is an indirect branch target is indicated as a write on the WR signal 1100 E Mem cache month NE is th in chi h hit to CS4 region The region indicated is the main chip select region not the sub region E Mem cache 1101 hit to CS5 region 1110 Reserved 1111 Reserved 5 4 13 Show Cycles Internal bus cycles that are echoed on the external bus are referred to as show cycles By providing access to bus cycles that are not visible externally during normal opera tion show cycles allow a development support system to trace the flow of a program The LSHOW field in the SIUMCR can be programmed to cause the EBI to echo certain or all internal L bus cycles on the external bus Likewise the ISCTL field in the ICTRL register instruction bus control register SPR 158 in the RCPU can be programmed to cause the EBI to echo certain or all internal l bus cycles on the external bus MOTOROLA 5 30 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The I bus show cycles are always address only cycles They do not wait for the inter nal transaction to complete L bus show cycles have both address and data and appear on the external bus after the internal cycle is completed
151. C509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 85 5 7 2 System Protection Registers Table 5 40 shows the SIU system protection registers Table 5 40 System Protection Address Map Access Address Register S U 0x8007 FC40 Periodic Interrupt Control and Select Register PICSR S U 0x8007 FC44 Periodic Interrupt Timer Register PIT S 0x8007 FC48 Bus Monitor Control Register BMCR 5 7 3 Periodic Interrupt Timer PIT The periodic interrupt timer consists of a 16 bit counter clocked by the input oscillator signal divided by four A 4 MHz system oscillator frequency results in a one microsec ond count interval The input clock signal is supplied by the clock module In order to ensure adequate range for the PIT the input clock signal to the PIT must not exceed 4 MHz The 16 bit counter counts down to zero when loaded with a value from the PIT count PITC field in the PICSR After the timer reaches zero the PIT status PS bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the PIT interrupt enable PIE bit is set to one At the next input clock edge the value in the PITC is loaded into the counter and the process starts over When a new value is loaded into the PITC field the periodic timer is updated i e the new value is loaded into the modulus counter and the counter begins counting The software service routine should read the PS bit and then write it to zero to termi nate the interrupt
152. CS 0 11 Selects Output Chip select signals for external memory devices CT 0 3 EBI Output Cycle type signals Indicate what type of bus cycle the bus master is ini tiating DATA 0 31 EBI Input Output 32 bit data bus Data strobe Asserted by EBI at the end of a chip select controlled bus DS EBI Output cycle after the chip select unit asserts the internal TA signal or the bus monitor timer asserts the internal signal Also asserted at the end of a show cycle Used primarily by development tools Dev Development serial clock Used to clock data shifted into or out of devel DSCK Input Support opment serial port Dev Development serial data in Used to shift development serial data into DSDI Input Support the development port shift register DSDO Dev Output Development serial data out Used to shift development serial data out Support of the development port shift register Provides a clock reference output with a frequency equal to the crystal ECHOUT Clocks oscillator frequency taken from the PLL feedback signal EXTAL Clocks Input for external crystal to the internal oscillator circuit or clock IRQ 0 6 PCU Input Interrupt request inputs Clock mode The state of this signal and that of Vppsw during reset de termine the source of the system clock normal operation 1 1 mode K lock MODEL PLL bypass mode or special test mode Refer to Table 5 32 in SEC TION 5 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT for details
153. Chip selects 5 34 address map 5 39 base address registers 5 39 block diagram 5 35 multi level protection 5 46 of system boot memory See CSBOOT option registers 5 40 regions 5 44 reset operation 5 67 See also CS CHSTP bit 8 54 CHSTPE 8 55 CI 5 43 5 49 CLAMP 9 5 CLKOUT 2 18 5 14 5 67 5 70 frequency control 5 74 Clock mode development port 8 25 signal See MODCLK module 5 68 CMD field 4 4 CMPA CMPD 8 46 CMPE CMPF 8 46 CMPG CMPH 8 47 CNTC 8 52 CNTV 8 52 Comparator A D value registers 8 46 E Fvalue registers 8 46 G H value registers 8 47 Compare instructions 3 15 size 8 50 type 8 15 8 48 8 50 Condition register 3 13 3 15 Configuration word reset 5 99 Control register block 5 9 Count register 3 17 COUNTA 8 52 COUNTB 8 53 CPU exception encoding 8 33 CR 3 5 3 13 3 17 and compare instructions 3 15 CR 2 8 5 14 5 34 CR bit 5 93 CRO field 3 14 field 3 14 Cross bus accesses 5 10 CRWE 8 50 CRWEF 8 50 MOTOROLA Index 2 Crystal oscillator 5 72 CS 2 18 5 37 CSBAR 5 39 CSBOOT base address 5 67 sub blocks 5 47 CSBOOT 2 17 5 37 CSBTBAR 5 39 CSBTOE 5 37 CSBTOR 5 40 CSBTSBBAR 5 39 CSG 8 50 CSH 8 50 CSOR 5 40 CSR 5 5 CT 2 13 5 13 5 20 5 29 CTA 8 48 CTB 8 48 CTC 8 48 CTD 8 48 CTE 8 50 CTF 8 50 CTG 8 50 CTH 8 50 CTR 3 5 Cycle types See CT p DO 7 3 DAE source instruction service register 3 19 DAR 3 20 DAT field in ICSDAT 4 5 DATA 2 13 5 13 5 21 Data address register 3 20 b
154. D DECODE 0X8000 0000 L MEM MODULE 1 0X8007 EFFF L BUS MAPPING SIGNALS 3 IMB INTERFACE SIU DECODE BLOCK IN SIU AND EACH MODULE READ WRITE CONTROL REGISTERS LMEMBASE 4 KBYTE BLOCK 0X8007 F000 CPU IMEMBASE I MEM MODULE I BUS MAPPING SIGNALS 3 MPC500 MOD SEL BLOCK Figure 5 2 Internal Module Select Scheme 5 3 3 1 Memory Block Mapping The SRAM array can be mapped to one of four locations These locations are at the top and bottom of the 4 Gbyte address range They include the two alternatives for the PowerPC vector map 0x0000 0100 and OxFFFF 0100 The LMEMBASE field in the memory mapping register MEMMAP determine the locations of the SRAM array Figure 5 3 shows the mapping of the memory blocks within the memory map MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 0 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 4 KBYTES 0x0000 0000 0x0000 OFFC EXTERNAL POSSIBLE SRAM Ox000F E000 2 LOCATION 4 KBYTES 0x000F EFFC EXTERNAL 0x8000 0000 EXTERNAL RESERVED 0x8007 E000 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT PCU 0x8007 EFFC 0x8007 F000 CONTROL REGISTERS 0x8007 EXTERNAL VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 1 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 4 KBYTES OxFFFO 0000 OxFFFO OFFC EXTERNAL OxFFFF E000 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 4 KBYTES OxFFFF EFFC
155. D rA SIMM Add Immediate Shifted addme addme addmeo addmeo rD rA Add to Minus One Extended addze addze addzeo addzeo rD rA Add to Zero Extended and and rA rS rB AND andc rA rS rB AND with Complement andi rA rS UIMM AND Immediate andis rA rS UIMM AND Immediate Shifted b ba bl bla target addr Branch bc bca bcl bcla BO Bl target addr Branch Conditional bcctr bcctrl BO BI Branch Conditional to Count Register belr BO BI Branch Conditional to Link Register cmp crfD L rA rB Compare cmpi crfD L rA SIMM Compare Immediate cmpl crfD L rA rB Compare Logical crfD L rA UIMM Compare Logical Immediate cntlzw cntlzw rA rS Count Leading Zeros Word crand crbD crbA crbB Condition Register AND crandc crbD crbA crbB Condition Register AND with Complement creqv crbD crbA crbB Condition Register Equivalent crnand crbD crbA crbB Condition Register NAND crnor crbD crbA crbB Condition Register NOR cror crbD crbA crbB Condition Register OR crorc crbD crbA crbB Condition Register OR with Complement crxor crbD crbA crbB Condition Register XOR divw divw divwo divwo rD rA rB Divide Word divwu divwu divwuo divwuo rD rA rB Divide Word Unsigned eieio Enforce In Order Execution of I O MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 26 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 3 18 Instruction Set Summary Continued
156. DI pin is transferred to the trap enable control register When the processor is in debug mode the data received on the DSDI pin is provided to the debug mode interface Refer to 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions and 8 3 6 CPU Input Transmissions for additional information The DSDI pin is also used at reset to control overall chip reset configuration and imme diately following reset to determine the development port clock mode See 8 3 3 Development Port Clock Mode Selection for more information MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 23 8 3 1 3 Development Serial Data Out When the processor is not in reset the development port shifts data out of the devel opment port shift register using the development serial data out PLLL DSDO pin When the processor is in reset the PLLL DSDO pin indicates the state of lock of the system clock phase locked loop This can be used to determine when a reset is caused by a loss of lock on the system clock PLL 8 3 2 Development Port Registers The development port consists of two registers the development port shift register and the trap enable control register These registers are described in the following paragraphs Figure 8 6 illustrates the development port registers and data paths TO SIU TO RCPU TRAP ENABLES 0 5 VSYNC BREAKPOINTS TRAP ENABLES VSYNC BREAKPOINTS 9 BITS o lt 2 o 2 2 tr 2
157. DO JTAG Output Three statable test data output that changes on the falling edge of TCK TEA EBI Input Transfer error acknowledge Asserted by an external device to signal a bus error condition Test mode select input with a pull up resistor Sampled on the rising hs Input edge of TCK to sequence the test controllers state machine Asynchronous active low test reset with a pull up resistor that provides TRST JTAG Input initialization of the TAP controller and other logic as required by the stan dard TS EBI Output Transfer start When asserted indicates the start of a bus cycle Power supply input to the VCO In addition the state of this signal and that of MODCLK during reset determine the source of the system clock Clocks Input normal operation 1 1 mode PLL bypass mode or special test mode Referto Table 5 32 in SECTION 5 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT for de tails Dev Denotes the last fetched instruction or how many instructions were 2 Support Output flushed from the instruction queue Dev Denotes how many instructions are flushed from the history buffer dur VFLS 0 1 Support Output ing the current clock cycle Also indicates freeze state VsssN Clocks Input Power ground input to the VCO Dev Output signals for l bus watchpoints WP 0 3 and L bus watchpoints Support Output wprisp XTAL Clocks Output Connection for external crystal to the internal oscillator circuit WR EBI Output Asserted low write cyc
158. Development Port Usage Shifted out of A ete ui Development Port Activity Sub Any CPU instruction or data Port ignores data and latches sequence error 7 6 Data for trap enable control Null Port updates trap enable control register 7 Sequence Error Port ignores data 6 8 6 Examples of Debug Mode Sequences The tables that follow show typical sequences of instructions that are used in a devel opment activity They assume that no bus errors or sequence errors occur and that no writes occur to the trap enable control register 8 6 1 Prologue Instruction Sequence The prologue sequence of instructions is used to unload the machine context when entering debug mode The sequence starts by unloading two general purpose regis ters RO and R1 to be used as a data transfer register and an address pointer Since SRRO and SRR1 are not changed while in debug mode except by explicitly writing to them there is no need to save and restore these registers Finally the ECR is unloaded to determine the cause of entry into debug mode Any registers that will be used while in debug mode in addition to RO and R1 will also need to be saved Table 8 20 Prologue Events Development Port Activity Instruction Processor Activity Purpose Shift in instruction mtspr DPDR RO Transfer RO to DPDR Save RO so the register
159. ECR is a nine bit register that is loaded from the development port shift register The contents of the TECR are used to drive the six trap enable signals the two breakpoint signals and the VSYNC signal to the processor Trap enable transmissions to the development port cause the appropriate bits of the development port shift register to be transferred to the control register 8 3 3 Development Port Clock Mode Selection All of the development port serial transmissions are clocked transmissions The trans mission clock can be either synchronous or asynchronous with the system clock CLKOUT The development port supports three methods for clocking the serial transmissions The first method allows the transmission to occur without being exter nally synchronized with CLKOUT but at more restricted data rates The two faster communication methods require the clock and data to be externally synchronized with CLKOUT The first clock mode is called asynchronous clocked since the input clock DSCK is asynchronous with CLKOUT The input synchronizers on the DSCK and DSDI pins sample the inputs to ensure that the signals used internally have no metastable oscil lations To be sure that data on DSDI is sampled correctly transitions on DSDI must occur a setup time ahead of the rising edge of DSCK Data on DSDI must also be held for one CLKOUT cycle plus one hold time after the rising edge of DSCK This ensures that after the signals have passed through the
160. ENABLES CLOCKED MODE Figure 8 7 Enabling Clock Mode Following Reset Examples of serial communications using the three clock modes are shown in Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 and Figure 8 10 MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 27 CLK OUT DSCK SYNC DSCK Di Di Di 050 SYNC Di Di D 080 5 PLLL D DO 0500 Ve INT S R CLK DEBUG PORT DETECTS THE START BIT ON DSDI AND FOLLOWS THE READY BIT WITH TWO STATUS BITS AND N OUTPUT DATA BITS DEVELOPMENT TOOL DRIVES THE START BIT ON DSDI AFTER DETECTING READY BIT ON PLLL DSDO WHEN IN DEBUG MODE THE START BIT IS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWED BY A LENGTH BIT AND A CONTROL BIT AND THEN N 7 OR 32 INPUT DATA BITS DEBUG PORT DRIVES READY BIT ONTO PLLL DSDO WHEN READY FOR A NEW TRANSMISSION Figure 8 8 Asynchronous Clocked Serial Communications In Figure 8 8 the frequency on the DSCK pin is equal to CLKOUT frequency divided by three This is the maximum frequency allowed for the asynchronous clocked mode DSCK and DSDI transitions are not required to be synchronous with CLKOUT MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 28 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLK OUT d oso pus Lae go n 5 wv EX RIKER CLK DEBUG PORT DETECTS THE START BIT ON DSDI AND FOLLOWS THE READY BIT WITH TWO STATUS BITS AND N 7 OR 32 OUTPUT DATA BITS DEVELOPMENT TOOL DRIVES THE START
161. FACE for more information on these pins 2 5 10 1 Test Data Input TDI Input only Module JTAG State Meaning Asserted Negated Represents the value of the test data input Timing Comments Sampled on the rising edge of 2 5 10 2 Test Data Output TDO Output only Module JTAG State Meaning Asserted Negated Represents the value of the test data output Timing Comments Changes on the falling edge of 2 5 10 3 Test Mode Select TMS Input only Module JTAG State Meaning Asserted Negated Sequences the test controller s state machine Timing Comments Sampled on the rising edge of 2 5 10 4 Test Clock TCK Input only Module JTAG State Meaning Test clock input to synchronize the test logic MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 22 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 2 5 10 5 Test Reset TRST Input only Module JTAG State Meaning Asserted Signals TAP controller to reset itself Timing Comments Asynchronous MPC509 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 2 23 MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 24 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT The PowerPC based RISC processor RCPU used in the MPC509 integrates four execution units an integer unit IU a load store unit LSU a branch processing unit BPU and a floating point unit FPU The use of simple instructions with rapid exe cution times yields high efficiency and t
162. FFF hex 65 5 ms 0000 hex 65 5 ms NOTES 1 After a time out is signaled some additional time may elapse prior to any observed action 2 The count value associated with the maximum time out is 0b0000 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 88 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 7 3 3 PIT Enable Bits The PIT enable PTE bit in the PICSR enables or disables the timer When the timer is disabled it retains its current value When the timer is enabled it resumes counting starting with the current value The periodic interrupt enable PIE bit in the PICSR enables or disables PIT interrupts When this bit is cleared the PIT does not generate any interrupts The PIT continues to count even when interrupts are disabled 5 7 3 4 PIT Interrupt Request Level and Status The PIT interrupt request level PITIRQL field in the PIT port Q interrupt level register PITQIL determines the level of PIT interrupt requests Refer to 6 5 3 4 PIT Port Q Interrupt Levels Register for a description of this register The PIT status PS bit is set when the PIT issues an interrupt request This occurs when the modulus counter counts to zero The PS bit is cleared by writing it to zero after reading it as a one Attempting to write this bit to one has no effect 5 7 3 5 Periodic Interrupt Control and Select Register The periodic interrupt control and select register PICSR contains the interrupt status bit as well as the controls for the 16 bits to
163. For each combination of operand size and address placement on the inter nal L data bus the table shows the values of BE 0 3 and indicates which bytes of the operand are accessed and where these bytes are placed on the E bus Table 5 13 EBI Read and Write Access to 16 Bit Ports Operand Internal L Bus Internal L Bus Data ger Placement of L Bus Data Bytes On E Bus Size ADDR 30 31 Bytes Accessed E Bus DATA 0 7 E Bus DATA 8 15 Byte 00 Byte 0 0101 Byte 0 X Byte 01 Byte 1 1001 X Byte 1 Byte 10 Byte 2 0111 Byte 2 X Byte 11 Byte 3 1011 X Byte 3 Half Word 00 Bytes 0 to 1 0001 Byte 0 Byte 1 Half Word 10 Bytes 2 to 3 0011 Byte 2 Byte 3 Word 00 Bytes 0 to 3 de E i All transfer errors that occur during a small port access terminate the cycle currently in progress If an error occurs during any part of a word access to a small port the cur MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 27 rent access is terminated Subsequent bus cycles of the small port access will continue but TEA will be asserted internally with each beat 5 4 10 Address Retry Address retry ARETRY can be used to terminate the address phase Assertion of ARETRY causes the master to re arbitrate and to re run the bus cycle The address retry mechanism can be used to break deadlocks between the E bus and the user s on board I O bus for example a PC AT or VME bus in a hierarchical bu
164. Frequency Selection xe X RR 5 87 MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS MPC509 viii Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL Number 5 7 3 2 PIT Time Out Period Burgo TIT da qr Reg cR ug ie dein dg 5 7 3 4 PIT Interrupt Request Level and 5 7 3 5 Periodic Interrupt Control and Select Register 5 7 3 6 Periodic Interrupt Timer 5 7 4 Hardware Bus eccesso su Ee 5 79 1 Bus Momtor TIN ius uds 3 p o ce didi BAe Bue Monitor LOO code PEG E RETI SUR RES 5 743 Bus Monitor Enable 2264 20085 xs perra eX XAR oer sav ade 5 7 4 4 Bus Monitor Control 5 8 Operaio Ra RR Y Ree e Rec x de e Read 5 8 1 Reset SOUICOS esas Ra ECOCEREY Dos RESET OW 5 8 2 1 External Reset Request 5 8 2 2 Internal Reset Request Flow 5 8 2 3 Reset Behavior for Different Clock 5 5 8 9 Configuration During Reset Re rent RARE RR men 5 8 3 1 Data Bus Configuration Mode 2 2 0222 Internal Default BOUE cca dues aree need e Reus dee qe 5 8 3 3 Data Bus Reset Configuration Word
165. G 2 L ADDRESS DRIVE n L DATA STORE LOAD WRITE BACK n BRANCH DECODE n BRANCH EXECUTE 11 Figure 3 4 Basic Instruction Pipeline Table 3 21 indicates the latency and blockage for each type of instruction Latency refers to the interval from the time an instruction begins execution until it produces a result that is available for use by a subsequent instruction Blockage refers to the inter val from the time an instruction begins execution until its execution unit is available for a subsequent instruction Note that when the blockage equals the latency it is not pos sible to issue another instruction to the same unit in the same cycle in which the first instruction is being written back MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 34 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 509 Table 3 21 Instruction Latency and Blockage Instruction Type Precision Latency Blockage Floating point Double 7 multiply add Single 6 6 Floating point Double 4 4 add or subtract Single 4 4 Floating point multiply Shae 2 Floating point divide Integer multiply 2 1 or 2 Integer divide 2 to 11 2 to 11 Integer load store See note See note NOTES 1 Refer to Section 7 Instruction Timing in the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL MOTOROLA 3 35 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC5
166. INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL The SIU enters internal reset flow when an internal reset request is issued due to of the following causes loss of clock loss of PLL lock software watchdog time out entry into checkstop state or assertion of a JTAG reset request If the source of reset is either loss of oscillator or loss of clock the SIU resets the clocks and the PLL imme diately For other reset sources the SIU does not reset the clocks or the PLL When the internal reset request signal is asserted the SIU attempts to complete the current transaction on the external bus before placing the chip except clocks and PLL in reset SIU requests the L bus and l bus and removes the qualified bus grant from the EBI to make sure that no new transaction is started The SIU waits for 32 clock cycles after internal reset request is asserted or for the EBI to indicate that the SIU is idle whichever occurs first Then the SIU asserts RESETOUT and internal reset RESETOUT and internal reset will be driven out to put the chip into reset Four clock cycles after the assertion of RESETOUT all mode select pins will be sampled except DSCK and MODCLK pins which are sampled at the rising edge of RESETOUT RESETOUT is held for a minimum of 17 clock cycles After the 17 clock cycles the state of data bus configuration bit 19 determines when RESETOUT is released e If the PLL is operating in 1 1 mode or t
167. Indicates the logic level of data being shifted into the development port shift register During reset this pin functions as a reset configuration mode pin If the pin is pulled high while the MCU asserts RESETOUT the data bus pins are used to configure the system when the reset state is exited If the pin is low at the positive edge of RESETOUT then the system is configured by the internal default mode Refer to 5 8 3 Configuration During Reset for more information on reset operation Transitions are relative to CLKOUT in self clocked mode and relative to DSCK in clocked mode Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information 2 5 4 3 Development Port Serial Clock Input DSCK Input only Module Development support State Meaning Reset Operation Timing Comments MOTOROLA 2 16 Asserted Negated Provides a clock signal for shifting data into or out of development serial port During reset this pin functions as a debug mode enable pin If the pin is pulled high while the MCU asserts RE SETOUT debug mode is enabled when the reset state is exited For normal operation this pin should be pulled to ground through a resistor Refer to 5 8 3 Configuration Dur ing Reset for more information Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for detailed timing information SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 2 5 4 4 Instruction Fetch Visibility Signals VF 0 2 Output only M
168. LA Rev 15 June 98 5 43 Table 5 19 Chip Select Option Register Bit Settings Continued Bit s Name Description TA delay Indicates the latency of the device for the first TA returned Up to seven wait states are allowed 000 0 wait states 001 1 wait state 010 2 wait states 14 16 TADLY 011 3 wait states 100 4 wait states 101 5 wait states 110 6 wait states 111 7 wait states Refer to 5 5 10 Wait State Control for more information Port size 00 Reserved 01 16 bit port PS 10 32 bit port 11 Reserved Refer to 5 5 11 Port Size for more information Pin configuration Note that only pins CSBOOT and CS 1 5 can be CE pins 00 Chip enable 01 Write enable 19 20 PCON 149 Output enable OE 11 Alternate function address bus or discrete output Refer to 5 5 12 1 Pin Configuration for more information Byte enable This field applies to pins configured as WEs only Specifies for which of the four bytes in a word the WE is asserted If the region can always be written in 32 bit quantity this field can be programmed to any value 00 Byte enable 0 01 Byte enable 1 10 Byte enable 2 11 Byte enable 3 Refer to 5 5 12 2 Byte Enable Conirol for more information 21 22 BYTE Memory region only applicable when pin is configured to be a WE or OE pin These bits indicate the memory region with which the pin is associated 000 C
169. LA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 4 7 4 5 6 Cache Enable To enable the cache set the cache enable command in the ICCST This operation can be performed only at the supervisor privilege level The cache enable command has no error cases that the user needs to check Following reset the invalidate all and unlock all commands must be performed before the cache enable command 4 5 7 Cache Disable To disable the cache set the cache disable command in the ICCST This operation can be performed only at the supervisor privilege level The cache disable command has no error cases that the user needs to check 4 5 8 Cache Inhibit A memory region can be programmed in the chip select logic to be cache inhibit Any reference to a cache inhibited memory region always results in cache miss 4 5 9 Cache Read The user can read all data stored in the instruction cache including the data stored in the tags array To read the data that is stored in the follow these steps 1 Write to the ICADR the address of the data to be read Note that it is also pos sible to read this register for debugging purposes 2 Read the ICDAT So that all parts of the can be accessed the ICADR is divided into several fields shown in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 ICADR Bits Function for the Cache Read Command 0 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved 0 180 poe Reserved Setselect Word select used
170. Loop filter 5 73 LOORE 5 82 5 83 Loss of oscillator 5 93 reset enable 5 82 5 83 status 5 85 Loss of PLL lock 5 93 reset enable 5 76 5 82 5 83 Low power mode 5 78 MPC509 User s Manual lock 5 85 mask 5 83 select bits 5 84 LPM 5 78 5 84 LPML 5 78 5 80 5 85 LPMM 5 79 5 83 LR 3 5 3 16 LSHOW 5 5 LST 5 5 5 23 LSU 3 5 3 6 LWOEN 8 51 LWOIA 8 51 LWOIADC 8 51 LWOLA 8 51 LWOLADC 8 51 LWOLD 8 51 LWOLDDC 8 51 LW1EN 8 51 LW1IA 8 51 LW1IADC 8 51 LW1LA 8 51 LW1LADC 8 51 LW1LD 8 51 LW1LDDC 8 51 lwarx 5 31 Machine check enable 3 19 check exception 5 28 5 48 state register 3 18 status save restore register 0 3 21 status save restore register 1 3 22 MASK 5 26 MASKNUM 5 5 MCE 8 54 MCEE 8 55 ME bit 3 19 MEMMAP 5 6 5 8 5 10 Memory block mapping 5 8 mapping register See MEMMAP regions 5 44 Memory regions 5 44 MF 5 74 5 75 5 83 lock bit 5 76 5 85 MFD 5 74 MODCLK 2 19 5 70 Module select logic 5 7 MPL 5 76 5 80 5 85 MSR 3 18 Multi level protection 5 46 Multiplication factor 5 74 5 75 5 83 divider 5 74 N NI bit 3 13 Non IEEE 1149 1 1990 operation 9 8 Non IEEE floating point operation 3 13 INDEX MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 1998 Index 5 Non recoverable interrupt 3 23 Non speculative base address register See SPECADDR mask register See SPECMASK NRI 3 23 Null output encoding 8 34 5 35 5 53 5 54 OE bit 3 13 One to one mode 5 76 Ordered exceptions 3 31 Oscillator 5 72 loss of 5
171. MCU enters debug mode when the checkstop signal is received regardless of CSR value Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more infor mation on checkstop resets Burst style BDIP or LAST 0 BDIP pin uses BDIP timing reset value assert BDIP during burst negate BDIP during last 4 LST beat of burst 1 BDIP pin uses LAST timing assert LAST during last beat of burst Refer to 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Interface for more information 5 Reserved Supervisor unrestricted space These bits control access to certain SIU registers Other regis ters are always supervisor access only The access restrictions for each register are shown in Table 5 1 6 7 SUP 00 Unrestricted access reset value 01 Supervisor mode access only 10 Supervisor mode write access only unrestricted read access 11 Supervisor mode access only Debug register lock This bit can be written only when internal freeze signal is asserted DLK allows development software to configure show cycles and prevent normal software from subse 8 DLK quently changing this configuration This bit overrides the LOK in controlling the LSHOW field 0 LSHOW field in SIUMCR can be written to reset value 1 Writes to LSHOW field are not allowed Register lock Once this bit is set writes to the SIUMCR and chip select registers have no effect and cause a data error to be generated in the internal bus In normal operation this is a set only bit once set it cannot be cleare
172. MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 5 The ALU BFU unit includes the implementation of all integer logic add and sub tract and bit field instructions The IU also includes the integer exception register XER and the general purpose register file IMUL IDIV and ALU BFU are implemented as separate execution units The ALU BFU unit can execute one instruction per clock cycle IMUL IDIV instructions require multi ple clock cycles to execute IMUL IDIV is pipelined for multiply instructions so that consecutive multiply instructions can be issued on consecutive clock cycles Divide instructions are not pipelined an integer divide instruction preceded or followed by an integer divide or multiply instruction results in a stall in the processor pipeline Note that since IMUL IDIV and ALU BFU are implemented as separate execution units an integer divide instruction preceded or followed by an ALU BFU instruction does not cause a delay in the pipeline 3 4 3 Load Store Unit LSU The load store unit handles all data transfer between the general purpose and float ing point register files and the internal load store bus L bus The load store unit is implemented as an independent execution unit so that stalls in the memory pipeline do not cause the master instruction pipeline to stall unless there is a data depen dency The unit is fully pipelined so that memory instructions of any size may be issued on back t
173. MPC509UM AD ONTROL MPC500 Family MPC509 User s Manual MOTOROLA PowerPC Microcontrollers TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Number Number PREFACE Section 1 INTRODUCTION Li Poslie8g liora quae Kod edu Ew qe Saks dips d 1 1 1 2 La 1 3 LA Memory Mp usas a Pat dhe 1 5 Section 2 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS ol crc 2 1 22 s qo aces deep tactic oa CR Eder R a de C Rd 2 2 ES Pos eap bd a dcindc hes ic dei ca cus 2 3 2 4 Pins with Internal Pull Ups and 2 3 aS sun red a 2 4 2 5 1 Bus Arbitration and Reservation Support Signals 2 6 2531 1 Bus Fewer 2 6 E515 qas 2 7 ead aad 2 8 2534 Cancel Reservation GR adi cxe dap AW CORRER RC Od C PR OE iriri ACA OE 2 8 25 BOCES Goh deg e door du E bd 2 8 2 5 2 1 Address Bus ADDBI Q 29 K icu cR eem mec 2 9 2 5 2 2 Write Read WR 2 9 z 029 Buscar BURS pda d ded Pe ab ped aaa
174. NOTE Since there is no internal synchronization between the IEEE 1149 1 clock TCK and the system clock CLK the user must provide some form of external synchronization to achieve meaningful results when sampling system values 9 5 4 CLAMP 0011 The CLAMP instruction enables the single bit BYPASS register between TDI and TDO as test data register It is provided as a public instruction When the CLAMP instruction MPC509 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 5 is invoked the package output signals will respond to the preconditioned values within the update latches of the boundary scan register even though the bypass register is enabled as the test data register In circuit testing can be facilitated by setting up guarding signal conditions that control the operation of logic not involved in the test with use of the SAMPLE PRELOAD or EXTEST instructions Then as the chip enters into the CLAMP instruction the state and drive of all signals remain static until a new instruction is invoked While the sig nals continue to supply the guarding inputs to the in circuit test site the bypass is en abled and thus should minimize overall test time CLAMP asserts internal reset for the MPC509 system logic for the duration of the in struction This forces a predictable internal state while external boundary scan opera tions are performed The CLAMP instruction performs the same task as the EXTEST instructi
175. O NOTE The ADDR 0 11 CS 0 11 pins contain unknown values during the first two clocks of power on reset The user must ensure that external EEPROM and standby memory interface logic do not allow inadvert ent writes during this time Many of the pins associated with the SIU can be used for more than one function The primary function of these pins is to provide an external bus interface When not used for their primary function many of these pins can be used as digital pins SIU digital pins are grouped into eight bit ports The following registers are asso ciated with each I O port Output only ports do not have a data direction register Pin assignment register allows the user to configure a pin for its primary func tion or digital I O Data direction register configures individual pins as input or output pins Data register monitors or controls the state of its pins depending on the state MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 101 of the data direction register for that pin If a pin is not configured as an port pin in the pin assignment register the data direction and data registers have no effect on the pin Ports A through L can be used with a port replacement unit PRU These ports provide three clock cycle access If PRU mode is enabled at reset access to these registers is disabled and an external bus cycle is initiated Other non PRU ports p
176. OAD instruction enables the boundary scan register between TDI and TDO as test data register When this instruction is selected the operation of the test logic shall have no effect on the operation of the on chip system logic or on the flow of signal between the system pin and the on chip system logic as required in the 1149 1 specification This instruction provides two separate functions First it provides a means to obtain a snapshot of system data and control signals SAMPLE The snapshot occurs on the rising edge of TCK in the Capture DR controller state The data can be observed by shifting it transparently through the boundary scan register In a normal system con figuration many signals require external pull ups to ensure proper system operation Consequently the same is true for the SAMPLE PRELOAD functionality The data latched into the boundary scan register during the Capture DR state may not match the drive state of the package signal if the system required pull ups are not present within the test environment The second function of the SAMPLE PRELOAD instruction is to initialize the boundary scan register output cells PRELOAD prior to selection of CLAMP EXTEST or EXTEST PULLUP This initialization ensures that known data will appear on the out puts when executing the EXTEST instruction The data held in the shift register stage is transferred to the output stage on the falling edge of TCK in the Update DR control ler state
177. OINT SIGNAL ASSERTS BECAUSE DSCK STAYS ASSERTED FOR AT LEAST EIGHT CLOCK CYCLES AFTER RESETOUT NEGATION THEREFORE CPU WILL ENTER DEBUG MODE FOLLOWING RESET DEBUG MODE ENTRY IS INDICATED BY VFLS 0 1 BOTH HIGH Figure 8 12 Entering Debug Mode Following Reset 8 4 3 Debug Mode Operation In debug mode the CPU fetches instructions from the development port It can also read and write data at the development port In debug mode the prefetch mechanism in the CPU is disabled This forces all data accesses to the development port to occur immediately following the fetch of the associated instruction In debug mode if an exception occurs during the execution of an instruction normal exception processing does not result That is the processor does not save the MSR and instruction address and does not branch to the exception handler Instead a flag is set that results in a CPU exception status indication in the data shifted out of the development port shift register The same thing happens if the processor detects an external interrupt This can occur only when the associated DER bit is clear and MSR EE is set When the data in the development port shift register is shifted out MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 36 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL the exception status is detected by the external development tool The cause of the exception can be determined by reading the ECR 8 4 4 Freeze Function While the processor is in debug
178. ONS Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Timing Comments 2 5 2 7 Burst Inhibit BI Input only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MPC509 USER S MANUAL nal pins Negated While the MCU is driving BB indicates that the address bus and the transfer attributes must remain driven Assertion May occur as early as the clock cycle after TS is asserted assertion can be delayed to allow adequate ad dress access time for slow devices AACK should be as serted at the same time as or prior to the assertion of TA If AACK is returned prior to the assertion of TA the SIU can initiate another cycle while the previous cycle is still in progress that is returning AACK early allows pipelining of bus cycles Negation Must occur one clock cycle after the assertion of AACK High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists Asserted Indicates the addressed device does not have burst capability When this signal is asserted the SIU de composes the transfer into multiple cycles incrementing the address for each cycle For systems that do not use burst mode at all this signal can be tied low permanently Negated Indicates the device supports burst mode or that the BI signal is being sent by the chip select unit For systems that use SIU chip selects with all external memory the BI pin can remain negated the chip select unit can be programmed
179. PCU L BUS INTERFACE IMB2 ADDR 0 31 ADDRESS NTERFACE o DECODE DATA 0 31 N z l rine ADDR 0 31 g E SOFTWARE m WATCHDOG BRIAN PORTQ TEST INTERRUPT IRQ 0 7 CONTROLLER gt Figure 6 1 Peripherals Control Unit Block Diagram MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 1 6 2 PCU Address Map Table 6 1 shows the address map for the PCU An entry of 5 in the Access column indicates that the register is accessible in supervisor mode only S U indicates that the register can be programmed to the desired privilege level Test indicates that the register is accessible in test mode only Table 6 1 PCU Address Map Access Address Register S 0x8007 EF80 Peripheral Control Unit Module Configuration Register PCUMCR _ 0x8007 EF84 Reserved 0x8007 EF8C Test 0x8007 EF90 Test Control Register TSTMSRA Test Control Register TSTMSRB Test 0x8007 EF94 Test Control Register TSTCNTRAB Test Control Register TSTREPS Test 0x8007 EF98 Test Control Register TSTCREG1 Test Control Register TSTCREG2 Test 0x8007 EF9C Test Control Register TSTDREG Reserved S 0x8007 EFAO Pending Interrupt Request Register IRQPEND S 0x8007 EFA4 Enabled Active Interrupt Request Register IRQAND S 0x8007 EFA8 Interrupt Enable Register IRQENABLE S 0x8007 EFAC PIT Port Q Interrupt Level Register PITQIL
180. PR supports the double precision floating point format Every instruction that interprets the contents of an FPR as a floating point value uses the double precision floating point format for this interpretation That is all floating point numbers are stored in double precision format All floating point arithmetic instructions operate on data located in FPRs and with the exception of the compare instructions which update the CR place the result into an FPR Information about the status of floating point operations is placed into the float ing point status and control register FPSCR and in some cases into the CR after the completion of the operation s writeback stage For information on how the CR is affected by floating point operations see 3 7 4 Condition Register CR MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 10 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL FPRs Floating Point Registers 0 63 FPRO FPR1 FPR31 RESET UNCHANGED 3 7 3 Floating Point Status and Control Register FPSCR The FPSCR controls the handling of floating point exceptions and records status resulting from the floating point operations FPSCR 0 23 are status bits while FPSCR 24 31 are control bits FPSCR 0 12 and FPSCR 21 23 are floating point exception condition bits These bits are sticky except for the floating point enabled exception summary FEX and float ing point invalid operation exception summary VX Once set sticky bit
181. R Timing Comments Assertion Negation Accesses to these ports require three clock cycles the same as for external accesses to port replacement logic if a port replacement unit PRU is used 2 5 8 3 Port M PM 3 7 Input Output Module EBI State Meaning Asserted Negated Indicates the logic level of the data being transmitted Timing Comments Assertion Negation Accesses to port M require two clock cycles 2 5 9 Interrupts and Port Q Signals The MPC509 contains seven external interrupt pins These pins are grouped into a general purpose port port Q When not used as interrupt inputs any of these pins can be used for digital input or output Refer to SECTION 6 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT for more information on these pins 2 5 9 1 Interrupt Requests IRQ 0 6 Input only Module EBI State Meaning Asserted Indicates an external interrupt is being request ed with a request level corresponding to the IRQ number of the pin Negated Indicates no external interrupt when the indicat ed level is being requested MPC509 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 2 21 2 5 9 2 0 6 Input Output Module PCU State Meaning Asserted Negated Indicates the logic level of the data being transmitted Timing Comments Assertion Negation Accesses to port require two clock cycles 2 5 10 JTAG Interface Signals Refer to SECTION 9 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTER
182. R ME 0 and the checkstop enable bit in the DER is set the processor enters debug mode rather than the checkstop state This allows the user to determine why the checkstop state was entered Table 8 17 shows what happens when a machine check exception occurs under various conditions MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 37 Table 8 17 Checkstop State and Debug Mode Debug Action Performed MSR ME Mode CHSTPE MCIE when CPU Detects a ECR Value Enable Machine Check Interrupt 0 0 X X Enter the checkstop state 0x2000 0000 0 1 0 X Enter the checkstop state 0x2000 0000 0 1 1 X Enter debug mode 0x2000 0000 1 0 X X Take machine check exception 0x1000 0000 1 1 X 0 Take machine check exception 0x1000 0000 1 1 X 1 Enter debug mode 0x1000 0000 NOTES 1 Checkstop enable bit in the DER 2 Machine check interrupt enable bit in the DER 8 5 Development Port Transmission Sequence The following sections describe the sequence of events for communication with the development port in both debug and normal mode and provide specific sequences for prologues epilogues and poking and peeking operations 8 5 1 Port Usage in Debug Mode The sequence of events for communication with the development port in debug mode freeze is indicated on the VFLS pins is shown in Table 8 18 The sequence starts with the processor trying to read an instruction in step 1 The sequence ends when the
183. R S MANUAL POSSIBLE A2 CLOCK E BUS CLOCK UNDEFINED DON T CARE Figure 5 24 Type 1 Synchronous Burst Write Interface Figure 5 25 shows a read access to a type 2 burst interface ITYPE 8 Note that an output enable signal is not required for this type of interface Instead the interface uses the LAST signal MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 65 CLKOUT POSSIBLE A2 POSSIBLE OVERLAP ACCESS EN m ADDRESS LATCHED 2 WAIT STATES LAST DATA UNDEFINED DON T CARE Figure 5 25 Type 2 Synchronous Burst Read Interface 5 5 17 Burst Handling The chip select module supports burst accesses with four data beats per burst The following paragraphs describe how the chip select module handles some of the more complex cases For a single word access to a burstable region the chip select module asserts OE on a read or WE on a write for only one word The burstable region may require an early termination signal such as LAST The EBI is expected to provide the early termination indication to the region For fixed burst access to a burstable region since all burstable types supported by the chip
184. R7 3 7 5 Integer Exception Register XER The integer exception register XER is a user level 32 bit register MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 15 XER Integer Exception Register SPR 1 0 1 2 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SO OV CA O 0 0 0000000000 0 BYTES RESET UNCHANGED The bit definitions for XER shown in Table 3 8 are based on the operation of an instruction considered as a whole not on intermediate results For example the result of the subtract from carrying subfcx instruction is specified as the sum of three val ues This instruction sets bits in the XER based on the entire operation not on an intermediate sum In most cases reserved fields in registers are ignored when written to and return zero when read However XER 16 23 are set to the value written to them and return that value when read Table 3 8 Integer Exception Register Bit Definitions Bit s Name Description Summary Overflow SO The summary overflow bit is set whenever an instruction sets the 0 SO overflow bit OV to indicate overflow and remains set until software clears it It is not altered by compare instructions or other instructions that cannot overflow Overflow OV The overflow bit is set to indicate that an overflow has occurred during execu tion of an instruction Integer and subtract instructions having OE 1 set OV if the carry out of
185. RAM before modifying the chip select control registers MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 38 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 17 Chip Select Module Address Access Address Register p 0 8007 FD00 Reserved 0x8007 FD90 S 0x8007 FD94 CS11 Option Register CSOR11 S 0x8007 FD98 Reserved S 0x8007 FD9C CS10 Option Register CSOR10 S 0x8007 FDAO Reserved S 0x8007 FDA4 CS9 Option Register CSOR9 S 0x8007 FDA8 Reserved S 0x8007 FDAC 58 Option Register CSOR8 S 0x8007 FDBO Reserved S 0x8007 4 CS7 Option Register CSOR7 S 0x8007 FDB8 Reserved S 0x8007 FDBC CS6 Option Register CSOR6 S 0x8007 FDCO CS5 Base Address Register CSBAR5 S 0x8007 FDC4 CS5 Option Register CSOR5 S 0x8007 FDC8 CS4 Base Address Register CSBAR4 S 0x8007 FDCC CS4 Option Register CSOR4 S 0x8007 FDDO CS3 Base Address Register CSBAR3 S 0x8007 FDD4 CS3 Option Register CSOR3 S 0x8007 FDD8 CS2 Base Address Register CSBAR2 S 0x8007 FDDC CS2 Option Register CSOR2 S 0x8007 FDEO CS1 Base Address Register CSBAR1 S 0x8007 4 CS1 Option Register CSOR1 S 0x8007 FDE8 Reserved S 0x8007 FDEC CSO Option Register CSORO S 0x8007 FDFO CSBOOT Sub Block Base Address Register CSBTSBBAR S 0x8007 FDF4 CSBOOT Sub Block Option Register CSBTSBOR S 0x8007 FDF8 CSBOOT Base Address Register CSBTBAR S 0x8007 FDFC CSBOOT Option Register CSBTOR
186. RETRY must not be asserted at any time during the cycle if ARETRY is asserted during a burst cycle it must be asserted before the first beat is terminated with TA Note that BB is not negated until the second clock cycle af ter ARETRY assertion Negation Must occur one clock cycle after assertion of ARETRY 2 5 2 9 Address Type AT 0 1 Output only Module EBI State Meaning Asserted Negated AT 0 1 define the addressed space as user or supervisor and as data or instruction as shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Address Type Definitions AT 0 1 Address Space Definition 0b00 User data 0b01 User instruction 0b10 Supervisor data 0611 Supervisor instruction MOTOROLA 2 12 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Timing Comments Assertion Negation The AT 0 1 signals are address at tributes they are updated at the start of the address phase and maintained until the start of the next address phase High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists 2 5 2 10 Cycle Types CT 0 3 Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments 2 5 3 Data Phase Signals Asserted Negated Cycle type signals Indicate what type of bus cycle the bus master is initiating Refer to Table 5 14 in SECTION 5 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT for cycle type encodings Assertion Negation The CT 0 3 signals are address at tributes
187. ROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 22 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL PVR Processor Version Register SPR 287 0 15 16 31 VERSION REVISION RESET UNCHANGED Table 3 14 Processor Version Register Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 15 VERSION A 16 bit number that identifies the version of the processor and of the PowerPC architecture 16 31 REVISION A 16 bit number that distinguishes between various releases of a particular version 3 9 10 Implementation Specific SPRs The RCPU includes several implementation specific SPRs that are not defined by the PowerPC architecture These registers can be accessed by supervisor level instruc tions only 3 9 10 1 EIE EID and NRI Special Purpose Registers The RCPU includes three implementation specific SPRs to facilitate the software manipulation of the MSR RI and MSR EE bits Issuing the mtspr instruction with one of these registers as an operand causes the RI and EE bits to be set or cleared as shown in Table 3 15 A read mfspr of any of these locations is treated as an unimplemented instruction resulting in a software emulation exception Table 3 15 Manipulation of MSR EE and MSR RI SPR Number Mnemonic Effect on MSR Bits Decimal MSR EE MSRI RI 80 EIE 1 1 81 EID 0 1 82 NRI 0 0 3 9 10 2 Instruction Cache Control Registers The implementation specific supervisor level SPRs shown in Table 3
188. Register COUNTA Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control Register SPR 150 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CNTV RESET UNDEFINED 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED CNTC Table 8 33 Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control Register COUNTA Bit s Name Description 0 15 CNTV Counter preset value 16 29 Reserved Counter source select 00 not active reset value 30 31 CNTC 01 l bus first watchpoint 10 L bus first watchpoint 11 Reserved COUNTA 16 31 are cleared following reset COUNTA 0 15 are undefined MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 52 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 8 9 Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register COUNTB Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register SPR 151 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CNTV RESET UNDEFINED 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED CNTC RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 8 34 Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register COUNTB Bit s Name Description 0 15 CNTV Counter preset value 16 29 Reserved Counter source select 00 not active reset value 30 31 CNTC 01 l bus second watchpoint 10 L bus second watchpoint 11 Reserved COUNTB 16 31 are cleared following reset COUNTB 0 15 are undefined 8 8 10 Exception Cause Register ECR The ECR indicates the cause of en
189. Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 9 Burst Access Address Wrapping Starting Address Burst Address Wrapping 2 ADDR 28 30 ADDR 28 30 Half Word Word Boundary Address 000 Starting address 001 010 011 Double word boundary 16 bit 000 100 Two bursts of four beats each 101 110 111 010 Starting address 011 Odd word boundary 100 One burst of two beats 101 One burst of four beats 16 bit 010 110 One burst of two beats 111 The master the EBI terminates the two beat burst with BDIP 000 001 000 Starting address 010 Quad word boundary 32 Bu 900 100 One burst of four beats 110 100 Starting address 32 bit 100 110 Double non quad word boundary 000 One burst of four words word 3 4 1 2 010 5 4 8 Preventing Speculative Loads The SIU can be programmed to prevent speculative loads to a selected external region A speculative operation is one which the hardware performs out of order and which it otherwise might not perform such as executing an instruction following a con ditional branch Note that the MPC509 never performs speculative stores it always waits until the instruction is ready to be retired before writing to external memory Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information When data loaded speculatively from RAM later needs to be discarded this does not ordinarily present a problem For example a load instruction that follows a
190. S AACK RECEIVE AACK COULD STOP DRIVING ADDRESS HERE WAIT ONE CLOCK DATA DATA RETURN FOR THE READ TA Figure 5 5 Example of a Read Cycle 5 4 3 2 Write Cycle Flow Figure 5 6 is a flow diagram of a single write cycle on the external bus MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 17 MASTER SLAVE IS BUS GRANTED Y REQUEST BUS RECEIVE ADDRESS BUS GRANT RECEIVED CAN SLAVE PIPELINE BUS BEING Y DRIVEN BY ANOTHER y i MASTER ASSERT ADDRESS ACKNOWLEDGE 1 ASSERT BUS BUSY LATCH DATA ASSERT TRANSFER ASSERT TRANSFER ACKNOWLEDGE DRIVE ADDRESS AND ATTRIBUTES ADDRESS ACKNOWLEDGE ALREADY ASSERTED Y Y DRIVE DATA fone TRANSFER ACKNOWLEDGE gt Y RT ASSERT ADDRESS RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSFER COMPLETE Figure 5 6 Flow Diagram of a Single Write Cycle 5 4 4 Basic Pipeline The EBI supports a maximum pipeline depth of two that is up to two addresses can be active on a bus at the same time Pipelining is simplified by using SIU chip selects since chip select registers can have the information about the characteristics of each external memory 5 5 Chip Selects discusses which cycles can be pipelined The EBI supports pipelined accesses for read
191. SBOOT 001 CS1 010 CS2 23 25 REGION 011 CS3 100 CS4 101 2 CS5 110 Reserved 111 Reserved Refer to 5 5 5 Chip Select Regions for more information 26 27 Reserved Interface type Indicates the type of memory or peripheral device being controlled Refer to 5 5 13 28 31 interface Types for details 5 5 5 Chip Select Regions The SIU supports an address space of four gigabytes 232 bytes This space can be divided into regions Each region can be occupied by one or more chips depending on the output width of each chip MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 44 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Each chip select pin that is programmed as a chip enable defines a separate region Only the CSBOOT and CS 1 5 pins can serve as chip enables All chips within a region have a common chip enable signal Each chip select that can be programmed as a chip enable has an associated base address register In addition the CSBOOT sub block circuit has a base address reg ister The base address register specifies the base address of the memory or peripheral controlled by the chip select The base address and block size together determine the range of addresses con trolled by a chip select Block size is the extent of the address block above the base address Block size is specified in the BSIZE field of the chip select option register The BA base address field in the chip select base add
192. TA BEB oe controlr 10 amp 175 _6 13 bidir X 176 0 Z y c amp NI amp 177 _6 12 bidir X 178 0 Z amp y controlr 0 amp 179 BC 6 0 bidir X 180 0 Zj D amp num cell port function safe 11 dsval rslt 7 80 2 controlr 0 Y amp 181 BC 6 AT 1 bidir Xy 182 0 E amp S132 2p 7 controlf 0 amp 183 BC 6 PLLL bidir 36 184 0 amp 184 2 controlr 0 7 amp 185 BC 6 0 bidir X 186 0 Li ig m amp MES BEA2 Gontrodlb 20 g amp 1 87 BG VE 1 bidir X 188 0 Z y T amp 188 BC 2 controkr 9 amp 189 BC_6 VE 2 bidir X 190 0 Ze amp NTE90 BE 2 amp 191 BC 6 VFLS 0 bidir X 192 0 Z amp 51 92 22 COntrolr 2409 Y amp 193 BC 6 VFLS 1 bidir X 194 0 amp 594 2 Ky controlr Q gt amp 195 BC 6 0 bidir X 96 0 Z amp 196 BC 2 controlr Q amp 197 BC 6 WP 1 bidir X 98 0 amp 1 08 Fy Q y amp 199 BC 6 WP 2 bidir X 200 0 eS amp num cell port function safe 11 dsval rslt 200 BG 2 0 amp 201 BC 6 WP 3 bidir Xy 2025 0 Zr amp 5202 controlr 0 amp 203 BC 6 WP 4 bidir
193. TIONALMUX2 MUX 2 1 128 TO LINE BUFFER HIT FROM BURST BUFFER Figure 4 1 Instruction Cache Organization Figure 4 2 illustrates the data path of the MOTOROLA INSTRUCTION CACHE MPC509 4 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL ADDR 28 29 WORD 32 DATA 32 INSTRUCTION BYPASS TO CPU dea MUX 2 gt 1 MUX 4 4 ADDR 21 27 2 SELECT 2 HIT SET 4 KBYTE DECODER CACHE ARRAY 128 128 4 WORD aims LINE STREAM BURFER 128 4 woRD 128 BURST MUX BUFFER 2 5 Figure 4 2 Instruction Cache Data Path 4 3 Instruction Cache Programming Model Three special purpose registers SPRs control the Table 4 1 Instruction Cache Programming Model Name Description ICCST 560 control and status register ICADR 561 address register ICDAT 562 data port read only BUS These registers are privileged attempting to access them when the CPU is operating at the user privilege level results in a program exception MPC509 USER S MANUAL INSTRUCTION CACHE Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 4 3 ICCST Control and Status Register SPR560 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 IEN RESERVED CMD RESERVED UEM Hen n RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 2
194. UAL 1 4 Memory VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 0 ONE OF FOUR POSSIBLE LOCATIONS SELECTED FOR SRAM VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 1 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES EXTERNAL POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES EXTERNAL EXTERNAL RESERVED PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT PCU CONTROL REGISTERS EXTERNAL POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES EXTERNAL POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES Figure 1 4 MPC509 Memory Map 0x0000 0000 0x0000 6FFF 0x000F E000 0x000F EFFF 0x8000 0000 0x8007 E000 0x8007 EFFF 0x8007 F000 0x8007 FFFF OxFFFO 0000 OxFFFO 6FFF OxFFFF E000 OxFFFF EFFF The MPC family has a unified memory map including instruction memory I Mem load store memory L Mem and all memory mapped registers resides on the instruction bus L Mem resides on the load store bus The locations of I Mem and L Mem are selected in the MEMMAP register located in the SIU In the MPC509 the SRAM module serves as L Mem The MPC509 has module MPC509 USER S MANUAL INTRODUCTION Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 1 5 INTRODUCTION MPC509 1 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL involved 2 1 Pin List SECTION 2 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS This section describes the MPC509 signals and pins For a more detailed discussion of a particular signal refer to the section of the manual that discusses the function Table 2 1
195. Z OPTIONAL Vsssn Vsssn Vsssn Figure 5 27 Phase Locked Loop Block Diagram 5 6 4 1 Crystal Oscillator The crystal oscillator has one 10 M resistor and two external 36 pf capacitors con nected to the EXTAL and XTAL pins as shown in Figure 5 28 The internal oscillator is designed to work best with a 4 MHz crystal Crystal start up times depend on the value of the resistor The start up time can be reduced by reducing the value of the resistor MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 72 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 36 pF 4 MHz EXTAL o 1 10 MQ XTAL 36 pF Figure 5 28 Crystal Oscillator 5 6 4 2 Phase Detector The phase detector compares both the phase and frequency of the reference clock oscclk in Figure 5 27 and the feedback clock The reference clock comes from either the crystal oscillator or an external clock source The feedback clock comes from either CLKOUT the system clock in 1 1 mode or the VCO output divided down by the MF divider in normal mode The phase detector pulses either the UP or DOWN signal depending on the relative phase of the two clocks If the falling edge of the feedback clock lags the falling edge of the reference clock then the UP signal is pulsed If the falling edge of the feedback clock leads the falling edge of the reference clock then the DOWN signal is pulsed The width of these pulses relative to the reference clock is dependent
196. a tion This is a level signal RESET Source M This input only signal resets the entire MCU While RESET is asserted the MCU asserts the RESETOUT signal RESETOUT MS Reset output This output only signal indicates that the MCU is in reset When asserted instructs all devices monitoring this signal to reset all parts within themselves that can be reset by software CLKOUT Source M S Continuously running clock All signals driven on the E bus must be syn chronized to the rising edge of this clock MOTOROLA 5 14 Table 5 6 Address Type Encodings ATO AT1 Address Space User data space User instruction space Supervisor data space 0 1 0 1 Supervisor instruction space SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 5 7 Byte Enable Encodings Byte Enable Use During 32 Bit Port Access Use During 16 Bit Port Access BEO Byte Enable for DATA 0 7 Byte Enable for DATA 0 7 BE1 Byte Enable for DATA 8 15 Byte Enable for DATA 8 15 BE2 Byte Enable for DATA 16 23 ADDR30 nra 0 Operand size is word BER Byte Ernane TOF Dales 1 Operand size is byte or half word 5 4 3 Basic Bus Cycle The basic external bus cycle consists of two phases the address phase and the data phase If the external bus is not available when the SIU is ready to start an external Cycle a bus arbitration pha
197. a component during a test data scan sequence immediately following exit from the Test Logic Reset controller state will therefore show whether such a register is included in the design When the IDCODE instruction is selected the operation of the test logic has no effect on the operation of the on chip system logic as required in the IEEE 1149 1 1990 specification MSB LSB 31 28 27 12 11 1 0 VERSION PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER ID 1 Figure 9 6 IDREGISTER Configuration One application of the device identification register is to distinguish the manufactur er s of components on a board when multiple sourcing is used As more components MPC509 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 7 emerge which conform to IEEE 1149 1 1990 it is desirable to allow for a system diag nostic controller unit to blindly interrogate a board design in order to determine the type of each component in each location This information is also available for factory pro cess monitoring and for failure mode analysis of assembled boards 9 5 8 TMSCAN 1100 The TMSCAN instruction enables the 22 bit TMREG register between TDI and TDO as test data register It is provided as a Motorola private instruction in order to serially shift in stimulus data to the on chip test module and serially shift out test result from the test module 9 6 Restrictions The control afforded by the output enable signals using the boundary
198. able 3 5 Bit Settings for CRO Field of CR CRO Bit Description 0 Negative LT This bit is set when the result is negative 1 Positive GT This bit is set when the result is positive and not zero 2 Zero EQ This bit is set when the result is zero 3 Summary overflow SO This is a copy of the final state of XER SO at the completion of the instruction 3 7 4 2 Condition Register CR1 Field Definition In all floating point instructions when the CR is set to reflect the result of the operation that is when Rc 1 the CR1 field bits 4 to 7 of the CR is copied from FPSCR 0 3 MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 14 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL to indicate the floating point exception status For more information about the FPSCR see 3 7 3 Floating Point Status and Control Register FPSCR The bit settings for the CR1 field are shown in Table 3 6 Table 3 6 Bit Settings for CR1 Field of CR CR1 Bit Description Floating point exception FX This is a copy of the final state of FPSCR FX at the completion of the in struction Floating point enabled exception FEX This is a copy of the final state of FPSCR FEX at the completion of the instruction Floating point invalid exception VX This is a copy of the final state of FPSCR VX at the completion of the instruction Floating point overflow exception OX This is a copy of the final state of
199. accesses to all local bus slaves Hold one reservation for each local master capable of storage reservations Set the reservation when that master issues a load with reservation Clear the reservation when some other master issues a store to the reservation address Indicate the current status of the local bus reservation such that it may be sam pled prior to the address phase of the stwcx bus cycle The reservation must be set in time to enable a store to the reservation address and must be cleared fast enough to disable a store to the reservation address The EBI samples the CR pin prior to starting an external stwex cycle If the reserva tion is cancelled CR is asserted no cycle starts If the reservation is not cancelled the SIU begins the bus cycle If ARETRY is asserted the SIU must re sample the CR and BG pins prior to perform ing the external retry If a reservation exists on a non local bus and the SIU begins a stwex cycle to that address on the local bus while the non local bus reservation is cleared the ARETRY signal should be asserted to the SIU and the reservation signal should be cleared before BG is asserted to the SIU This means that AACK should not be returned until successful coherent completion of the stwcx is ensured The non local bus interface must not perform the non local write or abort it if the bus supports aborted cycles if it asserts ARETRY NOTE Single master systems do not requir
200. ace infor mation upon the report on the VF pins of VSYNC The watchpoint logic signals the ending event by asserting the appropriate watchpoint pin Upon detecting the second watchpoint negate VSYNC using the development port serial interface The external program trace hardware stops sampling the program trace infor mation upon the report on VF 0 1 of VSYNC The second method is not as precise as the first method because of the delay between the assertion of the watchpoint pins and the assertion or negation of VSYNC using the development port serial interface It has the advantage however of allowing the pro gram to run in quasi real time slowed only by show cycles on the external bus instead of stopping execution at the starting and ending events 8 1 4 4 Detecting the Trace Window Starting Address For a back trace the value of the status pins VF 0 2 and VFLS 0 1 and the address of the cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute should be latched start ing immediately after the negation of reset The starting address is the first address in the program trace cycle buffer MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 9 For a window trace the value of the status pins and the address of the cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute should be latched beginning immediately after the first VSYNC is reported on the VF pins The starting address of the trace win dow
201. ad store instructions These include integer and floating point load and store instructions Integer load and store instructions Integer load and store multiple instructions Floating point load and store Primitives used to construct atomic memory operations Iwarx and stwcx in structions Flow control instructions These include branching instructions condition register logical instructions trap instructions and other instructions that affect the instruc tion flow Branch and trap instructions Condition register logical instructions Processor control instructions These instructions are used for synchronizing memory accesses and cache management Move to from SPR instructions Move to from MSR Synchronize Instruction synchronize Memory control instructions These instructions provide control of the instruction cache Supervisor level cache management instructions User level cache instructions Note that this grouping of the instructions does not indicate which execution unit exe cutes a particular instruction or group of instructions Integer instructions operate on byte half word and word operands Floating point instructions operate on single precision one word and double precision one double word floating point operands The PowerPC architecture uses instructions that are four bytes long and word aligned It provides for byte half word and word operand loads and sto
202. al Note that the chip select module can also assert the internal TEA signal Refer to 5 5 7 Access Protection for more information 5 4 12 Cycle Types The cycle type pins CT 0 3 are address phase signals that provide information about the type of internal or external bus cycle in progress These pins can be used by an external development system to construct a program trace Table 5 14 summarizes the cycle type encodings Refer to the RCPU Reference Man ual RCPURM AD for details on how a development system can use the information provided by these pins Table 5 14 Cycle Type Encodings CT 0 3 Cycle Type Description This is a normal external bus cycle Both the address and data phase are seen on the external bus This cycle requires an AACK and a TA sig nal This cycle type is used for sequential fetches and for prefetches of predicted branch targets where the branch condition has not been eval uated before the prefetch It is also used for all non reservation type load store cycles 0000 Normal bus cycle If the address type is data AT1 0 then this is a data access to the Reservation start if external bus Both the address and the data phase are seen on the ex address type is data ternal bus This cycle requires an AACK and a TA signal When this cy cle starts external snooping logic should latch the address to track the OR reservation 0001 If the address type is instruction AT1 1 then this is an in
203. alified the L bus watch point occurs only if the L bus cycle was the result of executing an instruction that caused the qualifying watchpoint A watchpoint progresses in the machine along with the instruction that caused it fetch or load store cycle Watchpoints are reported on the external pins when the associ ated instruction is retired 8 2 1 1 Restrictions on Watchpoint Detection There are cases when the same watchpoint can be detected more than once during the execution of a single instruction For example the processor may detect an L bus watchpoint on more than one transfer when executing a load store multiple or string instruction or may detect an L bus watchpoint on more than one byte when working in byte mode In these cases only one watchpoint of the same type is reported for a single instruction Similarly only one watchpoint of the same type can be counted in the counters for a single instruction Since watchpoint events are reported upon the retirement of the instruction that caused the event and more than one instruction can retire from the machine in one clock separate watchpoint events may be reported in the same clock Moreover the same event if detected on more than one instruction e g tight loops range detec tion in some cases is reported only once However the internal counters still count correctly 8 2 1 2 Byte and Half Word Working Modes Watchpoint and breakpoint support enables the user to d
204. allows MCUs with on board non volatile memory modules such as flash EEPROM to provide a pin configuration word on the instruction or load store data bus during reset For MCUs without such a memory module such as the MPC509 the SIU provides a mask programmed default value 5 8 3 3 Data Bus Reset Configuration Word In either reset configuration mode data bus configuration mode or internal default mode the configuration is accomplished within the MCU by driving a configuration word on the internal data bus before the internal RESET signal is negated At the negation of internal RESET those functions that are configured at reset latch their configuration values from the assigned bits of the internal data bus The format of the data bus reset configuration word is the same regardless of which configuration mode is selected except that data bus bits 5 13 and 21 have no meaning in internal default mode Table 5 49 describes the configuration options MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 99 Table 5 49 Data Bus Reset Configuration Word Data Internal Default Bus Configuration Function Effect of Mode Select 1 Effect of Mode Select 0 Mode Bi Affected During Reset During Reset i 2 it 3VI O TTLI O Minimum Bus Mode Maximum Bus Mode 0 Address Bus ADDR O0 11 CS 0 11 ADDR 0 11 CS 0 1 1 configured 1 1 co
205. also adhere to the UISA and the VEA 3 6 RCPU Programming Model The PowerPC architecture defines register to register operations for most computa tional instructions Source operands for these instructions are accessed from the registers or are provided as immediate values embedded in the instruction opcode The three register instruction format allows specification of a target register distinct from the two source operands Load and store instructions transfer data between memory and on chip registers PowerPC processors have two levels of privilege supervisor mode of operation typi cally used by the operating environment and user mode of operation used by the application software The programming models incorporate 32 GPRs 32 FPRs spe cial purpose registers SPRs and several miscellaneous registers Supervisor level access is provided through the processor s exception mechanism That is when an exception is taken either due to an error or problem that needs to be serviced or deliberately through the use of a trap instruction the processor begins operating in supervisor mode The level of access is indicated by the privilege level PR bit in the machine state register MSR Figure 3 3 shows the user level and supervisor level RCPU programming models and also illustrates the three levels of the PowerPC architecture The numbers to the left of the SPRs indicate the decimal number that is used in the syntax of the instruction op
206. alue 3 11 4 Precise Exceptions In the 509 all synchronous instruction caused exceptions are precise When a precise exception occurs the processor backs the machine up to the instruction caus ing the exception This ensures that the machine is in its correct architecturally defined state The following conditions exist at the point a precise exception occurs 1 Architecturally no instruction following the faulting instruction in the code stream has begun execution 2 Allinstructions preceding the faulting instruction appear to have completed with respect to the executing processor addresses either the instruction causing the exception or the immediate ly following instruction Which instruction is addressed can be determined from the exception type and the status bits 4 Depending on the type of exception the instruction causing the exception may not have begun execution may have partially completed or may have complet ed execution 3 11 5 Exception Vector Table The setting of the exception prefix IP bit in the MSR determines how exceptions are vectored If the bit is cleared the exception vector table begins at the physical address 0x0000 0000 if IP is set the exception vector table begins at the physical address OxFFFO 0000 Table 3 20 shows the exception vector offset of the first instruction of the exception handler routine for each exception type MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 32 Rev
207. ame time or prior to assertion Address retry This is an address phase termination signal It is de signed to resolve deadlock cases on hierarchical bus structures or for error correcting memories ARETRY assertion overrides AACK asser tion and causes the SIU to re arbitrate and to re run the bus cycle ARETRY A gt M Burst inhibit When asserted indicates the slave does not support burst mode Sampled at same time as If BI is asserted the SIU trans fers the burst data in multiple cycles and increments the address for the slave in order to complete the burst transfer Data Phase Signals 32 bit data bus DATAO is most significant bit DATA31 is the least sig nificant bit During small port accesses data resides on DATA 0 15 DATA 0 31 Mes MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 13 Table 5 5 Signal Descriptions Continued Mnemonic Direction Description Burst data in progress This signal is asserted at the beginning of a burst data phase and is negated during the last beat of a burst The master uses this signal to give the slave advance warning of the remaining data in the burst This can also be used for an early termination of a burst cy cle When the LST bit in the SIUMCR is asserted the BDIP pin uses LAST timing If the LST bit is negated the BDIP pin uses BDIP timing Refer to 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Interface f
208. ave more than one function The logic state of certain mode select pins during reset determines which functions are assigned to pins with multiple functions These mode select pins determine other aspects of operating configuration as well Basic operating configuration is determined by the DSDI and DSCK pins as shown in Table 5 48 Table 5 48 Pin Configuration During Reset Pin During Reset Function Affected DSCK asserted 1 Debug mode enabled DSCK negated 0 Debug mode disabled DSDI asserted 1 DSDI negated 0 Data bus configuration mode Internal default mode The state of the DSDI pin is latched internally five clock cycles after RESETOUT is asserted The state of the DSCK pin is latched every clock cycle while RESETOUT is asserted The MCU is configured based on the values latched from these two pins The user is responsible for ensuring a valid level on these pins five clock cycles after RESETOUT is asserted If DSDI is asserted causing data bus configuration mode to be entered the user must also drive DATA 0 5 at a minimum For any reset source other than external reset the external data pins are latched five clock cycles after internal reset control logic asserts RESETOUT For external resets the data pins are latched five clock cycles after RESET is negated The default reset configuration word is driven onto the internal buses until the external word is latched If no external reset co
209. b sert dare que Far db RN e dubbed 5 79 5 60 5 Exiting Low Power Mode REX ERR E ERE Ex 5 79 nag System Clock Loek BIS doh owe aah Rd qe Ban die 5 79 56 8 Power Don Wake UD sese d qua d Rd X EORR Ru RE RE E C dees RUP RC OP Car 5 80 5 6 9 Time Base and Decrementer Support 5 80 5 6 9 1 Time Base and Decrementer Clock 5 81 5 6 9 2 Time Base Decrementer and Freeze 5 81 5 6 9 3 Decrementer Clock Enable DCE Bit 5 81 56 10 dade 5 81 5 65 10 1 Lessor PUL LOCK ases usu n Rn 5 82 55 0 usa dci dca bd adiacet di atc ud 5 82 5 6 11 System Glock Control Register SCOR sauer Re ERR RR ARR 5 83 5 6 12 System Clock Lock and Status Register 5 5 84 mr a e uid ERU ed UR dedo d aU 5 85 5 4 1 System Protection cues suene Re x RR RE Ron ace doe binge ee 5 85 5 7 2 System Protection Registers 5 86 Meno rer 4 a da DN qe RETO d QI qe 5 86 5 73 1 PIT Clock
210. be resolved early eliminating stalls caused by taken branches Table 3 1 summarizes the RCPU execution units MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 3 1 RCPU Execution Units Unit Description Branch processing unit BPU Includes the implementation of all branch instructions Includes implementation of all load and store instructions whether defined as part Unit ESU of the integer processor or the floating point processor Includes implementation of all integer instructions except load store instructions This module includes the GPRs including GPR history and scoreboard and the following subunits Integer unit IU The IMUL IDIV includes the implementation of the integer multiply and divide in structions The ALU BFU includes implementation of all integer logic add and subtract in structions and bit field instructions Includes the FPRs including FPR history and scoreboard and the implementa tion of all floating point instructions except load and store floating point instruc tions Floating point unit FPU The following sections describe the execution units in greater detail 3 4 1 Branch Processing Unit BPU The BPU located within the instruction sequencer performs condition register look ahead operations on conditional branches The BPU looks through the instruction queue for a conditional branch instruction and a
211. bit differentiates between instructions and data and allows the develop ment port to detect that an instruction was entered when the CPU was expecting data and vice versa If this occurs a sequence error indication is shifted out in the next serial transmission 8 3 7 Serial Data Out of Development Port Non Debug Mode The encoding of data shifted out of the development port shift register when the pro cessor is not in debug mode is shown in Table 8 14 MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 31 Table 8 14 Status Shifted Out of Shift Register Non Debug Mode Ready Status 0 1 Data 7 or 32 Bits Indication 0 0 1 Ones Sequencing Error 0 1 1 Ones Null NOTES 1 Depending on input mode When the processor is not in debug mode the sequencing error encoding indicates that the transmission from the external development tool was a transmission to the CPU length 0 When a sequencing error occurs the development port ignores the data being shifted in while the sequencing error is shifting out The null output encoding is used to indicate that the previous transmission did not have any associated errors When the processor is not in debug mode the ready bit is asserted at the end of each transmission If debug mode is not enabled and transmission errors can be guaran teed not to occur the status output is not needed and the DSDO pin can be used for untimed I O
212. ble CLKOUT frequencies with a 4 MHz crystal MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 74 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 33 CLKOUT Frequencies with a 4 MHz Crystal CLKOUT Hz RFD 0 3 X000 MF X001 X010 MF X011 MF X100 MF X101 MF X110 MF X111 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x11 0 0000 1 16 000 20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000 44 000 1 0001 2 8 000 10 000 12 000 14 000 16 000 18 000 20 000 22 000 M 2 0010 4 4 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 19 000 M 10 000 11 000 3 0011 8 2 000 2 500M 3 000 M 3 500M 4 000 4 500 5 000 5 500 1 000 1 250 1 500 1 750 2 000 2 250 2 500 2 750 5 0101 32 0 500 10 625 0 750 0 875 1 000 1 125 1 250 1 3750 0 250 10 313 0 375 0 438 0 500 0 563 0 625 0 688 0 125 10 156 0 188 0 219 0 250M 0 281M 0 313 M 0 344 M 256 62 500 K 78 125K 93 750 0 109 M 0 125 M 0 141M 0 156 M 0 172M 31 250 K 39 068K 46 875 154 688 62 500 70 313K 78 125K 85 938 K 10 1010 1024 15 625 19 531 23 438 27 344K 31 250 35 156 39 063K 42 969 13 1010 1024 15 625 19 531 23 438 27 344K 31 250 35 156 39 063K 42 969 14 1010 1024 15 625
213. ble delay The DEC satisfies the following requirements MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 20 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Loading GPR from the DEC has no effect on the DEC Storing a GPR to the DEC replaces the value in the DEC with the value in the GPR Whenever bit 0 of the DEC changes from zero to one a decrementer exception request unless masked is signaled Multiple DEC exception requests may be re ceived before the first exception occurs however any additional requests are canceled when the exception occurs for the first request If the DEC is altered by software and the content of bit 0 is changed from zero to one an exception request is signaled The decrementer frequency is based on a subdivision of the processor clock In the 509 the default frequency is 1 MHz A bit in the system clock control register SCCR in the SIU determines the clock source of both the decrementer and the time base With a 1 MHz input frequency the decrementer period is 4295 seconds approxi mately 71 6 minutes 232 1 MHz 4295 seconds The state of DEC after standby power is restored is indeterminate The DEC runs con tinuously after power up unless the clock module is programmed to turn off the clock System software must perform any initialization The decrementer is not affected by reset and continues counting while reset is asserted A decrementer exception may be signaled to software pr
214. bug mode entry enabled reset value Development port interrupt enable bit 31 DPIE 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 Debug mode entry enabled reset value MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 56 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SECTION 9 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE The MPC509 includes dedicated user accessible test logic that is fully compatible with the EEE 1149 1 1990 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture Problems associated with testing high density circuit boards have led to development of this standard under the sponsorship of the Test Technology Committee of IEEE and the Joint Test Action Group JTAG The MPC509 supports circuit board test strate gies based on this standard This section is intended to be used with the supporting IEEE 1149 1 1990 standard The scope of this description includes those items required by the standard to be de fined and in certain cases provides additional information specific to the implementa tion For internal details and applications of the standard refer to the IEEE 1149 1 1990 document An overview of the JTAG pins on the MPC509 is shown in Figure 9 1 BSCH BSH BSCH BSQ 54 BSd TDI Bsd 509 lt trast TDO Bsd Bsd 859 Bs Figure 9 1 JTAG Pins Boundary scan cells BSC are placed at the digital boun
215. bus grant exists Asserted Negated This signal is driven high for a read cycle and low for a write cycle Assertion Negation WR is an address attribute it is up dated at the start of the address phase and maintained until the start of the next address phase Note that for pipelined accesses it is not valid during the data phase High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists 2 5 2 3 Burst Indicator BURST Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MPC509 USER S MANUAL Asserted indicates a burst cycle If a burst access is burst inhibited by the slave BURST is driven during each single beat decomposed cycle Negated Indicates current cycle is not a burst cycle Assertion Negation BURST is an address attribute it is updated at the start of the address phase and maintained until the start of the next address phase High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 9 2 5 2 4 Byte Enables BE 0 3 Output only Module EBI State Meaning BE 0 3 indicate which byte within a word is being access ed External memory chips can use these signals to deter mine which byte location is enabled Table 2 6 explains the encodings during accesses to 32 bit and 16 bit ports Table 2 6 Byte Enable Encodings Byte Enable Use During
216. c and rfi instructions It can be read by the mfmsr instruction MSR Machine State Register 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RESERVED ILE RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 EE PR FP ME FEO SE BE FE1 0 IP RESERVED RI LE RESET 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value of this bit depends on the value of the data bus reset configuration word Table 3 10 shows the bit definitions for the MSR Table 3 10 Machine State Register Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 14 gt Reserved Exception little endian mode When an exception occurs this bit is copied into MSR LE to select the endian mode for the context established by the exception 0 Processor runs in big endian mode during exception processing 1 Processor runs in little endian mode during exception processing 15 ILE External interrupt enable 0 The processor delays recognition of external interrupts and decrementer exception condi tions 16 EE 1 The processor is enabled to take an external interrupt or the decrementer exception Caution Be sure the EE bit is cleared before changing the masks of any on or off chip interrupt sources or before negating any interrupt sources Privilege level 17 PR 0 The processor can execute both user and supervisor level instructions 1 The processor can only execute user l
217. can be used Shift out RO data shift in instruction mfspr RO ECR Transfer ECR to RO Read the debug mode cause register Shift in instruction mtspr DPDR RO Transfer from RO to DPDR Output reason for debug mode entry Shift out stop cause data shift in instruction mtspr DPDR R1 Transfer R1 to DPDR Save R1 so the register can be used Shift out R1 data shift in instruction First instruction of next sequence Execute next instruction Continue instruction processing 8 6 2 Epilogue Instruction Sequence MPC509 USER S MANUAL The epilogue sequence of instructions is used to restore the machine context when leaving debug mode It restores the two general purpose registers and then issues the rfi instruction If additional registers were used while in debug mode they also need to be restored before the rfi instruction is executed DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 8 41 Table 8 21 Epilogue Events Development Port Activity Instruction Processor Activity Purpose Shift in instruction shift in saved RO mfspr RO DPDR Transfer from DPDR to RO Restores value of RO when stopped Shift in instruction shift in saved R1 mfspr R1 DPDR Transfer from DPDR to R1 Restores value of R1 when stopped Shift in instruction rfi Return from exception Restart execution 8 6 3 Peek Instruction Sequence The
218. can be assigned to the CSBOOT region which comes out of reset configured as an asynchronous region with seven wait states In this case the MCU doesnt latch the data to be read until the assigned number of wait states have elapsed and OE is asserted 0110 Reserved Region with fixed burst access capability burst type 1 and synchronous OE Re fer to Figure 5 23 but with a synchronous not asynchronous OE and to Figure 5 24 Devices with this type of interface are pipelineable and can hold off internal data until OE is asserted The interface keeps the first data beat valid until the BDIP signal indicates that it should send out the next data This interface type can function as an asynchronous interface That is a device with this ITYPE can be assigned to the CSBOOT region which comes out of reset configured as an asynchronous region with seven wait states In this case the MCU doesnt latch the data to be read until the assigned number of wait states have elapsed and OE is asserted 0111 Region with fixed burst access capability burst type 2 Refer to Figure 5 25 This interface type uses the LAST timing protocol Typically this ITYPE is used for burst accesses to DRAM This interface type may have an OE and may have a wait state counter but the chip select logic does not expect the device to have either and will never assert the OE signal OE can be provided by external logic if required or a different ITYPE
219. can be selected The device will drive outthe data after the number of wait states it requires The interface keeps the first data beat valid for only one clock Any access to a device with this type of interface must be made using chip se lects and the ACKEN bit in the option register for the chip select must be set Because this type cannot hold off its internal data until the data bus is available an access to a region of this type cannot be pipelined with a previous access to the same or a different region That is the address of an access to this region cannot appear on the external bus before the data for the previous access The address for the second access can overlap the data for the first access however In addition if an access to this region is followed by an access to a pipelineable region the second access is pipelined 1000 This interface type can function as an asynchronous interface That is a device with this ITYPE can be assigned to the CSBOOT region which comes out of reset configured as an asynchronous region with seven wait states In this case the MCU doesnt latch the data to be read until the assigned number of wait states have elapsed and OE is asserted Synchronous region no burst with synchronous OE as with ITYPE 3 but with early overlapping of accesses to the region Refer to Figure 5 21 This type of in terface must be able to pipeline another access to it one clock cycle before it drives valid data
220. ces can cause reset External reset pin RESET Loss of oscillator Loss of PLL lock Software watchdog reset Checkstop reset JTAG reset external TRST pin All of these reset sources are fed into the reset controller The reset status register RSR reflects the most recent source or sources of reset Simultaneous reset requests can cause more than one bit to be set at the same time This register con tains one bit for each reset source A bit set to logic one indicates the type of reset that last occurred Individual bits in the RSR can be cleared by writing them as zeros after reading them as ones Writing individual bits as ones has no effect The register can be read at all times Assertion of the RESET pin clears all bits except the RESET bit MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 92 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL RSR Reset Status Register 0x8007 FC4C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ger LOO LOL SW CR RESERVED 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED Table 5 46 Reset Status Register Bit Settings Bit s Name Description If set source of reset is the external RESET input pin This pin should be asserted whenever Vpp 0 RESET is below VDDmin If set source of reset is a loss of oscillator The clock module asserts loss of oscillator reset when the MCU is in low power mode 3 or no clock si
221. clock to IMB2 modules Interrupt request multiplexer control 00 Disable multiplexing scheme eight possible interrupt sources 01 2 to 1 multiplexing 16 possible interrupt sources 10 3 to 1 multiplexing 24 possible interrupt sources 11 4 to 1 multiplexing 32 possible interrupt sources Refer to 6 5 2 3 Interrupt Request Multiplexing for details 1 2 IRQMUX 3 7 Reserved Supervisor access for PCU registers 00 Supervisor unrestricted registers respond to accesses in supervisor or user data space 01 Supervisor unrestricted registers respond to accesses in supervisor space only 8 9 SUPV a 10 Supervisor unrestricted registers respond to read accesses in either data space but write accesses can only be performed in supervisor data space 11 Undefined 10 31 Reserved 6 4 Software Watchdog The software watchdog monitors the system software interfaces and requires the soft ware to take periodic action in order to ensure that the program is executing properly To protect against software error the following service must be executed on a regular basis 1 Write 0x556C to the SWSR 2 Write OxAA39 to the SWSR This sequence clears the watchdog timer and the timing process begins again If this periodic servicing does not occur the software watchdog issues a reset Any number of instructions may occur between the two writes to the SWSR If any value other than 0x556C or OxAA3
222. counter Writes to this register have no effect Reads of the register do not affect the counter PIT Periodic Interrupt Timer Register 0x8007 FC44 012346 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 43 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED PIT RESET UNDEFINED 5 7 4 Hardware Bus Monitor Typical bus systems require a bus monitor to detect excessively long data and address acknowledge response times The MPC509 provides a bus monitor to monitor inter nal to external bus accesses on the E bus If the external bus pipeline depth is zero all previous external bus cycles are complete the monitor counts from transfer start to transfer acknowledge Otherwise the monitor counts from transfer acknowledge to transfer acknowledge If the monitor times out transfer error acknowledge TEA is asserted internally The bus monitor is always enabled regardless of the value of the BME bit in the BMCR while the internal freeze signal is asserted and debug mode is enabled or while debug mode is enabled and the debug non maskable breakpoint is asserted MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 90 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 7 4 1 Bus Monitor Timing The bus monitor timing BMT field in the BMCR allows the user to select one of four selectable response time periods Periods range from 16 to 256 system clock cycles The programmability of the time out allows for a variation in system peripheral response time The timing mechan
223. ct When the lock bit is set however writes to the corresponding bit or field in the SCCR have no effect All other bits in the SCCR are unaffected The MPL LPML and RFDL bits can be written to zero as many times as required Only a clock reset can clear one of these bits however once it is written to a one In freeze mode the lock bits can be written to a one or to a zero at any time 5 6 8 Power Down Wake Up PDWU power down wake up is an output signal used to signal an external power supply to enable power to the system PDWU can be asserted by the decrementer counting down to zero or by the CPU setting the wake up request WUR bit in the SCLSR The WUR bit controls the state of the PDWU pin directly The WUR bit is set when the CPU writes a one to it or when the MSB of the decrementer changes from a zero to a one WUR is cleared when the CPU writes a zero to it Note that to clear the bit it is not necessary to read the bit as a one before writing it as a zero as is required to clear most status bits Note that the WUR bit is not affected by resets and its value should remain as long as the keep alive power is valid At keep alive reset the WUR bit is in an unknown state 5 6 9 Time Base and Decrementer Support The time base is a timer facility defined by the PowerPC architecture It is a 64 bit free running binary counter which is incremented at a frequency determined by each imple mentation of the time base There is no
224. ction functions identically to EXTEST except for the presence of a weak pull up device on all input signals The MPC509 is a CMOS design and could therefore suffer from a logically indeterminate input value if an input or bi directional signal programmed as an input was inadvertently left unconnected The pull up current will given an appropriate charging delay supply a deterministic logic 1 result on an open input Note that when this instruction is used in board level testing with heavily loaded nodes it may require a charging delay greater than the two TCK periods needed to change from the Update DR state to the Capture DR state Two methods of providing an in crease delay are available Traverse into the Run Test Idle state for extra TCK periods of charging delay or Limit the maximum TCK frequency slow down the TCK so that two TCK periods are adequate 9 5 7 IDCODE 1101 The IDCODE enables the IDREGISTER between TDI and TDO as test data register It is provided as a public instruction to allow the manufacturer part number and ver sion of a component to be determined through the TAP Figure 9 6 shows the IDREG ISTER configuration Once the IDCODE instruction is decoded it selects the IDREGISTER a 32 bit test data register The bypass register loads a logic 0 at the start of a scan cycle whereas an IDREGISTER loads a constant logic 1 into its least significant bit LSB Examina tion of the first bit of data shifted out of
225. d and eventually is written to the array Together with the missed word an indication may arrive from the l bus that the mem ory device is non cacheable If such an indication is received the line is not written to the cache so that subsequent references to the same line will cause the line to be refetched 4 5 Cache Commands The MPC509 instruction cache supports the PowerPC invalidate instruction together with some additional commands that help control the cache and debug the information stored in it The additional commands are implemented using the three special pur pose control registers ICCST ICADR and ICDAT Most of the commands are executed immediately after the control register is written and cannot generate any errors When these commands are executed there is no need to check the error status in the ICCST Some commands may take longer and may generate errors In the MPC509 only load amp lock is such a command When executing this command the user needs to insert an isync instruction immediately after the cache command and check the error sta tus in the ICCST after the isync The error type bits in the ICCST are sticky allowing the user to perform a series of I cache commands before checking the termination sta tus These bits are set by hardware and cleared by software All cache commands except the icbi CPU instruction require setting the appropriate bits in the ICCST Since the ICCST is a supervisor level register
226. d by software When the internal freeze signal is asserted the 9 LOK bit can be set or cleared by software 0 Normal operation reset value 1 All bits in the SIUMCR and all of the chip select registers are locked 10 13 Reserved L bus show cycles 00 Disable show cycles for all internal L bus cycles reset value 01 Show address and data of all internal L bus write cycles 14 15 LSHOW 10 Reserved 11 Show address and data of all internal L bus cycles Refer to 5 4 13 Show Cycles for more information 16 23 PARTNUM Part number This read only field is mask programmed with a code corresponding to the number of the MCU 24 31 MASKNUM Mask number This read only field is mask programmed with a code corresponding to the mask number of the MCU MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 5 5 3 2 Memory Mapping Register The internal memory mapping register MEMMAP enables and sets the base address of the L bus SRAM internal memory block This register is accessible in supervisor mode only MEMMAP Memory Mapping Register 0x8007 FC20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LEN RESERVED LMEMBASE RESERVED RESET T 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 IEN LIX RESERVED IMEMBASE RESERVED RESET S 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value depends on the value of the data bus configuration word duri
227. d the ECR to clear the register and then perform an rfi instruction If the ECR is not cleared before the rfi instruction is executed freeze is not negated Itis therefore possible to nest inside a software monitor debugger without affecting the value of the freeze signal even though rfi is performed Only before the last rfi does the software need to clear the ECR Figure 8 14 shows how the ECR and DER control the assertion and negation of the freeze signal and the internal debug mode signal MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 43 5 DECODER EVENT EVENT VALID EXCEPTION CAUSE REGISTER ECR RFI RESET SET Q FREEZE DEBUG MODE ENABLE Figure 8 14 Debug Mode Logic 8 8 Development Support Registers Table 8 24 lists the registers used for development support The registers are accessed with the mtspr and mfspr instructions MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 44 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 8 24 Development Support Programming Model Mnemonic Name 144 CMPA Comparator A Value Register 145 CMPB Comparator B Value Register 146 CMPC Comparator C Value Register 147 CMPD Comparator D Value Register 148 ECR Exception Cause Register 149 DER Debug Enable Register 150 COUNTA Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control Register 151 COUNTB Breakpoint Counter B Value and Control Register 152 CMPE C
228. dary of the chip normally the package pins The boundary scan cells are chained together to form a boundary scan register BSR The data is serially shifted in through the serial port TDI and serially shifted out through the output port TDO 9 1 JTAG Interface Block Diagram A block diagram of the MPC509 implementation of the IEEE 1149 1 1990 test logic is shown in Figure 9 2 MPC509 IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 1 Tr 1 CLOCK IR TS Q SHIFT R TCK i E UPDATE IR TRST gt 8 RESET Y INSTRUCTION TDI REGISTER 4 BITS IR DECODER CLOCK DR SHIFT DR UPDATE DR RESET MODE TDRSEL 2 TCK ENABLE SELECT y vv Y BOUNDARY SCAN REGISTER TBD BITS gt gt 0 o DEVICE ID REGISTER 32 BITS C P Y BYPASS REGISTER 1 BIT TEST DATA REGISTERS TDO Figure 9 2 Test Logic Block Diagram 9 2 JTAG Signal Descriptions The MPC509 has five dedicated JTAG pins which are described in Table 9 1 The TDI and TDO scan ports are used to scan instructions as well as data into the various scan registers for JTAG operations The scan operation is controlled by the test access port TAP controller which in turn is controlled by the TMS in
229. data the device needs an OE control input and if the device is burstable it also needs the ability to suspend its internal state machine from advancing to the next data beat until the data bus has been granted to it An example of this is a memory device with burst address advance control such as BDIP to control the incrementing of its internal address counter 5 5 13 1 Interface Type Descriptions Table 5 27 lists the characteristics of each interface type Note that if software pro grams the ITYPE field to one of the reserved values the chip select signal will never be asserted Table 5 27 Interface Types Emeni Interface Type Generic asynchronous region with output buffer turn off time of less than or equal 0000 to one clock period see 5 5 13 2 Turn Off Times for Different Interface Types A device of this type cannot be pipelined Refer to Figure 5 17 and Fig ure 5 18 Generic asynchronous region with output buffer turn off time of two clock periods see 5 5 13 2 Turn Off Times for Different Interface Types A device of this 0001 type cannot be pipelined The chip select logic inserts a dead clock between two subsequent accesses to the same region of this type in order to satisfy the high time required by the CE and WE of some memory types Synchronous region no burst with asynchronous OE Refer to Figure 5 19 and Figure 5 20 A device with this type of interface is pipelineable can function as an asynchrono
230. de entry enabled Program exception enable bit 8 PREE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Floating point unavailable exception enable bit 9 FPUVEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Decrementer exception enable bit 10 DECEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled 11 12 Reserved MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 55 Table 8 36 DER Bit Settings Continued Bit s Name Description System call exception enable bit 13 SYSEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled Trace exception enable bit 14 TRE 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 Debug mode entry enabled reset value Floating point assist exception enable bit 15 FPASEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled 16 Reserved Software emulation exception enable bit 17 SEEE 0 Debug mode entry disabled reset value 1 Debug mode entry enabled 18 27 Reserved L bus breakpoint exception enable bit 28 LBRKE 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 Debug mode entry enabled reset value l bus breakpoint exception enable bit 29 IBRKE 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 Debug mode entry enabled reset value External breakpoint exception enable bit 30 0 Debug mode entry disabled 1 De
231. ded with exception specific information and MSR 16 31 are placed into SRR1 16 31 3 9 8 General SPRs SPRGO SPRG3 SPRGO SPRG3 are 32 bit registers provided for general operating system use such as performing a fast state save and for supporting multiprocessor implementations SPRGO SPRG3 are shown below SPRGO SPRG3 General Special Purpose Registers 0 3 SPR 272 SPR 275 0 31 SPRGO SPRG1 SPRG2 SPRG3 RESET UNCHANGED Uses for SPRGO SPRG3 are shown in Table 3 13 Table 3 13 Uses of SPRGO SPRG3 Register Description Software may load a unique physical address in this register to identify an area of memory reserved for SPRGO use by the exception handler This area must be unique for each processor in the system SPRG1 This register may be used as a scratch register by the exception handler to save the content of a GPR That GPR then can be loaded from SPRGO and used as a base register to save other to memory SPRG2_ This register may be used by the operating system as needed SPRGS3 This register may be used by the operating system as needed 3 9 9 Processor Version Register PVR The PVR is a 32 bit read only register that identifies the version and revision level of the PowerPC processor The contents of the PVR can be copied to a GPR by the mfspr instruction Read access to the PVR is available in supervisor mode only write access is not provided MOTO
232. defines the functionality of the MPC509 for use by software and hardware developers The MPC509 is a member of the PowerPC based Motorola MPC500 fam ily of microcontrollers Audience This manual is intended for system software and hardware developers and applica tions programmers It is assumed that the reader understands operating systems mi croprocessor and microcontroller system design and the basic principles of RISC processing Additional Reading This section lists additional reading that provides background to or supplements the information in this manual John L Hennessy and David A Patterson Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc San Mateo CA e PowerPC Microprocessor Family the Programming Environments MPCFPE AD RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD e SIU Reference Manual SIURM AD Additional Motorola MPC500 Family documentation Refer to Motorola publica tion Advanced Microcontroller Unit AMCU Literature BR1116 D for a complete listing of documentation Conventions This document uses the following notational conventions ACTIVE HIGH Names for signals that are active high are shown in uppercase text without an overbar Signals that are active high are referred to as asserted when they are high and negated when they are low ACTIVE LOW A bar over a signal name indicates that the signal is active low Active low signals are referred to as asserted active when th
233. e 10 match on read 14 15 CRWF Select match on read write of 11 match on write 16 17 CSG Compare size comparator G 00 reserved 01 word Compare size comparator H 10 half word 18 19 CSH 11 byte T Must be programmed to word for floating point compares 20 SUSG Signed unsigned operating mode 0 unsigned for comparator G 1 signed m Signed unsigned operating mode Must be programmed to signed for floating for comparator H point compares Byte mask for 1st L data 0000 all bytes are not masked See reper comparator 0001 the last byte of the word is masked Byte mask for 2nd L data 26 29 CHBMSK comparator 1111 all bytes are masked 30 31 Reserved m LCTRL 1 is cleared following reset 8 8 7 L Bus Support Control Register 2 LCTRL2 L Bus Support Control Register 2 SPR 157 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 LWOE LWO LWO LWO LW1E LW1 N LWOIA IADC LWOLA LADC LWOLD LDDC N LW1IA IADC LW1LA RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 BRK LW1 LW1 DLWO SLWO SLW1 LApc WILD f DDC M RESERVED EN EN EN EN RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 50 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 8 32 LCTRL2 Bit Settings
234. e register and complement register For a complete list of simplified mnemonics see the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD Programs written to be portable across the various assemblers for the PowerPC architecture should not assume the existence of mnemonics not described in that manual 3 10 3 Calculating Effective Addresses MOTOROLA 3 30 The effective address EA is the 32 bit address computed by the processor when exe cuting a memory access or branch instruction or when fetching the next sequential instruction The PowerPC architecture supports two simple memory addressing modes e EA rAJO 16 bit offset including offset 0 register indirect with immediate index EA rAJO rB register indirect with index These simple addressing modes allow efficient address generation for memory accesses Calculation of the effective address for aligned transfers occurs in a single clock cycle For amemory access instruction if the sum of the effective address and the operand length exceeds the maximum effective address the storage operand is considered to wrap around from the maximum effective address to effective address 0 Effective address computations for both data and instruction accesses use 32 bit unsigned binary arithmetic A carry from bit 0 is ignored in 32 bit implementations CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL 3 11 Exception Model The PowerPC exception mechanism allows the pr
235. e IRQ input to the CPU to be Requests Register IRQAND asserted Interrupt Request Contains four 5 bit fields that determine the interrupt request levels of Levels Register PITQIL the PIT and the IRQ 0 2 pins MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT 509 6 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 6 5 3 1 Pending Interrupt Request Register The pending interrupt request register IRQPEND is a read only status register that reflects the state of the 32 interrupt levels IRQPEND Pending Interrupt Request Register 0x8007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LO L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 6 5 3 2 Enabled Active Interrupt Requests Register The enabled active interrupt requests register IRQAND is a read only status register that is defined by the following equation IRQAND IRQPEND amp IRQENABLE where amp is a bitwise operation IRQAND Enabled Active Interrupt Requests Register 0x8007 EFA4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LO 1 12 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31
236. e Indexed Ihzx rD rA rB Load Half Word and Zero Indexed Imw rD d rA Load Multiple Word Iswi rD rA NB Load String Word Immediate Iswx rD rA rB Load String Word Indexed Iwarx rD rA rB Load Word and Reserve Indexed Iwbrx rD rA rB Load Word Byte Reverse Indexed Iwz rD d rA Load Word and Zero Iwzu rD d rA Load Word and Zero with Update Iwzux rD rA rB Load Word and Zero with Update Indexed Iwzx rD rA rB Load Word and Zero Indexed merf crfD crfS Move Condition Register Field merfs crfD crfS Move to Condition Register from FPSCR mcrxr crfD Move to Condition Register from XER mfcr rD Move from Condition Register mffs mffs frD Move from FPSCR mfmsr rD Move from Machine State Register mfspr rD SPR Move from Special Purpose Register mftb rD TBR Move from Time Base mtcrf CRM rS Move to Condition Register Fields mtfsbO mtfsb0 crbD Move to FPSCR Bit 0 mtfsb1 mtfsb1 crbD Move to FPSCR Bit 1 mifsf mifsf Move to FPSCR Fields mtfsfi crfD IMM Move to FPSCR Field Immediate mtmsr rs Move to Machine State Register mispr SPR rS Move to Special Purpose Register mulhw mulhw rD rA rB Multiply High Word mulhwu mulhwu rD rA rB Multiply High Word Unsigned mulli rD rA SIMM Multiply Low Immediate mullwo mullwo rD rA rB Multiply Low nand nand rA rS rB NAND neg neg nego nego rD rA Negate MOTOROLA 3 28 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 3 18 Instruction
237. e an external reservation track ing logic In these systems the CR pin should be tied by resistor to the reservation valid high state Alternatively the reservation pin may be configured as a port If the reservation pin is configured as a port the SIU will always consider the reservation to be valid 5 4 14 3 Reservation Storage Signals Reservation storage signals used by the EBI are summarized in Table 5 15 MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 33 Table 5 15 Storage Reservation Interface Signals Name Direction Description CR Snoop logic SIU Cancel reservation Each PowerPC CPU has its own CR signal This signal shows the status of any out standing reservation on the external bus When as serted CR indicates that there is no outstanding reservation This is a level signal ARETRY Non local bus interface Address retry When asserted indicates that the mas SIU ter needs to retry its address phase In case of an stwcx cycle to a non local bus on which the storage reservation has been lost this signal is used by the non local bus interface to back off the cy cle 5 5 Chip Selects Typical microcontrollers require additional hardware to provide external chip select signals In the MPC500 family the chip select logic controls the slaves of typical uni processor systems This allows the user to implement simple systems without the need to design any exte
238. e chip select must be set NOTE The LAST and BDIP signals share the same pin The LST bit in the SIU module configuration register SIUMCR specifies whether the pin uses timing for the LAST signal LST 1 or the BDIP signal LST 0 Type 1 and type 2 burst interfaces both have address latches so the address of the next access to the device can be overlapped with the previous access That is the MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 63 address of an access does not need to be valid after the address has been latched at the rising edge of the clock For type 1 burst interfaces with an asynchronous OE the ITYPE field in the appropri ate chip select option register should be programmed to 0b0101 For type 1 burst interfaces with a synchronous OE this field should be programmed to 0b0111 For type 2 burst interfaces ITYPE should be programmed to 0b1000 Figure 5 23 and Figure 5 24 show a read and write access respectively to a type 1 burst interface Note in Figure 5 23 that the OE is asynchronous ITYPE 5 CLKOUT 4 NEXT DATA OE ASYNCHRONOUS ENABLE DATA OUT DATA DO 01 X lt 02 WAIT STATE EE UNDEFINED 77 DON T CARE Figure 5 23 Type 1 Synchronous Burst Read Interface MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 64 Rev 15 June 98 USE
239. e frequency locked when the VCO frequency is six times the reference frequency The presence of the MFD in the loop allows the PLL to perform frequency multiplica tion or synthesis When the PLL is operating in 1 1 mode the MFD is bypassed and the effective multiplication factor is one Refer to 5 6 5 CLKOUT Frequency Control for details on setting system clock frequency with the MF and RFD bits 5 6 4 6 Clock Delay Besides frequency synthesis the PLL must also align the phase of i e phase lock the reference and system clocks to ensure proper system timing Since the purpose of the RFD is to allow the user to change the system frequency without forcing the PLL to re lock the feedback clock must originate before the RFD i e the output of the VCO The clock delay is a chain of gates that approximates the delay through the RFD clock generation circuits metal routing and the CLKOUT driver This approach does not allow for precise phase alignment System applications must not rely on precise phase alignment between the reference and system clocks when the PLL is operating in nor mal frequency synthesis mode In 1 1 mode however the RFD is disabled The feedback clock comes directly from the CLKOUT pin and true phase lock is achieved 5 6 5 CLKOUT Frequency Control The multiplication factor MF and reduced frequency divide RFD fields in the SCCR determine the system clock CLKOUT frequency Table 5 33 summarizes the avail a
240. e l bus support control register Refer to 8 1 2 Instruction Fetch Show Cycle Con trol for more information When the processor is programmed to generate show cycles on the external bus resulting from indirect change of flow these cycles can generate regular bus cycles address phase and data phase when the instructions reside in one of the external devices or they can generate address only show cycles for instructions that reside in an internal device such as or internal ROM 8 1 1 1 Marking the Indirect Change of Flow Attribute When an instruction fetch cycle that results from an indirect change of flow is an inter nal access e g access to an internal memory location or a cache hit during an access to an external memory address the indirect change of flow attribute is indi cated by the assertion low of the WR pin during the external bus show cycle When an instruction fetch cycle that results from an indirect change of flow is an access to external memory not resulting in a cache hit the indirect change of flow attribute is indicated by the value 0001 on the CT 0 3 pins Table 8 1 summarizes the encodings that represent the indirect change of flow attribute In all cases the AT1 pin is asserted high indicating the cycle is an instruc tion fetch cycle Table 8 1 Program Trace Cycle Attribute Encodings CT 0 3 AT1 WR Type of Bus Cycle 0001 1 1 External bus cycle 01xx Show cycle on the e
241. e show cycle to complete During cross bus accesses the show cycle is associated with the bus initiating the transaction For example if I bus show cycles are enabled and L bus show cycles are disabled then an instruction fetch from L RAM will show up as an address only l bus show cycle and an L bus access to would not have a show cycle Refer to SECTION 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT for more information on show cycles 5 4 14 Storage Reservation Support The PowerPC Iwarx load word and reserve indexed and stwex store word condi tional indexed instructions in combination permit the atomic update of a storage location Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details on these instructions The storage reservation protocol supports a multi level bus structure like the one shown in Figure 5 10 In this figure the E bus is a PowerPC bus interfaced to a non local bus such as a PC AT or VME bus through a non local bus interface For each local bus storage reservation is handled by the local reservation logic The protocol tries to optimize reservation cancellation such that a PowerPC processor is notified of the loss of a storage reservation on a remote bus only when it has issued MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 31 a stwcx instruction to that address That is the reservation loss indication comes as part of the stwcx cycle This method eliminates the need to have very fast s
242. e synchronizers to operate correctly the development serial clock fre quency must not exceed one half of the system clock frequency The clock may be implemented as a free running clock The shifting of data is controlled by ready and start signals so the clock does not need to be gated with the serial transmissions Refer to 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions and 8 3 6 CPU Input Transmissions The DSCK pin is also used during reset to enable debug mode and immediately fol lowing reset to optionally cause immediate entry into debug mode following reset This is described in section 8 4 1 Enabling Debug Mode and 8 4 2 Entering Debug Mode 8 3 1 2 Development Serial Data In Data to be transferred into the development port shift register is presented at the development serial data in DSDI pin by external logic To be sure that the correct value is used internally transitions on the DSDI pin should occur at least a setup time ahead of the rising edge of the DSCK signal if in clocked mode or a setup time ahead of the rising edge of the system clock whichever is greater This will allow operation of the development port either asynchronously or synchronously with the system clock The DSDI input must be driven either high or low at all times and not allowed to float A typical target environment would pull this input low with a resistor When the processor is not in debug mode freeze not indicated on VFLS 0 1 pins the data received on the DS
243. ected This means that a software monitor must configure the bus monitor to pro vide protection from unterminated bus cycles that occur during debugging When the processor is in debug mode debug mode is enabled and the freeze signal is asserted the bus monitor is enabled The bus monitor is also enabled when debug mode is enabled and a non maskable breakpoint is asserted by the development port These enables override the bus monitor enable bit BME in the bus monitor control register BMCR in the SIU In both cases the bus monitor time out period is whatever was programmed in the BMCR This override allows an external development tool to retain control over the CPU in debug mode by not allowing an external bus cycle to hang the processor in an endless wait for a transfer acknowledge In addition if the processor is executing normally and runs a bus cycle that is not ter minated a non maskable breakpoint always gains control of the processor by terminating the bus cycle with the bus monitor so the processor can enter debug mode In this case the non maskable breakpoint is not restartable The processor takes the breakpoint before completing the prologue of the exception handler called as a result of the bus monitor 5 3 5 2 Effects of Freeze on the Programmable Interrupt Timer PIT When freeze is asserted and the SIU freeze bit SIUFRZ is set in the SIU module con figuration register SIUMCR the PIT is disabled This disable overrides
244. egister low to indicate that all activity related to the previous transmission is complete and that a new transmission may begin The start of a serial transmission from an external development tool to the development port is signaled by a start bit on the DSDI pin The start bit also signals the development port that it can begin driving data on the DSDO pin While data is shifting into the LSB of the shift register from the DSDI pin it is simultaneously shifting out of the MSB of the shift register onto the DSDO pin A length bit defines the transmission as being to either the trap enable register length bit 1 indicating seven data bits or the CPU length bit 0 indicating 32 data bits Transmissions of data and instructions to the CPU are allowed only when the proces sor is in debug mode The two types of transmissions are discussed in 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions and 8 3 6 CPU Input Transmissions 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions If the length bit is set the input transmission will only be ten bits long These trap enable transmissions into the development port include a start bit a length bit a con trol bit and seven data bits Only the seven data bits are shifted into the 35 bit shift MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 30 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL register These seven bits are then latched into the TECR The control bit determines whether the data is latched into the trap enable and VSYNC bits of
245. egisters return zero and writes have no effect MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 37 base address register and one option register are associated with each chip select pin that can function as a chip enable The CSBOOT pin has a dedicated sub block for multi level protection It has two base address registers and two option reg isters One option register is associated with each pin that can function as a write enable or output enable but not as a chip enable Table 5 17 is an address map of the chip select module As the entries in the Access column indicate all chip select registers are accessible at the supervisor privilege level only When set the LOK bit in the SIU module configuration register SIUMCR locks all chip select registers to prevent software from changing the chip select configuration inadvertently Before changing the chip select configuration the user needs to ensure that this bit is cleared Note that if the processor is modifying the chip select registers of a region and it needs the instructions from that region a region that it is reconfiguring software needs to ensure that the code is accessible elsewhere For example if the processor is config uring the CSBOOT registers and simultaneously executing instructions out of the boot region software can re locate the necessary code to the instruction cache internal SRAM or to another external region such as external S
246. emory map The following table shows the meaning of the field Note that these locations include the two possible locations for the CPU vector table The address not given start or end depending upon the block depends on the block size Table 5 4 Internal Memory Array Block Mapping LMEMBASE Block Placement 00 Starting Address 0x0000 0000 01 Ending Address 0 000 EFFC 10 Starting Address 0000 11 Ending Address OXFFFF EFFC 5 3 3 5 Memory Mapping Conflicts Any access to a memory that does not exist causes the cycle to appear on the external bus Because the MPC509 does not have an 1 memory module an access to l bus memory is sent to the external bus even if the 1 memory enable bit in the MEMBASE register is set 5 3 4 Internal Cross Bus Accesses Each internal bus 5 and L bus has a master slave interface in the SIU The slave interface is used for accesses by the internal master RCPU to the external bus to memory on the opposite bus e g L bus to I bus access or to SIU registers The SIU allows masters on either internal bus I bus or L bus to access slaves on the other internal bus Accesses from one internal bus to resources on the other bus take at least three clocks because of arbitration and cycle termination delays Instruction fetching from L bus memory is intended primarily as a mechanism to allow a customer test program to be downloaded to on ch
247. er to Table 5 47 0 1 locked 20 Reserved 0 0 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 100 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 49 Data Bus Reset Configuration Word Continued Data 5 Internal Default Bus Configuration Function Effect of Mode Select 1 Effect of Mode Select 0 Mode Affected During Reset During Reset i 2 Bit 3 V TTL I O 21 Reset configuration Latch configuration from Latch configuration from internal 0 0 source For DATA 22 31 external pins defaults 22 Reserved 0 0 23 Reserved 0 0 24 LEN L bus memory modules L bus memory modules are dis 1 1 are enabled abled and emulated externally PRUMODE Forces accesses to ports No effect 25 A B J and L to go 0 external 26 ADDR 12 15 ADDR 12 15 PB 4 7 1 1 27 Reserved 0 0 28 Reserved 0 0 29 Reserved 0 0 30 Test Slave Mode Enable Test Slave Mode Disabled Test Slave Mode Enabled 1 1 31 Test Transparent Test Transparent Test Transparent 1 1 Mode Enable Mode Disabled Mode Enabled NOTES 1 3 V only I O structure The part number is MPC509L CFT33 2 TTL compatible 5 V friendly input structure The part number is MPC509L3 CFT33 5 8 4 Power On Reset Power on reset occurs when the VDDKAP 1 pin is high and Vpp makes a transition from zero to one The SIU does not have a power on reset circuit This function must be provided externally 5 9 General Purpose I
248. erands to access the register MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 7 Note that registers such as the general purpose registers GPRs and floating point registers FPRs are accessed through operands that are part of the instructions Access to registers can be explicit that is through the use of specific instructions for that purpose such as move to special purpose register mtspr and move from spe cial purpose register mfspr instructions or implicitly as the part of the execution of an instruction Some registers are accessed both explicitly and implicitly MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SUPERVISOR MODEL OEA USER MODEL UISA Machine State Register FPRO MSR 0 81 SPR18 DAE Source Instruction Service Register DSISR 99 sprig Condition SPR22 i i Supervisor Level SPRs Register SPR26 SPR27 sPnao 1 9 SPR81 tals SPRs2 SPR272 Status and Ganid SPR273 SPR274 SPR275 SPR284 Time Base Lower Write TBL 5 spRoes SPR287 SPR560 UserlevelSPRs SPR1 Integer Exception Register XER SPR562 SPR8 Link Register LR SPR1022 Floating Point Exception Cause Register FPECR SPR9 Count Register CTR 0 31 0 31 Development Support SPRs SPR144 SPR145 SPR146 Comparator C Value Register CMPC SPR147 USER MODEL VEA SPR148 SPR149 SPR150
249. errupt input from an external peripheral chip to the MCU can be routed through the PCU inter rupt controller or can be routed directly to the CPU IRQ input This allows the system interrupts to be structured in a cascade where an interrupt controller on an external chip is read only if a certain interrupt on the MCU is serviced or in parallel where all MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MPC509 6 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL interrupt controllers in the system are read and combined before it is determined which interrupt in the system needs servicing 6 5 2 Interrupt Sources Sources of interrupt requests to the interrupt controller include the periodic interrupt timer PIT two L bus interrupt request sources and the IRQ 0 6 interrupt request pins The request levels of PIT interrupts IMB2 interrupts and external IRQ 0 2 inter rupts are assigned by programming the PITQIL register The request levels of IRQ 3 6 external interrupts are assigned fixed values as explained below CAUTION Be sure the EE external interrupt enable bit in the MSR is cleared before changing the masks of any on or off chip interrupt sources or before negating any interrupt sources On chip interrupt masks are the IRQENABLE register and the PIE bit in the PICSR 6 5 2 1 External Interrupt Requests The levels of the IRQ 0 2 interrupt request pins are assigned by programming the PIT QIL The remaining interrupt request pins have fixed values IRQ3 a
250. etect matches on bytes and half words even when accessed using a load store instruction of larger data widths e g when loading a table of bytes using a series of load word instructions To use this feature the user needs to program the byte mask for each of the L data comparators and to write the needed match value to the correct half word of the data MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 13 comparator when working in half word mode and to the correct bytes of the data com parator when working in byte mode Since bytes and half words can be accessed using a larger data width instruction the user cannot predict the exact value of the L address lines when the requested byte or half word is accessed For example if the matched byte is byte two of the word and it is accessed using a load word instruction the L address value will be of the word byte zero Therefore the processor masks the two least significant bits of the L address comparators whenever a word access is performed and the least significant bit when ever a half word access is performed Address range is supported only when aligned according to the access size The following examples illustrate how to detect matches on bytes and half words 1 A fully supported scenario Looking for Data size Byte Address 0x0000 0003 Data value greater than 0x07 and less than 0 0 Programming option One L address comparator 0x0000 0
251. evel instructions MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 18 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 3 10 Machine State Register Bit Settings Continued Bit s Name Description Floating point available 0 The processor prevents dispatch of floating point instructions including floating point loads 18 FP stores and moves Floating point enabled program exceptions can still occur and the FPRs can still be accessed 1 The processor can execute floating point instructions and can take floating point enabled ex ception type program exceptions Machine check enable 19 ME 0 Machine check exceptions are disabled 1 Machine check exceptions are enabled 20 FEO Floating point exception mode 0 See Table 3 11 Single step trace enable 0 The processor executes instructions normally 24 SE 1 The processor generates a single step trace exception upon the successful execution of the next instruction When this bit is set the processor dispatches instructions in strict program order Successful execution means the instruction caused no other exception Single step tracing may not be present on all implementations Branch trace enable 22 BE 0 No trace exception occurs when a branch instruction is completed 1 Trace exception occurs when a branch instruction is completed 23 FE1 Floating point exception mode 1 See Table 3 11 24 Reserved Exception prefix The setting of this b
252. external reset request flow and the inter nal reset request flow 5 8 2 1 External Reset Request Flow Figure 5 31 is a flow diagram for external resets MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 5 93 FROM INTERNAL RESET FLOW ASSERT RESETOUT AND INTERNAL RESET REQUEST INTERNAL BUSES YES START THE COUNTER IF RESET 0 WAIT FOR CNT 17 P WAIT FOR PLL TO LOCK THIS STATE DEPENDS ON PLL MODE AND RESET CONFIG WORD NO IS CNT 17 OR PLL LOCKED IF RESET 0 CONTINUE REQUESTING BUSES a RELEASE RESETOUT AND INTERNAL RESETS AND START THE COUNTER RELEASE BUS REQUESTS AND GO TO IDLE Figure 5 31 External Reset Request Flow The external reset flow begins when the RESET pin is asserted low The external reset request has a synchronization phase during which it takes one of the two paths MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 94 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL synchronous or asynchronous before getting to the reset control logic The external reset request follows the asynchronous path in the case of power on reset or in case of loss of oscillator Under all remaining conditions the reset request goes through the synchronous path in which the reset request is synchronized with the system clock RESET must be asserted for at least two clock cycles to be recognized b
253. ey are low and negated when they are high MPC509 PREFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL xix mnemonics Instruction mnemonics are shown in lowercase bold italics Italics indicate variable command parameters for example bcctrx OxOF Hexadecimal numbers 060011 Binary numbers rAJO The contents of a specified GPR or the value zero REG FIELD Abbreviations or acronyms for registers are shown in uppercase text Specific bit fields or ranges are shown in brackets X In certain contexts such as a signal encoding this indicates a don t care For example if a field is binary encoded 0bx001 the state of the first bit is a don t care Nomenclature Logic level one is the voltage that corresponds to Boolean true 1 state Logic level zero is the voltage that corresponds to Boolean false 0 state To set a bit or bits means to establish logic level one on the bit or bits To clear a bit or bits means to establish logic level zero on the bit or bits A signal that is asserted is in its active logic state An active low signal changes from logic level one to logic level zero when asserted and an active high signal changes from logic level zero to logic level one A signal that is negated is in its inactive logic state An active low signal changes from logic level zero to logic level one when negated and an active high signal changes from logic level one to logic level zero LSB means least significant bit or bits MSB means most significan
254. first VF pins report when the processor returns to regular mode If VSYNC is not changed while the processor is in debug mode the first VF pins report is of an indirect branch taken VF 0 2 101 appropriate for the rfi instruction that is being issued In both cases the first instruction fetch after debug mode is marked with the program trace cycle attribute and therefore is visible externally MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 1 3 4 Cycle Type Write Read and Address Type Pins Cycle type pins CT 0 3 indicate the type of bus cycle being performed During show cycles these pins are used to determine the internal address being accessed Table 8 6 summarizes cycle type encodings Table 8 6 Cycle Type Encodings CT 0 3 Description 0000 Normal external bus cycle If address type is data AT1 0 this is a data access to the external bus and the start of a reservation If address type is instruction AT1 1 this cycle type indicates that an external address is the destination of an indirect change of flow 0001 External bus cycle to emulation memory replacing internal L bus memory An instruction access AT1 1 with an address that is the target of an indirect change of flow is indicated as a logic level zero on the WR output 0010 Normal external bus cycle access to a port replacement chip used for 0011 emulation support Access to internal
255. from instruction queue 100 4 instructions flushed from instruction queue 101 5 instructions flushed from instruction queue 110 Reserved 111 Instruction type information NOTES 1 Refer to Table 8 3 There is one special case in which although queue flush information is expected on the VF 0 2 pins according to the immediately preceding value on these pins regular instruction type information is reported The only instruction type information that can appear in this case is VF 0 2 111 indicating branch direct or indirect not taken Since the maximum queue flushes possible is five identifying this special case is not a problem 8 1 3 2 History Buffer Flush Status Pins History buffer flush status pins VFLS 0 1 indicate how many instructions are flushed from the history buffer this clock Table 8 4 shows VFLS encodings Table 8 5 VFLS Pin Encodings VFLS 0 1 History Buffer Flush Information 00 0 instructions flushed from history queue 01 1 instruction flushed from history queue 10 2 instructions flushed from history queue Used for debug mode indication FREEZE Program trace 11 external hardware should ignore this setting 8 1 3 3 Flow Tracking Status Pins in Debug Mode When the processor is in debug mode the VF 0 2 signals are low 000 and the VFLS 0 1 signals are high 11 If VSYNC is asserted or negated while the processor is in debug mode this informa tion is reported as the
256. fter the last flow change 8 2 Watchpoint and Breakpoint Support The RCPU provides the ability to detect specific bus cycles as defined by a user watchpoints It also provides the ability to conditionally respond to these watchpoints by taking an exception internal breakpoints Breakpoints can also be caused by an event or state in a peripheral or through the development port external breakpoints i e breakpoints external to the processor When a watchpoint is detected it is reported to external hardware on dedicated pins Watchpoints do not change the timing or flow of the processor Because bus cycles on the internal MCU buses are not necessarily visible on the external bus the watch points are a convenient way to signal an external instrument such as a bus state analyzer or oscilloscope that the internal bus cycle occurred An internal breakpoint occurs when a particular watchpoint is enabled to generate a breakpoint A watchpoint may be enabled to generate a breakpoint from a software monitor or by using the development port serial interface A watchpoint output may also be counted When the counter reaches zero an internal breakpoint is generated An external breakpoint occurs when a development system or external peripheral requests a breakpoint through the development port serial interface In addition if an on chip peripheral requests a breakpoint an external breakpoint is generated All internal breakpoints are masked b
257. ge of the bus clock 32 bit data bus 32 bit address bus with byte enables Compatible with PowerPC architecture Protocol allows wait states to be inserted during the data phase and supports ear ly burst termination Supports both 16 bit and 32 bit port sizes Bus electrical specification minimizes system power consumption 5 4 2 External Bus Signals Table 5 5 summarizes the E bus signals The following abbreviations are used in this table M Bus master S Slave device A Central bus arbiter T Bus watchdog timer X Any device on the system MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 12 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 5 Signal Descriptions Mnemonic Direction Description Address Phase Signals 32 bit address bus Least significant two bits ADDR 30 31 are not pinned out they can be determined from the BE 0 3 pins ADDRO is the 0 29 most significant bit Address bus is driven by the bus master to index the bus slave TS MS Transfer start This address control signal is asserted for one clock cycle at the beginning of a bus access by the bus master Write read When this address attribute is asserted a write cycle is in WR 5 5 progress When negated a read cycle is in progress For use of WR dur ing show cycles refer to SECTION 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Byte enables These address attribute signals indicate which byte within a word is being accessed
258. gnal is present on the EXTAL pin If the clock mod ule detects a loss of oscillator condition erroneous external bus operation will occur if synchro 1 LOO 4 nous external devices use the MCU input clock Erroneous operation can also occur if devices with a PLL use the MCU CLKOUT signal This source of reset is masked by the loss of oscillator reset enable LOORE bit in the system clock control register SCCR If set the cause of reset is the loss of PLL lock The clock module asserts loss of lock reset when the PLL detects a loss of lock and the loss of lock reset enable bit is set in the system clock con trol register SCCR If the PLL detects a loss of lock condition erroneous external bus operation 2 LOL will occur if synchronous external devices use the MCU input clock Erroneous operation can also occur if devices with a PLL use the MCU CLKOUT signal This source of reset is masked by the loss of lock reset enable LOLRE bit in the system clock control register 3 SW If set source of reset is a software watchdog time out This occurs when the software watchdog counter reaches zero If set the source of reset is a checkstop This occurs when the processor enters the checkstop 4 CR state and the checkstop reset is enabled 5 JTAG If set the source of reset is the JTAG module This reset occurs only during production testing 6 31 Reserved 5 8 2 Reset Flow The reset flow can be divided into two flows
259. gram for less than One L data comparator Ox4E20 4E20 and program for greater than One L data comparator 0x9C40 9C40 and program for less than Both byte masks 061111 Both L data comparators program to half word mode or to word mode 4 Result The event will be detected correctly if the compiler chooses a load store instruction with data size of half word If the compiler chooses load store in structions with data size greater than half word word multiple there might be some false detections These can be ignored only by the software that handles the breakpoints Figure 8 2 illustrates this partially supported scenario 0x0000 0000 0x0000 0004 0x0000 0008 0x0000 000c 0x0000 0010 POSSIBLE FALSE DETECT ON THESE HALF WORDS WHEN USING WORD MULTIPLE Figure 8 2 Partially Supported Watchpoint Breakpoint Example 8 2 1 3 Generating Six Compare Types Using the four basic compare types equal not equal greater than less than it is pos sible to generate two additional compare types greater than or equal and less than or equal The greater than or equal compare type can be generated using the greater than compare type and programming the comparator to the needed value minus one The less than or equal compare type can be generated using the less than compare type and programming the comparator to the needed value plus one This method does not work for the follow
260. h from comparators E amp F 11 match from comparators E F 2nd L bus watchpoint 0 don t care 16 LWILADG care don t care L addr events 1 care 2nd L bus watchpoint 00 match from comparator G 2 L data events selection 01 match from comparator H 19 10 match from comparators G amp H 11 match from comparator G H 2nd L bus watchpoint 0 don t care 13 ENED care don t care L data events 1 Internal breakpoints non mask 0 masked mode breakpoints are recognized only bit when MSR RI 1 reset value 20 BRKNOMSK 1 non masked mode breakpoints are always rec ognized 21 27 Reserved MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 51 Table 8 32 LCTRL2 Bit Settings Continued Bits Mnemonic Description Function Development port trap enable 28 DLWOEN selection of the 1st L bus watchpoint read only bit Development port trap enable 29 DLW1EN selection of the 2nd L bus 0 trap disabled reset value watchpoint read only bit 1 trap enabled 30 SLWOEN Software trap enable selection of the 1st L bus watchpoint Software trap enable selection 9 SERIEN of the 2nd L bus watchpoint LCTRL2 is cleared following reset For each watchpoint three control register fields LWxIA LWxLA LWxLD must be programmed For a watchpoint to be asserted all three conditions must be detected 8 8 8 Breakpoint Counter A Value and Control
261. h imped ance state occurs on the clock cycle after the final assertion of TA 2 5 3 2 Burst Data in Progress BDIP Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Indicates the data beat in front of the current one is needed by the master This signal is asserted at the beginning of a burst data phase Negated Indicates the final beat of a burst This signal can be negated prior to the end of a burst to terminate the burst data phase early Assertion Negation When the LST bit in the SIUMCR is set BDIP uses the timing for the LAST signal When LST is cleared BDIP uses the timing for the BDIP signal Refer to 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Interface for more information High impedance Coincides with negation of BB provid ed no qualified bus grant exists 2 5 3 3 Transfer Acknowledge TA Input only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MOTOROLA 2 14 Asserted Indicates the slave has received the data dur ing a write cycle or returned the data during a read cycle Note that TA must be asserted for each data beat in a burst transaction If the external access is to a chip select region for which the chip select circuit is programmed to return AACK and TA the uses the logical OR of the external pin and the internal TA signal returned by the chip select unit Negated While BB is asserted indicates that until TA is asserted the MCU must continue
262. hat CE is asserted one clock cycle earlier than in the previous example Figure 5 21 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 62 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLKOUT DATA PHASE TERMINATES DEVICE CAN 3 STATE ITS DRIVERS FROM CLOCK ONE WAIT STATE EE UNDEFINED 7 DON T CARE Figure 5 22 Synchronous Read with Early Overlap One Wait State 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Interface The chip select module supports two types of burst interfaces The type 1 burst inter face uses the output enable and the write enable to control the data being driven out or received The type 1 burst interface also requires a BDIP signal to control when the region should output the next beat of the burst For the read case the type 2 burst interface does not require an output enable signal Instead it uses a LAST signal When this signal is asserted at the rising edge of the clock the type 2 burst device places its output buffers in a high impedance state fol lowing the clock edge The CE of the type 2 burst must be valid for the duration of the device s access latency or wait states This type of device also requires a signal with timing similar to that of the TS signal The interface may or may not contain an OE signal Any access to a device with type 2 burst interface must be made using chip selects and the ACKEN bit in the option register for th
263. he data bus configuration bit 19 is cleared RESETOUT is released when the phase locked loop PLL is locked f data bus configuration bit 19 is set and the PLL is not operating in 1 1 mode RESETOUT is released as soon as the 17 clock cycles have finished Internal reset is released when RESETOUT is released however the internal buses are not released until 17 clocks after RESETOUT is negated If an external reset is asserted any time during this process the external reset flow begins 5 8 2 3 Reset Behavior for Different Clock Modes Table 5 47 summarizes the conditions under which internal reset is released for each clock mode Table 5 47 Reset Behavior for Different Clock Modes Clock Mode VppsN MODCLK Internal DATA19 1 at Reset Internal DATA19 0 at Reset Release internal reset when PLL is locked and 17 clocks after Normal Release internal reset 17 clocks RESET is negated OR when operation after RESET is negated time out value in the time base register has expired whichever occurs first 1 0 Release internal reset when PLL is locked and 17 clocks after RESET is negated SPLL bypass mode 0 1 Release internal reset 17 clocks after RESET is negated Special test mode Release internal reset 17 clocks after RESET is negated MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 97 5 8 3 Configuration During Reset Many SIU pins can h
264. he developer some control over the execution of the target program In circuit emulators and bus state analyzers are the most frequently used debugging tools In order for these tools to function properly they must have full visibility of the microprocessor s buses Visibility extends beyond the address and data portions of the buses and includes attribute and handshake signals In some cases it may also include bus arbitration sig nals and signals which cause processor exceptions such as interrupts and resets The visibility requirements of emulators and bus analyzers are in opposition to the trend of modern microcomputers and microprocessors where the CPU bus may be hidden behind a memory management unit or cache or where bus cycles to internal resources are not visible externally The development tool visibility requirements may be reduced if some of the develop ment support functions are included in the silicon For example if the bus comparator part of a bus analyzer or breakpoint generator is included on the chip it is not neces sary for the entire bus to be visible at all times In many cases the visibility requirements may be reduced to instruction fetch cycles for tracking program execu tion If some additional status information is also available to assist in execution tracking and the development tool has access to the source code then the only need for bus visibility is often the destination address of indirect change of flow instruct
265. hemselves that can be reset by software Assertion indicates that the MCU is in re set Negated Indicates normal operation Timing Comments For timing information refer to 5 8 Reset Operation 2 5 8 SIU General Purpose Input Output Signals Many of the pins associated with the SIU can be used for more than one function The primary function of these pins is to provide an external bus interface When not used for their primary function many of these pins can be used for digital I O Refer to 5 9 General Purpose I O for more information on these signals 2 5 8 1 Ports A and B PA 0 7 PB 0 7 Output only Module Ports State Meaning Asserted Negated Indicates the logic level of the data being transmitted Port A and port B share a data register PORTA PORTB and pin assignment register PAPAR PBPAR MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 20 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Timing Comments Assertion Negation Accesses to these ports require three clock cycles the same as for external accesses to port replacement logic if a port replacement unit PRU is used 2 5 8 2 Ports J K and L PI 0 7 PJ 0 7 PK 0 7 PL 2 7 Input Output Module Ports State Meaning Asserted Negated Indicates the logic level of the data being transmitted Ports J and L share a data register PORTI PORTJ PORTK PORTL data direction register DDRI DDRJ DDRK DDRL and pin assignment register PIPAR PJPAR PKPAR PLPA
266. hroughput for MPC509 based systems Most integer instructions execute in one clock cycle The FPU includes single and double precision multiply add instructions Instructions can complete out of order for increased performance however the processor makes execution appear sequential This section provides an overview of the RCPU For a more detailed description see the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD 3 1 RCPU Features High performance microprocessor Single clock cycle execution for many instructions Four independent execution units and two register files Independent LSU for load and store operations BPU featuring static branch prediction A 32 bit IU Fully IEEE 754 compliant FPU for both single and double precision opera tions Thirty two general purpose registers GPRs for integer operands Thirty two floating point registers FPRs for single or double precision oper ands Facilities for enhanced system performance Programmable big and little endian byte ordering Atomic memory references e In system testability and debugging features through boundary scan capability High instruction and data throughput Condition register CR look ahead operations performed by BPU Branch folding capability during execution zero cycle branch execution time Programmable static branch prediction on unresolved conditional branches A prefetch queue that can hold up to four instructions provid
267. i bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi _vector 0 to 11 _vector 0 to 3 vector 0 to 3 vector 0 to 6 _vector 0 to 5 _vector 0 to 1 _vector 0 to 2 vector 0 to 1 _vector 12 to 29 vector 0 to 31 vector 0 to 12 _vector 0 to 12 Chet E CU CU CF CE FS CE EV CE CI Rev 15 June 98 a01 al a2 etc MOTOROLA 9 9 use STD 1149 1 1990 11 attribute PIN MAP of MPC509 entity is PHYSICAL PIN MAP Begin package description for XX Package 160 PIN QFP XX Suffix package pins in same order as port list a0 al a2 etc for bit vectors constant XX Package PIN MAP STRING VSSE Lh 139 29 00 91 95 120 I2171 I37 153 y lt amp VDDE 160 14 26 40 61 75 80 94 106 121 126 136 152 4 VSSIL lt vs VDDIL 2e WU Ng VSSIB 66 lt a VDDIB 67 amp VDDIR 100 VSSIR 101 amp VDDIT 142 amp VSSIT 143 Sm US MES CIS 7559 258 Tot 156 155 54 6 CSBOOT 1 8 amp OT C l2 ql L0 9 2 amp IBS 77 POF hb
268. ible when the SIU wins the arbitration over the external bus Therefore there is some delay between the time it is reported on the status pins that a cycle marked as program trace cycle will be performed on the external bus and the actual time that this cycle can be detected on the external bus When the user negates VSYNC the processor delays the report of the assertion or negation of VSYNC on the VF pins until all addresses marked with the indirect change of flow attribute have been made visible externally Therefore the external hardware should stop sampling the value of the status pins VF and VFLS and the address of the cycles marked with the program trace cycle attribute immediately after the VSYNC report on the VF pins CAUTION The last two instructions reported on the VF pins are not always valid Therefore at the last stage of the reconstruction software the last two instructions should be ignored MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 10 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 8 1 5 Compress In order to store all the information generated on the pins during program trace 5 bits per clock 30 bits per show cycle a large memory buffer may be needed However since this information includes events that were canceled compression can be very effective External hardware can be added to eliminate all canceled instructions and report only on branches taken and not taken indirect flow change and the number of sequential instructions a
269. ible in supervisor m 5 3 1 SIU Module Configurat ode only ion Register The SIU module configuration register SIUMCR configures various aspects of SIU operation This register is accessible in supervisor mode only SIUMCR SIU Module Conf iguration Register 0x8007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 RESERVED CSR LST SUP DLK LOK RESERVED LSHOW RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 29 3 31 PARTNUM MASKNUM RESET Read Only Fixed Value Read Only Fixed Value MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 2 SIUMCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description SIU freeze 0 Decrementer and time base registers and the periodic interrupt timer continue to run while internal freeze signal is asserted reset value 0 SIUFRZ 1 Decrementer and time base registers and the periodic interrupt timer stop while the internal freeze signal is asserted Refer to 5 3 3 Internal Module Select Logic and SECTION 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT for information on the freeze signal 1 2 Reserved Checkstop reset enable 0 No action taken when SIU receives the checkstop signal from the CPU and debug mode not enabled reset value 3 CSR 1 SIU causes areset upon receiving checkstop signal from CPU and debug mode not enabled If debug mode is enabled the
270. imer or some system address protection mechanism such as the chip select logic Negated Indicates that no external device has signaled a bus error Assertion May occur at any time during the address phase or data phase of a bus cycle Negation Must occur one clock cycle after assertion of TEA Asserted By EBI indicates the termination of a cycle from an internal source TA or TEA assertion from the chip select unit TEA assertion from the bus monitor or a show cycle DS can be used to latch data for a bus analyzer It can also aid in following the external bus pipeline Assertion Occurs after the chip select unit asserts the in ternal TA signal or the bus monitor timer asserts the inter nal TEA signal DS is also asserted at the end of a show cycle SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 15 2 5 4 Development Support Signals 2 5 4 1 Development Port Serial Data Out DSDO Output only Module Development support State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Negated Indicates the logic level of data being shifted out of the development port shift register Transitions are relative to CLKOUT in self clocked mode and relative to DSCK in clocked mode Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information 2 5 4 2 Development Port Serial Data In DSDI Input only Module Development support State Meaning Reset Operation Timing Comments Asserted Negated
271. iming Burst cycles can also be terminated with the ARETRY signal Refer to 5 4 10 Address Retry for more information 5 4 6 2 Burst Inhibit Cycles Burst inhibit Bl is an address phase termination attribute that is sampled when AACK is asserted The slave asserts BI to indicate to the SIU that the addressed device does not have burst capability If this signal is asserted the SIU transfers the data in multiple cycles and increments the address for the slave in order to complete the burst transfer MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 23 A burst can only be burst inhibited until the first data is acknowledged TA asserted Since Bl is not sampled until AACK is asserted AACK must be asserted before or at the same time as TA Otherwise the Bl pin is never sampled The EBI supports three types of memory These memory types use the AACK and BI signals as follows Asimple asynchronous memory keeps AACK negated to keep the address valid The device can assert BI along with AACK or before AACK and with the first TA synchronous pipelineable non burstable memory returns AACK as soon as it is ready to receive the next address and asserts BI A burstable memory returns AACK and negates BI along with AACK or before AACK CAUTION If a memory region is under chip select control the chip select unit generates internally during burst accesses to interface types that do no
272. in the boundary scan cells of chip 1 will be driven immediately from chip 1 into its external connections 4 Shift the SAMPLE instruction into chip 2 to capture the logic level on the input pins including those driven by the EXTEST instruction of chip 1 Then shift the boundary scan register out to TDO for discrepancy checking PULLUP asserts internal reset for the MPC509 system logic for the duration of the instruction This forces a predictable internal state while external boundary scan operations are performed 9 5 2 BYPASS 1111 The BYPASS instruction enables the single bit BYPASS register between TDI and TDO as shown in Figure 9 4 This creates a shift register path from TDI to the bypass register and finally to the TDO signal circumventing the boundary scan register This instruction is used to enhance test efficiency by shortening the overall path between MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL TDI when no test operation of a component is required In this instruction the MPC509 system logic is independent of the test access port When this instruction is selected the test logic shall have no effect on the operation of the on chip system logic as required in the IEEE 1149 1 1990 specification SHIFTDR 34 D TDI CLOCKDR Figure 9 4 Bypass Register 9 5 3 SAMPLE PRELOAD 1110 The SAMPLE PREL
273. ing Modes assu aep RR ARE RA EC A RE 8 13 8 2 1 3 Generating Six Compare 8 15 8 2 1 4 Support Detailed Description 8 15 8 2 1 5 L Bus Support Detailed 8 17 MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS MPC509 15 1998 USER S MANUAL Paragraph Page Number Number 8 2 1 6 Treating Floating Point 8 19 0 2 2 NOE EVISU MINN 2444544 p Qus di eire de bandi acu ce id mg dei ica 8 19 8221 Breakpoint COURBES cue ee Re tees deta dama bees X RR XE 8 20 Trap enable Programmi cases eaux xke Aaa 8 20 Boc BIC 8 20 B29 External Breakin mex eem me ex me ended d RR d 8 21 C5 ak A ak aoo eo Re ua c id 8 21 52 Deve 333 Spur d Super ted e Sari baee eque de ded dm 8 22 62 1 Devetopmant 2 4 tech dE 8 22 8 3 1 1 Development Serial Clock 8 23 8 3 1 2 Development Serial 8 23 8 3 1 3 Development Serial Data 8 24 8 3 2 Development Port Registers 2 Cod eee RR Eae ee 8 24 8 3 2
274. ing boundary cases Less than or equal of the largest unsigned number 1111 1 Greater than or equal of the smallest unsigned number 0000 0 Less than or equal of the maximum positive number when in signed mode 0111 1 Greater than or equal of the maximum negative number when in signed mode 1000 These boundary cases need no special support because they all mean always true and can be programmed using the ignore option of the L bus watchpoint programming refer to 8 8 Development Support Registers 8 2 1 4 I Bus Support Detailed Description There are four address comparators comparators A B C D Each is 30 bits long and generates two output signals equal and less than These signals are used to gen MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 15 erate one of the following four events equal not equal greater than less than Figure 8 3 shows the general structure of I bus support COMPARE TYPE COMPARE COMPARATOR CONTROL BITS LOGIC I WATCHPOINT 0 COMPARE gt COMPARATOR TYPE LOGIC I WATCHPOINT 1 I WATCHPOINT 2 I WATCHPOINT COMPARE oe TYPE LOGIC COMPARE SIE TYPE LOGIC Figure 8 3 I Bus Support General Structure EVENTS GENERATOR The I bus watchpoints and breakpoint are generated using these events and accord ing to the users programming of the CMPA CMPB CMPC CMPD and ICTRL
275. ing look ahead capability Interlocked pipelines with feed forwarding that control data dependencies in hardware 4 Kbyte instruction cache two way set associative LRU replacement algo rithm MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 1 Figure 3 1 is a block diagram of the RCPU 3 2 RCPU Block Diagram 410019 S101S v 59509 qounos VLVd H3O3JNI nag AYOLSIH X s934 a3401s avo7 Inv NANI IOHLINOO viva AYOLSIH vo x SNILVO 14 3HOLS QVOT1 WRITE BACK BUS 2 SLOTS CLOCK umi Y anano LINN HO 13ddHd HOSSdO0OHd NOLLVH3N3O NOILONYLSNI HONVHg 59 LX3N YAONANOAS NOILONYLSNI lt tc 8 lt lt a 5 E 3 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 Figure 3 1 RCPU Block Diagram CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA 3 2 3 3 Instruction Sequencer The instruction sequencer see Figure 3 2 provides centralized control over data flow between execution units and register files The sequencer implements the basic instruction pipeline fetches instructions from the memory system issues them to available execution units and maintains a state history so it can back the machine up in the event of an exception The sequencer fetches the
276. ing the bit configures the pin as an input MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 103 PMPAR Port M Pin Assignment Register 0x8007 FC64 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PMPA PMPA PMPA PMPA PMPA PMPA 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 RESERVED RESET 0 0 5 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset setting depends on the value of the configuration word at reset The bits in this register control the function of the associated pins Setting a bit in this register to one configures the corresponding pin as a bus control signal clearing a bit configures the pin as an I O pin or as the DS signal the case of PMPA2 Table 5 51 Port M Pin Assignments PMPAR Bit Port M Signal Bus Control Signal PMPA2 DS CR BI PMPA4 PM4 BR 5 5 PMPA6 PM6 BG PMPA7 PM7 ARETRY 5 9 3 Ports A and B Ports A and B are 8 bit output ports Associated with each port is a data register and a pin assignment register data direction registers are not needed PORTA PORTB Port A B Data Registers 0x8007 FC88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 4 PAS PA6 PA7 PBO 1 2 4 PB5 PB6 PB7
277. ings indicate that an access or aborted fetch resulting from either a cache hit or a specu lative load that is subsequently discarded was made to an address on the internal I bus or L bus An instruction access AT1 1 with an ad 0101 L mem dress which is an indirect branch target is indicated as a write on the WR signal The I Mem cycle type is not supported in the MPC509 This is an internal visibility cycle It always has an address phase and includes a data phase for data accesses This cycle is self terminating E Mem external memory TX vt us 0110 hid and does not require and signals It indicates that an access lect 9 was made to an address on the external bus and that a cache hit or aborted fetch occurred An instruction access with an address that is an indirect branch target is indicated as a write on the WR signal This is an internal visibility cycle It always has an address phase and a data phase This cycle is self terminating and does not require AACK 0111 Internal register and signals It indicates that an access was made to a control regis ter or internal IMB2 address These accesses are always cache inhibit ed E Mem cache hit 1009 to CSBOOT region 1001 E Mem cache These are internal visibility cycles They always have an address phase hit to CS1 region and include a data phase for data accesses These cycles are self ter 1010 E Mem cache minating and do not require A
278. instructions from the instruction cache into the instruction pre fetch queue The BPU extracts branch instructions from the pre fetch queue and uses static branch prediction on unresolved conditional branches to allow the instruc tion unit to fetch instructions from a predicted target instruction stream while a conditional branch is evaluated The BPU folds out branch instructions for uncondi tional branches or conditional branches unaffected by instructions in the execution stage Instructions issued beyond a predicted branch do not complete execution until the branch is resolved preserving the programming model of sequential execution If branch prediction is incorrect the instruction unit flushes all predicted path instruc tions and instructions are issued from the correct path MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 3 INSTRUCTION MEMORY SYSTEM 32 INSTRUCTION ADDRESS GENERATOR STREET 32 BRANCH CONDITION EVALUATION INSTRUCTION 32 READ WRITE BUSES EXECUTION UNITS AND REGISTERS FILES Figure 3 2 Sequencer Data Path 3 4 Independent Execution Units The PowerPC architecture supports independent floating point integer load store and branch processing execution units making it possible to implement advanced fea tures such as look ahead operations For example since branch instructions do not depend on GPRs or FPRs branches can often
279. ion mfspr RO DPDR Transfer data from DPDR Read memory data from the shift in memory data to RO port Shift in instruction stwu RO D R1 Store data from RO to memory address R1 Write data to memory 8 7 Software Monitor Support When debug mode is disabled a software monitor debugger can make use of all of the processor s development support features With debug mode disabled all events result in regular exception handling i e the processor resumes execution in the MOTOROLA 8 42 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL appropriate exception handler The ECR and the DER only influence the assertion and negation of the freeze indication The internal freeze signal is connected to all relevant internal modules These modules can be programmed to stop all operations in response to the assertion of the freeze signal In order to enable a software monitor debugger to broadcast the fact that the debug software is now executing it is possible to assert and negate the internal freeze signal when debug mode is disabled The freeze signal can be asserted externally only when the processor enters debug mode The internal freeze signal is asserted whenever an enabled event occurs regardless of whether debug mode is enabled or disabled To enable an event to cause freeze assertion software needs to set the relevant bit in the DER To clear the freeze signal software needs to rea
280. ion Fetch Show Cycle Control 8 4 22 Progam Plow PNIS 4359 9 d c pe qc aai Bee d GR de RUP QU RD d o are eeu 8 4 8 1 3 1 Instruction Queue Status PIS 8 5 6 13 2 History Buffer Flush Status PNS cc cio wed Luck o Rhet dore edo Rok 8 6 8 1 3 3 Flow Tracking Status Pins in Debug Mode 8 6 8 1 3 4 Cycle Type Write Read and Address Type Pins 8 7 8 1 4 External Hardware During Program 8 7 B13 1 Back Itb cavccceiceensu gate EEEE das X ERE E 8 8 PUO RACs 8 8 8 1 4 3 Synchronizing the Trace Window to Internal CPU 8 8 8 1 4 4 Detecting the Trace Window Starting 8 9 8 1 4 5 Detecting the Assertion or Negation 8 10 8 1 4 6 Detecting the Trace Window Ending Address 8 10 Ce Commies noice ena hhh oe Pu awe Skee qe S 8 11 8 2 Watchpoint and Breakpoint Support 8 11 eme eet REA a md x qx poe x mde dox Roe xm 8 12 8 2 1 1 Restrictions on Watchpoint 8 13 8 2 1 2 Byte and Hali Word Work
281. ion occurs and the corresponding bit is set in the debug enable register DER The processor per forms normal exception processing i e saving the next instruction address and the current state of MSR in SRRO and SRR1 and modifying the contents of the MSR The processor then enters debug mode and fetches the next instruction from the develop ment port instead of from the vector address The exception cause register ECR shows which event caused entry into debug mode The freeze indication is encoded on the VFLS pins to show that the CPU is in debug mode MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 35 Debug mode may also be entered immediately following reset If the DSCK pin con tinues to be asserted following reset after debug mode is enabled the processor takes a breakpoint exception and enters debug mode directly after fetching but not executing the reset vector To avoid entering debug mode following reset the DSCK pin must be negated no later than seven clock cycles after RESETOUT is negated A timing diagram for entering debug mode following reset is shown in Figure 8 12 CLK OUT SRESET _ 0 1 DSCK ASSERTED PRIOR TO RESETOUT NEGATION ENABLES DEBUG MODE DEBUG MODE IS ENABLED IF DSCK IS ASSERTED IMMEDIATELY BEFORE RESETOUT NEGATES DSCK STAYS ASSERTED FOR AT LEAST EIGHT CLOCK CYCLES FOLLOWING RESETOUT NEGATION TO CAUSE ENTRY INTO DEBUG MODE INTERNAL BREAKP
282. ion of MSR EE and 3 23 3 16 Instruction Cache Control 3 23 3 17 Development Support Registers 3 24 3 18 Instruciion Set SDN E a 3 26 MPC509 Exception Rem 3 31 3 20 Exception Vector Offset Table 0 teenies 3 33 3 21 Instruction Latency and BIOCKAREG ce io detenta 3 35 4 1 Instruction Cache Programming 0 4 3 Lg CT e s 4 4 4 3 Address Register 4 5 44 ache Data Register RSA Y ne Eh aa s EGER Std 4 5 4 5 ICADR Bits Function for the Cache Read 4 8 4 6 ICDAT Layout During Tag FIEL ous RELEREEHE HR RERERU POHEEERERUREERRFINUEKEKFEHEH S ERES du 4 8 5 1 SIU Address Map oo carers nena 5 3 52 em 5 5 5 3 Bit Settings E 5 6 5 4 Internal Memory Array Block 5 10 MPC509 LIST OF TABLES MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 1998 Table Title Page Go EB SEA DSSCHBIDIB 5 1
283. ion of TEA causes the processor to enter the checkstop state enter debug mode or process a machine check excep tion Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details CAUTION TEA must not be asserted during a cycle in which ARETRY is asserted If the address phase corresponding to the current data phase is still outstanding AACK has not yet been asserted TEA terminates both the address and the data MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 28 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL phase That is the generates AACK and internally and generates an internal error signal for that cycle If AACK has already been asserted externally the EBI gen erates TA but not AACK internally and generates an internal error signal for that cycle All transfer errors that occur during an access to a 16 bit port terminate the cycle cur rently in progress If an error occurs during any part of a word access to a 16 bit port the current access is terminated Subsequent bus cycles of the small port access will continue but TEA will be asserted internally with each beat All illegal accesses to internal registers are terminated with a data error causing the bus monitor to assert the internal TEA signal Accesses to unimplemented internal memory locations and privilege violations user access to supervisor register or write to read only location or a write to register which is locked also cause the bus monitor to assert the internal TEA sign
284. ion refer to 8 2 1 3 Generating Six Com pare Types Using the AND OR logic structures in range and out of range detection on address and on data are supported Using the counters it is possible to program a breakpoint to be generated after an event is detected a predefined number of times MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 12 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The L data comparators can operate on integer data floating point single precision data and the integer value stored using the stfiwx instruction Integer comparisons can be performed on bytes half words and words The operands can be treated as signed or unsigned values The comparators generate match events The l bus match events enter the I bus AND OR logic where the watchpoints and breakpoint are generated When asserted the watchpoints may generate the breakpoint Two of them may decrement one of the counters When a counter that is counting one of the I bus watchpoints expires the l bus breakpoint is asserted The watchpoints and the L bus match events address and data enter the L bus AND OR logic where the L bus watchpoints and breakpoint are generated When asserted the L bus watchpoints may generate the L bus breakpoint or they may dec rement one of the counters When a counter that is counting one of the L bus watchpoints expires the L bus breakpoint is asserted L bus watchpoints can be qualified by I bus watchpoints If qu
285. ion registers to control the assertion of the CE WE and OE signals MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 57 For the chip select module to pipeline accesses to two different regions the first region must be pipelineable otherwise the chip select unit waits for the first access to com plete TA asserted before beginning the second access Figure 5 16 uses two synchronous devices ITYPE 2 to illustrate this pipelining case In this example the first access is to a four wait state region and the second access is to a region with zero wait states For a second region with wait states the pipelining is similar except the data of the second region takes more time to be avail able on the bus if the second region cannot hold off its internal data The example is intended to show when the CE or address phase and the data phase of the second access can be given to the region It assumes the device s in the first region is pipe lineable and both accesses are initiated by the same bus master ADDR A1 READ A2 READ 1ST ADDRESS LATCHED 2ND CE ASSERTS Figure 5 16 Pipelined Accesses to Two Different Regions 1 If both regions are under chip select control the delays of both regions are known to the chip select logic and the interface type of the first region supports pipelining then
286. ions return from subroutine return from interrupt and indexed branches and jumps Since full bus visibility reduces available bus bandwidth and processor performance certain development support functions have been included in the MCU These func tions include the following Controls to limit which internal bus cycles are reflected on the external bus show cycles CPU status signals to allow instruction execution tracking with minimal visibility of the instructions being fetched Watchpoint comparators that can generate breakpoints or signal an external bus analyzer A serial development port for general emulation control 8 1 Program Flow Tracking The exact program flow is visible on the external bus only when the processor is pro grammed to show all fetch cycles on the external bus This mode is selected by programming the ISCTL instruction fetch show cycle control field in the 1 support control register ICTRL as shown in Table 8 2 In this mode the processor is fetch MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 1 serialized and all internal fetch cycles appear on the external bus Processor perfor mance is therefore much lower than when working in regular mode The mechanism described below allows tracking of the program instructions flow with almost no performance degradation The information provided externally may be cap tured and compressed and then parsed by a post processing prog
287. ior to initialization DEC Decrementer Register SPR 22 0 31 Decrementing Counter RESET UNCHANGED 3 9 6 Machine Status Save Restore Register 0 SRRO The machine status save restore register 0 SRRO is a 32 bit register that identifies where instruction execution should resume when an rfi instruction is executed follow ing an exception It also holds the effective address of the instruction that follows the system call sc instruction SRRO Machine Status Save Restore Register 0 SPR 26 0 31 SRRO RESET UNDEFINED When an exception occurs SRRO is set to point to an instruction such that all prior instructions have completed execution and no subsequent instruction has begun exe cution The instruction addressed by SRRO may not have completed execution depending on the exception type SRRO addresses either the instruction causing the MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 21 exception or the immediately following instruction The instruction addressed can be determined from the exception type and status bits 3 9 7 Machine Status Save Restore Register 1 SRR1 SRR1 is a 32 bit register used to save machine status on exceptions and to restore machine status when an rfi instruction is executed SRR1 Machine Status Save Restore Register 1 SPR 27 0 81 SRR1 RESET UNDEFINED In general when an exception occurs SRR1 0 15 are loa
288. ip RAM and executed This is not a high performance instruction fetching mechanism Accesses from the I bus to the L bus are at least three clocks and not burstable Cross bus accesses occur inside the SIU consuming SIU resources during the access Internal SIU registers are not available during cross bus accesses Internal MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 10 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL to external cycles are not pipelined with cross bus accesses nor are two consecutive cross bus accesses pipelined Clearing the L bus to 1 cross bus access LIX bit in the MEMMAP register dis ables data accesses to l bus memory This allows load store data stored in a flash memory on the to be moved off chip for development purposes When this bit is cleared L bus to I bus transactions are run externally 5 3 5 Response to Freeze Assertion The RCPU asserts the freeze signal to the rest of the MCU when one of the following conditions occurs Debug mode is entered or A software debug monitor program is entered as the result of an exception when the associated bit in the debug enable register DER SPR149 is set The following paragraphs explain how the assertion of the freeze signal affects the SIU See SECTION 8 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT for additional details on this signal 5 3 5 1 Effects of Freeze and Debug Mode on the Bus Monitor When the freeze signal is asserted and debug mode is disabled the bus monitor is unaff
289. is generated 8 8 2 Comparator A D Value Registers CMPA CMPD CMPA CMPD Comparator A D Value Register SPR 144 SPR 147 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CMPAD RESET UNDEFINED 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CMPAD RESERVED RESET UNDEFINED Table 8 27 CMPA CMPD Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description 0 29 CMPAD Address bits to be compared 30 31 Reserved The reset state of these registers is undefined 8 8 3 Comparator E F Value Registers CMPE CMPF Comparator E F Value Registers SPR 152 153 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CMPEF RESET UNDEFINED Table 8 28 CMPE CMPF Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description 0 31 CMPV Address bits to be compared MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 46 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The reset state of these registers is undefined 8 8 4 Comparator G H Value Registers CMPG CMPH CMPG CMPH Comparator G H Value Registers SPR 154 155 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CMPGH RESET UNDEFINED Table 8 29 CMPG CMPH Bit Settings Bits Mnemonic Description 0 31 CMPGH Data bits to be compared The reset state of these registers is undefined 8 8 5 I Bus Support Control Register
290. ism is derived from taps off a divider chain which is clocked by the system clock The time out period should be set for the maximum total cycle time including all beats of a burst i e until TA is asserted for the final beat of a burst cycle not for just the address phase or data phase of the cycle 5 7 4 2 Bus Monitor Lock The bus monitor lock BMLK bit in the BMCR is used to prevent inadvertent writes to the BMCR Once BMLK is set subsequent writes to the BMCR have no effect and result in a data error on the internal bus Writing a zero to BMLK after it has been set has no effect A write to the BMCR before the lock bit is set can configure protected bits and set the BMLK in the same access The BMLK bit is cleared by reset It can also be cleared by software while the internal FREEZE signal is asserted Software can write BMLK to zero any number of times before writing it to one 5 7 4 3 Bus Monitor Enable The bus monitor enable BME bit in the BMCR enables or disables the operation of the bus monitor during internal to external bus cycles Note that the bus monitor is always enabled while freeze is asserted and debug mode is enabled or when debug mode is enabled and the debug non maskable breakpoint is asserted even if BME is cleared 5 7 4 4 Bus Monitor Control Register A diagram and description of the BMCR are provided below BMCR Bus Monitor Control Register 0x8007 FC48 0 1 2 3
291. it specifies the location of the exception vector table 25 IP 0 Exception vector table starts at the physical address 0x0000 0000 1 Exception vector table starts at the physical address OxFFFO 0000 26 29 Reserved Recoverable exception for machine check and non maskable breakpoint exceptions 30 RI 0 Machine state is not recoverable 1 Machine state is recoverable Little endian mode 31 LE 0 Processor operates in big endian mode during normal processing 1 Processor operates in little endian mode during normal processing The floating point exception mode bits are interpreted as shown in Table 3 11 Table 3 11 Floating Point Exception Mode Bits FE 0 1 Mode Ignore exceptions mode Floating point exceptions do not cause the 09 floating point assist error handler to be invoked Floating point precise mode The system floating point assist error 01 10 11 handler is invoked precisely at the instruction that caused the enabled exception 3 9 2 DAE Source Instruction Service Register DSISR The 32 bit DSISR identifies the cause of data access and alignment exceptions MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 19 DSISR DAE Source Instruction Service Register SPR 18 9 31 DSISR RESET UNCHANGED 3 9 3 Data Address Register DAR After an alignment exception the DAR is set to the effective address of a load or store element
292. itical word first burst access e Stream hit allows fetch from the burst buffer and of the word currently on the l bus e Efficiently utilizes the pipeline of the l bus by initiating a new burst cycle if miss is detected while delivering the tail of the previous missed line to the instruction unit Cache control Supports PowerPC invalidate instruction Supports load and lock cache line granularity Supports cache inhibit As a cache mode of operation cache disable On memory regions supported by the chip select logic Miss latency is reduced by Sending address to the cache and to the I bus simultaneously Aborting on cache hit before cycle is mapped externally Minimum operational power consumption Supports reads of tags including all attributes and data arrays for debugging MPC509 INSTRUCTION CACHE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 4 1 purposes 4 2 Instruction Cache Organization Figure 4 1 illustrates the organization 0 20 21 27 28 29 INSTRUCTION POINTER 2 21 WORD SELECT WAYO WAY1 Tego T Wow wawa T WoW wa TAG Wo WiW2 wa L R U A R R mjm p ze su 12 TAG126 WO WTIW2 W3 7 TAGI26 WO WI W2 w3 12 127 WO WiWz Wa 21 128 COMP COMP 0 BIDIREC
293. k exception caused by an instruction storage error is asserted 6 EXTI External interrupt bit Set when the external interrupt is asserted 7 ALE Alignment exception bit Set when the alignment exception is asserted 8 PRE Program exception bit Set when the program exception is asserted 9 FPUVE Floating point unavailable exception bit Set when the program exception is asserted 10 DECE Decrementer exception bit Set when the decrementer exception is asserted 11 12 Reserved 13 SYSE System call exception bit Set when the system call exception is asserted 14 TR Trace exception bit Set when in single step mode or when in branch trace mode 15 FPASE Floating point assist exception bit Set when the floating point assist exception is asserted 16 Reserved 17 SEE Software emulation exception Set when the software emulation exception is asserted 18 27 Reserved 28 LBRK L bus breakpoint exception bit Set when an L bus breakpoint is asserted 29 IBRK I bus breakpoint exception bit Set when an l bus breakpoint is asserted External breakpoint exception bit Set when an external breakpoint is asserted by an on chip 30 EBRK IMB or L bus module or by an external device or development system through the development port 31 DPI Development port interrupt bit Set by the development port as a result of a debug station non maskable request or when debug mode is entered immediately out of reset MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 54 Rev
294. l bus memory An instruction access AT1 1 with an 0100 address that is the target of an indirect change of flow is indicated as a logic level zero on the WR output Access to internal L bus memory An instruction access AT1 1 with an 0101 address that is the target of an indirect change of flow is indicated as a logic level zero on the WR output Cache hit on external memory address not controlled by chip selects An 0110 instruction access AT1 1 with an address that is the target of an indirect change of flow is indicated as a logic level zero on the WR output 0111 Access to an internal register Cache hit on external memory address controlled by CSBOOT Cache hit on external memory address controlled by CS1 1 hit on external memory address controlled by 52 1010 Cache hit on external memory address controlled by CS3 1011 Cache hit on external memory address controlled by CS4 1100 Cache hit on external memory address controlled by CS5 1101 An instruction access AT1 1 with an address that is the target of an indirect change of flow is indicated as a logic level zero on the WR output 1110 Reserved 1111 Notice in Table 8 6 that during an instruction fetch AT1 1 to internal memory or to external memory resulting in a cache hit a logic level of zero on the WR pin indicates that the cycle is the result of an indirect change of flow The indirect change of flow attribute i
295. l modules At power on time the address of the boot device may match that of an internal module because a system can have on chip EPROM for instructions If this occurs the internal access overrides the external access That is the internal access provides the boot instructions and the chip select unit does not run an external cycle The reset value of the BA field in the CSBOOT base address register depends on the value of the exception prefix IP bit in the machine state register Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for a description of the machine state register 5 5 6 Multi Level Protection The chip select unit allows protection for an address space within another address space Figure 5 13 illustrates this concept MAIN BLOCK HIGH ADDRESS SUB BLOCK HIGH ADDRESS MAIN BLOCK HAS ITS OWN PROTECTION SUP BLOCK SUB BLOCK LOW ADDRESS MAIN BLOCK LOW ADDRESS SUB BLOCK HAS ITS OWN PROTECTION AND OVERRIDES THE MAIN BLOCK S PROTECTION Figure 5 13 Multi Level Protection Figure 5 13 shows a sub block contained within a main block The main block and the sub block can have different protection mechanisms programmed For example the user can have a separate data space and instruction space within a single chip select region The block size of the sub block should be less than the block size of the main block The protection of the smaller block overrides the protection of the main block 5 5 6 1
296. lator for an MCU The SIU contains support for external port replacement logic which can be used to faithfully replicate on chip ports externally This PRU mode allows system development of a single chip application in expanded mode Access including access time to the port replacement logic can be made transparent to the application software In PRU mode all data data direction and pin assignment registers for ports A B J K and L are mapped externally The SIU does not respond to these accesses allow ing external logic such as a PRU to respond PRU mode is invoked by pulling DATA25 high during reset Other pins should be con figured as bus control pins MOTOROLA 5 108 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL SECTION 6 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT The peripheral control unit PCU consists of the following submodules Software watchdog provides system protection Interrupt controller controls the interrupts that external peripherals and internal modules send to the CPU Port provides for digital on pins that are not being used as interrupt in puts Test submodule allows factory testing of the MCU L bus IMB2 interface LIMB provides an interface between the load store bus and the second generation intermodule bus IMB2 The IMB2 connects on chip peripherals to the processor via the LIMB 6 1 PCU Block Diagram Figure 6 1 shows a block diagram of the
297. le Negated high read cycle Used to add an external capacitor to the filter circuit of the phase locked Clocks Input XFCP loop 2 5 1 Bus Arbitration and Reservation Support Signals The bus arbitration signals request the bus recognize when the request is granted and indicate to other devices when mastership is granted There are no separate arbi tration phases for the address and data buses For a detailed description of how these signals interact see 5 4 5 1 Arbitration Phase The cancel reservation CR signal is used to indicate that the processor should not perform any stwcx cycle to external memory This signal is sampled at the same time the MCU samples the arbitration pins for a qualified bus grant 2 5 1 1 Bus Request BR Output only Module EBI State Meaning Asserted Indicates the potential bus master is request ing the bus Each master has its own bus request signal The SIU asserts BR to request bus mastership if its bus MOTOROLA SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 2 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Timing Comments 2 5 1 2 Bus Grant BG Input only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MPC509 USER S MANUAL grant BG pin is not already asserted and the bus busy BB has not been negated by the current bus master The SIU assumes mastership of the external bus only after receiving a qualified bus grant This occurs when the bus arbiter asserts BG to the SIU and the BB pin has
298. lways generates a level 6 interrupt request IRQ4 generates a level 8 interrupt request IRQ5 generates a level 10 interrupt request and IRQ6 always generates a level 12 interrupt request 6 5 2 2 Periodic Interrupt Timer Interrupts The periodic interrupt timer PIT is a 16 bit counter that generates an interrupt when ever it counts down to zero provided PIT interrupts are enabled The PITIRQL PIT interrupt request level field in the PITQIL register assigns the interrupt request level for PIT interrupts Refer to 5 7 3 Periodic Interrupt Timer PIT for details of PIT operation 6 5 2 3 Interrupt Request Multiplexing The IMB2 has ten lines for interrupt support eight interrupt request lines IRQ 0 7 from the interrupting modules and two multiplexer control inputs ILBS 0 1 This scheme enables the peripheral control unit to transfer up to 32 levels of interrupt requests to the interrupt controller When the four to one multiplexing scheme is used the IMB2 IRQ lines update eight of the 32 bits of the IRQPEND register during each clock cycle A maximum latency of four clock cycles and an average latency of two clock cycles result before the interrupt request can reach the interrupt controller Figure 6 3 illustrates the timing for the four to one multiplexing scheme MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 7 IMB2 CLOCK IMB2 IRQ
299. n assignment register PQPAR contains the port Q pin assignment fields PQPA 0 6 and the port Q edge fields 0 6 MPC509 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 6 11 PQPAR Port Pin Assignment Register 0x8007 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PQPAO PQEDGEO PQPA1 PQEDGE1 PQPA2 PQEDGE2 PQEDGE3 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 PQPA4 PQEDGE4 PQPAS PQEDGE5 PQPA6 PQEDGE6 PQPA7 PQEDGE7 6 6 2 1 Port Q Pin Assignment Fields The port Q pin assignment fields PQPA 0 6 select the basic function of each port Q pin as shown in Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Port Q Pin Assignments PQPA Value Pin Function PORTQ Port Q Data Field Interrupt Request Source A read returns the state of the pin A write has no effect 0000 General Purpose Input None A read returns the value in the 0b01 General Purpose Output latch A write drives the value in the None latch onto the pin A read returns the state of the pin From pin if PQEDG field is set to 0b10 IRQ to CPU write has no effect Level otherwise from port Q edge detect logic From pin if PQEDG field is set to 0b11 to Interrupt Controller A read state tlie Level otherwise from port Q A write has no effect edge detect logic 6
300. n on the I bus with four word burst transfer read request A cache line is then selected to receive the data that will be coming from the bus The selection algorithm gives first priority to invalid lines If neither of the two candidate lines in the selected set are invalid then the least recently used line is selected for replacement Locked lines are never replaced MPC509 INSTRUCTION CACHE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 4 5 The transfer begins with the word requested by the instruction unit critical word first followed by any remaining words of the line then by any remaining words at the begin ning of the line wrap around As the missed instruction is received from the bus it is immediately delivered to the instruction unit and also written to the burst buffer As subsequent instructions are received from the bus they are also written into the burst buffer and if needed delivered to the instruction unit stream hit either directly from the bus or from the burst buffer When the entire line resides in the burst buffer it is written to the cache array if the cache array is not busy with an instruction unit request If a bus error is encountered on the access to the requested instruction a machine check interrupt is taken If a bus error occurs on any access to other words in the line the burst buffer is marked invalid and the line is not written to the array If no bus error is encountered the burst buffer is marked vali
301. n or negative 3 12 overflow exception 3 12 enable 3 13 registers 3 10 result class descriptor 3 12 result flags 3 12 rounding control 3 13 status and control register 3 11 underflow exception 3 12 unit 3 5 3 6 unordered or NaN 3 12 zero divide exception 3 12 enable 3 13 FP bit 3 19 FPASE 8 54 FPASEE 8 56 FPCC bit 3 12 FPRF field 3 12 FPRs 3 10 FPSCR 3 11 FPU 3 5 3 6 FPUVE 8 54 FPUVEE 8 55 FR 3 12 Freeze 8 37 and time base decrementer 5 81 Frequency control 5 74 FU bit 3 12 FX bit 3 12 G General purpose I O 5 101 purpose registers GPRs 3 10 SPRs 3 22 History buffer flush status pins 8 6 Hold off data 5 53 general purpose 5 101 IBRK 8 54 bus 5 7 memory enable 5 6 support 8 15 control register 8 47 watchpoint programming 8 48 See Instruction cache ICADR 3 23 4 4 4 8 icbi 4 6 ICCST 3 23 4 4 ICDAT 3 23 4 8 ICSDAT 4 5 ICTRL 8 47 MOTOROLA Index 4 IDCODE 9 7 IEEE 1149 1 1990 standard See JTAG IEN 5 6 IEN bit 4 4 Ignore first match 8 49 IIFM 8 49 IMEMBASE 5 6 5 10 IMUL IDIV 3 5 Instruction fetch show cycle control 8 1 show cycles 8 4 pipeline 3 33 queue status pins 8 5 sequencer 3 3 set summary 3 26 timing 3 33 Instruction cache 4 1 address register 3 23 4 4 4 8 block invalidate 4 6 command field 4 4 commands 4 6 control and status register 3 23 4 4 data port 3 23 data register 4 5 4 8 disable 4 8 enable 4 8 status bit 4 4 error types 4 4 hit 4 5
302. n signals of the masters feed into a central arbiter for arbitration Before the SIU can start an external cycle it must have a qualified bus grant A quali fied bus grant occurs when the external arbiter asserts BG bus grant and the previous bus master negates BB the bidirectional bus busy signal This means that no other master is currently running a cycle on the external bus If the SIU is ready to start an external cycle and it does not have a qualified bus grant then it asserts BR bus request until it receives the qualified bus grant Once the SIU receives a qualified bus grant it asserts BB and begins the address phase of the cycle A word aligned access to a 16 bit port results in two bus cycles To preserve word coherency the SIU does not release the bus between these two cycles The external arbiter can park the bus by keeping BG asserted Single master systems should tie this signal low permanently or configure the pin as a port pin which has the same effect Each potential master has its own BG input signal 5 4 5 2 Address Phase Once the SIU has a qualified bus grant it asserts BB and starts an address phase The SIU drives a new address at the start of the address phase and maintains it on the pins throughout the address phase The signals shown in Table 5 8 are driven at the start of the address phase Table 5 8 Signals Driven at Start of Address Phase Mnemonic Signal Name Type
303. nals See pin assignment register 5 104 Port Q discrete I O signals See edge detect status 6 11 edge detect data register 6 11 edge fields 6 11 6 12 pin assignment register 6 10 6 11 Ports A and B 5 104 data registers 5 104 discrete output signals See PA PB pin assignment register 5 105 Ports J K and L 5 106 data direction registers 5 106 data registers 5 106 discrete I O signals See PJ PK PL pin assignment registers 5 107 Power down wakeup See PDWU Power on reset 5 101 PQ 2 22 6 10 6 11 PQE 6 11 PQEDGDAT 6 11 PQEDGE 6 11 6 12 PQPA 6 12 PQPAR 6 10 6 11 PR bit 3 7 3 18 PRE 8 54 Precise exceptions 3 32 PREE 8 55 Privilege level 3 7 3 18 Processor version register 3 22 Program flow tracking 8 1 INDEX MPC509 User s Manual status pins 8 4 trace back 8 8 in debug mode 8 6 window 8 8 PRU mode 5 102 5 108 PS 5 44 5 50 5 86 5 89 5 90 PTE 5 86 5 89 5 90 PVR 3 22 Q Qualified bus grant 5 20 R RO 7 3 RE bit 3 19 3 23 Read cycle 5 15 Read only SRAM 7 3 Ready bit development port 8 34 Recoverable exception 3 19 3 23 Reduced frequency divider 5 72 5 74 5 77 5 84 lock bit 5 85 REGION 5 44 5 51 Register lock 5 5 Registers 3 23 CMPA CMPD 8 46 8 46 CMPG CMPH 8 47 COUNTA 8 52 COUNTB 8 53 DER 8 55 development port 8 24 development support 8 43 development support shift register 8 25 ECR 8 53 ICTRL 8 47 LCTRL1 8 49 LCTRL2 8 50 supervisor level
304. nd fetched by the CPU for execution Notice in this example that the development port throws away the first two input transmissions following the one causing the sequencing error Table 8 16 Sequencing Error Activity Input to Output from transmissions Trans Development Port Development Port Port Action CPU Action CPU data Depends on Cause bus error set Fetch instruction take 1 Control bit 1 previous sequence error latch exception because of bus error X Thrown away Sequencing error Set exception latch clear Signal exception to port 2 sequencing error latch begin new fetch from port 3 X Thrown away CPU exception Clear exception latch Continue to wait for instruction from port 4 CPU instruction Null Send instruction to CPU at Fetch instruction from port end of transmission 8 3 8 3 CPU Exception Output The CPU exception encoding is used to indicate that the CPU encountered an excep tion during the execution of the previous instruction in debug mode Exceptions may occur as the result of instruction execution such as unimplemented opcode or arith metic error because of a memory access fault or from an external interrupt The exception is recognized only if the associated bit in the DER is set When an exception occurs the development port ignores the data being shifted in while the CPU excep DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 8 33 MPC509 USER
305. nfiguration word is latched the default word continues to be driven on the internal buses This scheme allows users of the internal default mode to limit their required external configuration hardware to two pull down resistors DSDI and DSCK It also allows many options to be configured with a single three state octal buffer 5 8 3 1 Data Bus Configuration Mode If data bus configuration mode is selected DSDI asserted then the MCU is config ured according to the values latched from the data bus pins NOTE BG must be asserted in order for the reset configuration word latch to access the data bus The external data bus is divided into four groups DSDI DATA 0 5 DATA 6 13 DATA 14 21 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 98 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL DATA 22 31 This grouping allows the user to use three state octal buffers to only drive valid data on the pins for those reset configuration options that the user would want to change The state of the last pin in each group pins 5 13 and 21 determines whether the next set of configuration options use the internal default values or are configured from the external data bus The user is required to drive to a valid level all the pins in any of the groups that are to be changed The functions selected by these pins are shown in Table 5 49 5 8 3 2 Internal Default Mode If DSDI is held low during reset internal default mode is selected The internal default mode
306. nfigured as chip selects as address pins 1 Vector Table Location IP Vector Table Vector Table 0 1 Bit OxFFFO 0000 0x0000 0000 2 Burst Type Indication Type 2 LAST Timing Type 1 BDIP Timing 0 0 ITYPE 001 a peel reditu ME Time to Hi Z 2 Clk 4 CSBOOT Port Size 32 Bit 16 Bit 1 0 5 Reset Configuration Latch configuration from Latch configuration from internal 0 0 Source For DATA 6 13 external pins defaults TA Delay Encoding Number of Wait States 000 0 001 1 __ 010 2 6 8 TADelay For CSBOOT 011 3 010 111 100 4 101 5 110 6 111 7 I Mem Block Placement IMEMBASE Start Addr 0x0000 0000 00 End Addr 0x000F FFFF 9 10 IMEMBASE 0 1 01 Start Addr OxFFFO 0000 01 10 10 End Addr OXFFFF FFFF 11 Note MPC509 does not contain LMEMBASE 0 1 LMEMBASE L Mem SRAM Block Place 00 ment 1142 01 Start address 0x0000 0000 T 11 10 End address 0x000F FFFF 11 Start address OxFFFO 0000 End address OxFFFF FFFF 13 Reset configuration Latch configuration from Latch configuration from internal 0 0 source for DATA 14 21 external pins defaults 14 CT 0 3 AT 0 1 TS CT 0 3 AT 0 1 TS PJ 1 7 1 1 15 WR BDIP WR BDIP PK 0 1 1 1 PLLL DSDO VF 0 2 DSDO Pipe Tracking 16 vrFLS 0 1 WP 1 5 Watchpoints PK 2 7 PL 2 7 BURST AACK 17 BE O 3 Handshake Pins PORTI 0 7 1 1 CR BI BR BB BG 18 ARETRY Bus Arbitration Pins PM 2 7 1 1 19 27777 Refer to Table 5 47 Ref
307. ng point underflow exception enable This bit should not be used to determine whether denormalization should be performed on floating point stores 27 ZE Floating point zero divide exception enable 28 XE Floating point inexact exception enable 29 NI Non IEEE mode bit Floating point rounding control 00 Round to nearest 30 31 RN 01 Round toward zero 10 Round toward infinity 11 Round toward infinity Table 3 4 illustrates the floating point result flags that correspond to FPSCR 15 19 Table 3 4 Floating Point Result Flags in FPSCR Result Flags Result Value Class Bits 15 19 lt gt 10001 Quiet NaN 01001 Infinity 01000 Normalized number 11000 Denormalized number 10010 Zero 00010 Zero 10100 Denormalized number 00100 Normalized number 00101 Infinity 3 7 4 Condition Register CR The condition register CR is a 32 bit register that reflects the result of certain opera tions and provides a mechanism for testing and branching The bits in the CR are grouped into eight 4 bit fields CRO to MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 13 CR Condition Register 0 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 CRO CR1 CR2 CRS3 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 RESET UNCHANGED The CR fields can be set in the following ways e Specified fields of the CR can be set by a move i
308. ng reset Table 5 3 MEMMAP Bit Settings Bit s Name Description L bus memory enable 0 L bus memory disabled 0 LEN 1 L bus memory enabled Reset state depends on the value of the data bus configuration word Reserved Base address of the L bus memory block 00 Starting address is 0x0000 0000 01 Ending address is EFFF 10 Starting address is OxFFFO 0000 11 Ending address is OXFFFF EFFF Reset value depends on the data bus configuration word 8 9 LMEMBASE 10 15 Reserved 16 IEN 0 l bus memory disabled 1 1 memory enabled I bus memory enable This bit has no effect on the MPC509 which has I bus memory L bus to I bus cross bus access enable 0 Disable data accesses to 1 memory 1 Enable data accesses to I bus memory reset value 17 LIX 18 23 Reserved Base address of the I bus memory block 00 Starting address is 0x0000 0000 01 Ending address is FFFC 10 Starting address is OxFFFO 0000 11 Ending address is OxFFFF FFFC Reset state depends on the data bus configuration word 24 25 IMEMBASE 26 31 Reserved SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 6 MPC509 USER S MANUAL 5 3 3 Internal Module Select Logic The SIU has a unified memory map for the L bus and the I bus The l bus has two masters the RCPU and the SIU The SIU is designed so that one or more memory modules
309. nificance indicating that the value is less than greater than or equal to zero 16 Floating point less than or negative FL lt 17 Floating point greater than or positive FG or gt 18 Floating point equal or zero FE or 19 Floating point unordered or NaN FU or 20 Reserved MOTOROLA 3 12 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 3 3 FPSCR Bit Settings Continued Bit s Name Description Floating point invalid operation exception for software request This bit can be altered only by the mcr s mtfsfi mtfsf mtfsbO or mtfsb1 instructions The purpose of VXSOFT is to allow soft 21 VXSOFT ware to cause an invalid operation condition for a condition that is not necessarily associated with the execution of a floating point instruction For example it might be set by a program that com putes a square root if the source operand is negative This is a sticky bit Floating point invalid operation exception for invalid square root This is a sticky bit This guar 22 VXSQRT antees that software can simulate fsqrt and frsqrte to provide a consistent interface to handle exceptions caused by square root operations 23 VXOVI Floating point invalid operation exception for invalid integer convert This is a sticky bit 24 VE Floating point invalid operation exception enable 25 OE Floating point overflow exception enable 26 UE Floati
310. ns that begin before ready is asserted on DSDI are subject to the following limitations and problems First if the previous transmission results in a sequence error or the CPU reports an exception that status may not be reported until two transmissions after the transmis sion that caused the error When the ready bit is used the status is reported in the following transmission This is because an error condition which occurs after the start of a transmission cannot be reported until the next transmission Second if a transmitted instruction causes the CPU to write to the DPDR and the transmission that follows does not wait for the assertion of ready the CPU data may not be latched into the development port shift register and the valid data status is not output Despite this no error is indicated in the status outputs To ensure that the CPU has had enough time to write to the DPDR there must be at least four CLKOUT cycles between the time the last bit of the instruction move to SPR is clocked into the port and the time the start bit for the next transmission is clocked into the port 8 4 Debug Mode Functions In debug mode the CPU fetches all instructions from the development port In addi tion data can be read from and written to the development port This allows memory and registers to be read and modified by an external development tool emulator con nected to the development port MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 34 Rev
311. nstruction mtcrf to the CR from a GPR Specified fields of the CR can be moved from one CRx field to another with the merf instruction A specified field of the CR can be set by a move instruction mcrfs to the CR from the FPSCR A specified field of the CR can be set by a move instruction mcrxr to the CR from the XER Condition register logical instructions can be used to perform logical operations on specified bits in the condition register CRO can be the implicit result of an integer operation CR1 can be the implicit result of a floating point operation A specified CR field can be the explicit result of either an integer or floating point compare instruction Instructions are provided to test individual CR bits 3 7 4 1 Condition Register CRO Field Definition In most integer instructions when the CR is set to reflect the result of the operation that is when Rc 1 and for addic andi and andis the first three bits of CRO are set by an algebraic comparison of the result to zero the fourth bit of CRO is copied from XER SO For integer instructions CR 0 3 are set to reflect the result as a signed quantity The result as an unsigned quantity or a bit string can be deduced from the EQ bit The CRO bits are interpreted as shown in Table 3 5 If any portion of the result the 32 bit value placed into the destination register is undefined the value placed in the first three bits of CRO is undefined T
312. nstruction type information 001 Sequential More instruction type information 010 Branch direct or indirect not taken More instruction type information VSYNC was asserted negated and therefore the More instruction type information 011 next instruction will be marked with the indirect change of flow attribute Exception taken the target will be marked with the Queue flush information 190 program trace cycle attribute Branch indirect taken rfi mtmsr isync and in some Queue flush information 101 cases mtspr to CMPA F ICTRL ECR or DER the target will be marked with the indirect change of flow attribute 110 Branch direct taken Queue flush information 111 Branch direct or indirect not taken Queue flush information NOTES 1 Unless next clock VF 111 See below 2 The sequential instructions listed here affect the machine in a manner similar to indirect branch instructions Refer to 8 1 1 2 Sequential Instructions with the Indirect Change of Flow Attribute Table 8 4 shows VF 0 2 encodings for instruction queue flush information MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 5 Table 8 4 VF Pins Queue Flush Encodings VF 0 2 Queue Flush Information 000 0 instructions flushed from instruction queue 001 1 instruction flushed from instruction queue 010 2 instructions flushed from instruction queue 011 3 instructions flushed
313. nt data in the same order as addresses Programmability for Latching and non latching device types Burstable and non burstable device types Programmable address range and block size Programmable burst features Interruptible burst on any burstable device Pipelineable with other devices during burst cycle Supports two different burst protocols Supports pipelineable accesses Up to two concurrent accesses can be outstanding to two different regions one access to each region For two consecutive accesses to the same region overlaps the address phase of the second access with the data phase of the first access Allows multi level protection within a region The CSBOOT region can have up to two sub levels of protection Supports both 16 bit and 32 bit port sizes 5 5 2 Chip Select Block Diagram Figure 5 12 shows the functional block diagram of the chip select module MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 35 ADDRESS DECODER TIMING BASE ADDRESS REGISTER OPTION REGISTER CONTROL UNIT ADDRESS DECODER BASE ADDRESS REGISTER OPTION REGISTER CONTROL UNIT ADDRESS DECODER BASE ADDRESS REGISTER Figure 5 12 Chip Select Functional Block Diagram 5 5 3 Chip Select Pins OPTION REGISTER CONTROL UNIT The pin configuration PCON field in each chip select option register config
314. ntrol Register SCCR The SCCR controls the operation of the PLL It is powered by VDDKAP1 The SCCR is not affected by reset conditions that do not cause clock reset Clock reset caused by loss of oscillator loss of lock or external reset causes the register to be reset as indicated in the diagram SCCR System Clock Control Register 0x8007 FC50 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 12 18 14 15 RESERVED LPMM 0 DCE E 0 MF RESERVED CLOCK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED LPM RESERVED RFD CLOCK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Table 5 38 SCCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 2 Reserved Low power mode mask 3 LPMM 0 1 1 1 pins cannot be used to wake up from LPM 1 IRQ 0 1 pins can be used to wake up from LPM 4 Reserved Decrementer clock enable 5 DCE 0 Clock to decrementer is disabled 1 Clock to decrementer is enabled Loss of lock reset enable 6 LOLRE 0 Loss of lock does not cause reset 1 Loss of lock causes reset Loss of oscillator reset enable 7 LOORE 0 Loss of oscillator does not cause reset 1 2 Loss of oscillator causes reset 8 Reserved Multiplication factor In normal mode the output of the VCO is divided down to generate the feed back signal to the phase comparator The MF field controls the value of the divider in the PLL
315. o Single fsub fsub frD frA frB Floating Subtract Double Precision fsubs fsubs frD frA frB Floating Subtract Single icbi rA rB Instruction Cache Block Invalidate isync Instruction Synchronize 167 rD d rA Load Byte and Zero Ibzu rD d rA Load Byte and Zero with Update Ibzux rD rA rB Load Byte and Zero with Update Indexed Ibzx rD rA rB Load Byte and Zero Indexed Ifd frD d rA Load Floating Point Double Ifdu frD d rA Load Floating Point Double with Update Ifdux frD rA rB Load Floating Point Double with Update Indexed Ifdx frD rA rB Load Floating Point Double Indexed Ifs frD d rA Load Floating Point Single MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 27 Table 3 18 Instruction Set Summary Continued Mnemonic Operand Syntax Name Ifsu frD d rA Load Floating Point Single with Update Ifsux frD rA rB Load Floating Point Single with Update Indexed lfsx frD rA rB Load Floating Point Single Indexed rD d rA Load Half Word Algebraic rD d rA Load Half Word Algebraic with Update Ihaux rD rA rB Load Half Word Algebraic with Update Indexed rD rA rB Load Half Word Algebraic Indexed Ihbrx rD rA rB Load Half Word Byte Reverse Indexed Ihz rD d rA Load Half Word and Zero Ihzu rD d rA Load Half Word and Zero with Update Ihzux rD rA rB Load Half Word and Zero with Updat
316. o accept pad ring fixes for cpu rev B entity MPC509 is generic PHYSICAL PIN MAP string XX Package ccn input only buffer two state 0 1 output out thr state or open drain output inout bidirectional linkage other than above power analog etc MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 8 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL bit port MPC509 USER S MANUAL single pin bit vector multiple pins with integer suffix out TMS in TCK in TRST L in CS inout CSBOOT L buffer PDWU buffer Cr inout inout BI L inout BURST L inout BDIP L inout ARETRY L inout CR L inout ECROU buffer CLKOUT buffer SRESET L buffer RESET I in IRQ L inout DSCK in DSDI in MODCK in WP inout VFLS inout inout PLLL inout AT inout A inout D inout BB L inout BG L inout BR L inout TEA L inout TA L inout AACK L inout TS L inout WR L inout VDDKAP 1 linkage VDDKAP 2 linkage VSSE linkage VDDE linkage VSSI inkage VDDI linkage VSSIB linkage VDDIB linkage VSSIR linkage VDDIR linkage VSSIT linkage VDDIT linkage VSSSN linkage VDDSN linkage XFCP linkage XFCN linkage XTAL linkage EXTAI inkage IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi bi b
317. o back cycles There is a 32 bit wide data path between the load store unit and the general purpose register file and a 64 bit wide data path between the load store unit and the floating point register file Single word accesses to the internal on chip data RAM require one clock resulting in two clocks latency Double word accesses require two clocks resulting in three clocks latency Since the L bus is 32 bits wide double word transfers require two bus accesses The load store unit performs zero fill for byte and half word transfers and sign extension for half word transfers Addresses are formed by adding the source one register operand specified by the instruction or zero to either a source two register operand or to a 16 bit immediate value embedded in the instruction 3 4 4 Floating Point Unit FPU The FPU contains a double precision multiply array the floating point status and con trol register FPSCR and the FPRs The multiply add array allows the MPC509 to efficiently implement floating point operations such as multiply multiply add and divide The MPC509 depends on a software envelope to fully implement the IEEE floating point specification Overflows underflows NaNs and denormalized numbers cause floating point assist exceptions that invoke a software routine to deliver with hardware assistance the correct IEEE result To accelerate time critical operations and make them more deterministic the MPC509 provides a m
318. ocessor to change to supervisor state as a result of external signals errors or unusual conditions arising in the execu tion of instructions When exceptions occur information about the state of the processor is saved to certain registers and the processor begins execution at an address exception vector predetermined for each exception Processing of excep tions occurs in supervisor mode Although multiple exception conditions can map to a single exception vector a more specific condition may be determined by examining a register associated with the exception for example the DAE source instruction service register DSISR and the floating point status and control register FPSCR Additionally some exception con ditions can be explicitly enabled or disabled by software 3 11 1 Exception Classes The MPC509 exception classes are shown in Table 3 19 Table 3 19 MPC509 Exception Classes Class Exception Type Machine check System reset External interrupt Decrementer Synchronous ordered precise Instruction caused exceptions Asynchronous unordered Asynchronous ordered 3 11 2 Ordered Exceptions In the MPC509 all exceptions except for reset debug port non maskable interrupts and machine check exceptions are ordered Ordered exceptions satisfy the following criteria Only one exception is reported at a time If for example a single instruction en counters multiple exception conditions
319. ode exit logic When the LPMM bit is zero the IRQ 0 1 pins are disabled from causing an exit from any of the low power modes When the LPMM bit is a one the IRQ 0 1 pins are enabled to cause an exit from any of the low power modes When low level occurs at the IRQ 0 1 pins and the LPMM bit is a one the LPM bits are cleared and the low power mode exit sequence begins If the LPMM bit 1 then the low power mode exit sequence is started even if a low power mode is not selected The time required to exit the low power modes depends on which mode was selected For modes 1 and 2 the delay from the exit signal being asserted to the clocks starting up is two clock cycles of the frequency that the VCO was programmed to generate The delay for mode 3 is the crystal start up time plus the VCO lock time The LPMM bit can be read or written any time 5 6 7 System Clock Lock Bits The system clock lock and status register SCLSR contains several bits that lock the corresponding bits or fields in the system clock control register SCCR Table 5 37 summarizes the lock bits and the fields that they control MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 79 Table 5 37 System Clock Lock Bits SCLSR Lock Bit SCCR Field Affected MPL MF LPML LPM RFDL RFD When a lock bit MPL LPML or RFDL is cleared writes to the corresponding bit or field in the MF LPM RFD respectively take effe
320. ode of operation that avoids invoking the software envelope and attempts MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL to deliver results in hardware that are adequate for most applications if not in strict conformance with IEEE standards In this mode denormalized numbers NaNs and IEEE invalid operations are treated as legitimate returning default results rather than causing floating point assist exceptions 3 5 Levels of the PowerPC Architecture The PowerPC architecture consists of three layers Adherence to the PowerPC archi tecture can be measured in terms of which of the following levels of the architecture are implemented PowerPC user instruction set architecture UISA Defines the base user level instruction set user level registers data types floating point exception model memory models for a uniprocessor environment and programming model for a uniprocessor environment PowerPC virtual environment architecture VEA Describes the memory model for a multiprocessor environment defines cache control instructions and de scribes other aspects of virtual environments Implementations that conform to the VEA also adhere to the UISA but may not necessarily adhere to the OEA PowerPC operating environment architecture OEA Defines the memory man agement model supervisor level registers synchronization requirements and the exception model Implementations that conform to the OEA
321. odule Development support State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Negated Denote the last fetched instruction or the number of instructions that were flushed from the in struction queue Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details Assertion Negation Transitions may occur every clock cycle This signal is not synchronous with bus cycles Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information on these signals 2 5 4 5 Instruction Flush Count VFLS 0 1 Output only Module Development support State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Negated Denote the number of instructions that are flushed from the history buffer during the current clock cycle These signals also provide the freeze indica tion Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details Assertion Negation Transitions may occur every clock cycle This signal is not synchronous with bus cycles Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information on these signals 2 5 4 6 Watchpoints WP 0 5 Output only Module Development support State Meaning Timing Comments 2 5 5 Chip Select Signals Asserted Indicate that a watchpoint event has occurred on the I bus WP 0 3 or L bus WP 4 5 Negated Indicate that no watchpoint event has occurred Assertion Negation Transitions may occur every clock cycle This signal is not synchronous with bus cycles Refer to the RCPU Refe
322. of Internal Memory in Memory 5 9 Flow Diagram Single Read Cycle 5 16 Example leo 1 5 17 Flow Diagram of a Single Write Cycle 2 201 5 18 Example 5 19 Write Followed by Two Reads on the E Bus Using Chip Selects 5 19 External Burst Read Cycle eem MS 5 23 Storage Reservation Signaling 5 32 Simplified Uniprocessor System with Chip Select Logic 5 34 Chip Select Functional Block DIBOEGITI uuu un positae oe bag arx batur Le lada 5 36 Multi Level lere is RR 5 46 Op ration 5 56 Overlapped Accesses to the Same Region 5 57 Pipelined Accesses to Two Different Regions 5 58 Asynchronous Read Zero Wait States 2 5 60 Asynchronous Write Zero Wait States 5 60 Synchronous Read with Asynchronous OE Zero Wait States 5 61 Synchronous Write Zero Wait States 5 61 Synchronous Read with Early OE One Wait State 5 62 Synchronous Read with Early Overlap One Wait State 5 63
323. omparator E Value Register 153 CMPF Comparator F Value Register 154 CMPG Comparator G Value Register 155 CMPH Comparator H Value Register 156 LCTRL1 L Bus Support Control Register 1 157 LCTRL2 L Bus Support Control Register 2 158 ICTRL Support Control Register 159 BAR Breakpoint Address Register 630 DPDR Development Port Data Register 8 8 1 Register Protection Table 8 25 and Table 8 26 summarize protection features of development support registers during read and write accesses respectively Table 8 25 Development Support Registers Read Access Protection MSR PR Debug Mode Enable In Debug Mode Result X Read is performed ECR is cleared when read Reading DPDR yields indeterminate data Read is performed ECR is not cleared when read Reading DPDR yields indeterminate data Read is performed ECR is cleared when read Program exception is generated Read is not performed ECR is not cleared when read MPC509 USER S MANUAL DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 8 45 Table 8 26 Development Support Registers Write Access Protection Debug Mode In Debug MSR PR Enable Mode Result Write is performed 0 0 X Write to ECR is ignored Writing to DPDR is ignored 0 1 0 Write is not performed Writing to DPDR is ignored 0 1 1 Write is performed Write to ECR is ignored Write is not performed 1 X X 2 Program exception
324. on Unlike the EXTEST instruction however once the data in the boundary scan cell is updated it remains unchanged until a new instruction is shifted in or reset 4 i CLAMP EXTEST y gt i Ju o A A TDO pris ASH BYPASS TDI TDO aY 9 A SAMPLE Y 0 Y A TDI TDO Figure 9 5 Typical Clamp Example 9 5 5 HIGHZ 0010 The HIGHZ instruction enables the single bit BYPASS register between TDI and TDO to function as test data register HIGHZ is provided as a public instruction in order to avoid having to backdrive the output signals during circuit board testing When the HIGHZ instruction is invoked all output drivers are placed in an inactive drive state HIGHZ also asserts internal reset for the MPC509 system logic for the duration of HIGHZ in order to force a predictable internal state while performing external boundary scan operations MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 6 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 9 5 6 EXTEST_PULLUP 0001 The EXTEST PULLUP instruction is not included in the IEEE 1149 1 1990 standard It is provided as a public instruction to aid in fault diagnosis during boundary scan test ing of a circuit board This instru
325. on how much the two clocks lead or lag each other 5 6 4 3 Charge Pump and Loop Filter The UP and DOWN signals from the phase detector control whether the charge pump applies or removes charge respectively from the loop filter The loop filter is shown in Figure 5 29 The filter network is external to the chip and can be replaced if necessary XFCP RA S n CHARGE Q PUMP n 15 0 nfd MCU Figure 5 29 Charge Pump with Loop Filter Schematic MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 73 5 6 4 4 The VCO uses a single ended design with an external capacitor to increase noise immunity The voltage on XFCP controls the VCO output frequency The frequency to voltage relationship VCO gain is positive and the output frequency is twice the maximum target system frequency 5 6 4 5 Multiplication Factor Divider The multiplication factor divider MFD divides down the output of the VCO and feeds it back to the phase detector when the PLL is not operating in 1 1 mode The phase detector controls the VCO frequency via the charge pump and loop filter such that the reference and feedback clocks have the same frequency and phase Thus the input to the MFD which is also the output of the VCO is at a frequency that is the reference frequency multiplied by the same amount that the MFD divides by For example if the MFD divides the VCO frequency by six then the PLL will b
326. on in the LR This is done regardless of whether the branch is taken MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 16 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL LR Link Register SPR 8 0 31 Branch Address RESET UNCHANGED 3 7 7 Count Register CTR The count register CTR is a 32 bit register for holding a loop count that can be dec remented during execution of branch instructions that contain an appropriately coded BO field If the value in CTR is zero before being decremented it is 1 afterward count register provides the branch target address for the branch conditional to count register bcctrx instruction CTR Count Register SPR 9 0 31 Loop Count RESET UNCHANGED 3 8 PowerPC VEA Register Set Time Base The PowerPC virtual environment architecture VEA defines registers in addition to those in the UISA register set The PowerPC VEA register set can be accessed by all software regardless of privilege level The PowerPC VEA includes the time base facility TB a 64 bit structure that contains a 64 bit unsigned integer that is incremented periodically The frequency at which the counter is updated is implementation dependent The TB consists of two 32 bit registers time base upper TBU and time base lower TBL In the context of the VEA user level applications are permitted read only access to the TB The OEA defines supervisor level access to the TB for writing values to the
327. on mechanism can assert transfer error acknowledge TEA to terminate the data phase when a bus error condition is encoun tered Refer to 5 4 11 Transfer Error Acknowledge Cycles for further information MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 21 The asserts the data strobe DS signal at the end of a chip select controlled bus cycle provided that either The chip select unit asserts the internal TA signal or The bus monitor timer asserts the internal TEA signal DS is not asserted however if TA or TEA is asserted externally even if TA or TEA is simultaneously asserted internally In addition to being asserted at the end of the bus cycles mentioned above DS is asserted at the end of a show cycle 5 4 6 Burst Cycles Burst cycles allow the fast transfer of instructions over the bus The MPC509 supports fixed length burst cycles of four beats for instruction reads only Burst cycles can be terminated early with the BDIP signal Burst reads on the external bus do not start until the internal data bus is available For example when the SIU starts a burst read and does not have L bus data bus grant because there is an L bus cycle in progress an IMB2 access then the SIU holds off the burst read until it can guarantee that it will have the internal bus grant At the start of a burst transfer the master drives the address the address attributes transfer start and the BURST signal to indica
328. on of clocked or self clocked mode is made immediately following reset The state of the DSDI input is latched eight clocks after RESETOUT is negated If it is latched low external clocked mode is enabled If it is latched high then self clocked mode is enabled When external clocked mode is enabled the use of asynchronous or synchronous mode is determined by the design of the external development tool Since DSDI is used during reset to configure the MCU and to select the development port clocking scheme it is necessary to prevent any transitions on DSDI during this time from being recognized as the start of a serial transmission The port does not begin scanning for the start bit of a serial transmission until 16 clocks after the negation of RESETOUT If DSDI is asserted 16 clocks after RESETOUT negation the port will wait until DSDI is negated to begin scanning for the start bit The selection of clocked self clocked mode is shown in Figure 8 7 The timing dia grams in Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 and Figure 8 10 show the serial communications for both trap enable mode and debug mode for all clocking schemes MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 26 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL SRESET DSDI CLKEN DSDI PRIOR TO RESETOUT DETERMINES PART CONFIGURATION MODE DSDI NEGATES FOLLOWING RESETOUT NEGATION TO ENABLE CLOCKED MODE INTERNAL CLOCK ENABLE SIGNAL ASSERTS EIGHT CLOCKS AFTER RESETOUT NEGATION BECAUSE DSDI IS NEGATED THIS
329. one address and drive out multiple data beats A burst able device must be synchronous Note that devices with fast static column access are not considered burstable This class of devices is considered asynchronous Two accesses are overlapped if they are aligned such that the address of the second access is on the external bus at the same time as the data of the first access Two accesses are pipelined if they are aligned such that the address of the second access is on the external bus before the data of the first access A device is pipelineable if it can latch the address presented to it and does not require the address to be valid on its address pins for the duration of the access to the device The pipelineable device should latch the address at the rising edge of the clock when its CE is asserted Note that only synchronous devices are treated as pipelineable by the chip select logic MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 52 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL BDIP and LAST are the early termination control signals for burst cycles A memory device with a type 1 burst interface may have a BDIP signal as one of its inputs A memory device with a type 2 burst interface has a LAST signal as one of its inputs Refer to 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Interface for a description of these interface types A device may or may not have the ability to hold off its data output until the data bus is available to the device To be able to hold off its
330. oned above external reset loss of oscillator and loss of lock result in clock reset MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 81 5 6 10 1 Loss of PLL Lock The system PLL lock status SPLS in the SCLSR indicates the current lock status of the PLL When the SPLS bit is clear the PLL is not locked When the SPLS bit is set the PLL is locked The SPLS bit can be read anytime It can be written only during spe cial test mode In PLL bypass mode and special test mode this bit is forced high to indicate a lock condition The loss of lock reset enable LOLRE bit in the SCCR indicates how the clocks should handle a loss of lock indication SPLS asserted When LOLRE is clear clock reset is not asserted if a loss of lock indication occurs When LOLRE is set clock reset is asserted when a loss of lock indication occurs The reset module may wait for the PLL to lock before negating reset see 5 8 Reset Operation The LOLRE bit is cleared whenever clock reset is asserted and may be re initialized by software CAUTION When the clock is in PLL bypass mode or special test mode setting the LOLRE bit in the SCCR generates a loss of lock reset request since the PLL is off The LOLRE bit must not be set when the clock is in PLL bypass or special test mode The system PLL lock status sticky bit SPLSS in the SCLSR must be initialized by software After the bit is set by software any out of lock indication clears
331. or more information Transfer acknowledge When asserted indicates the slave has received the data during a write cycle or returned the data during a read cycle During burst cycles the slave asserts this signal with every data beat re turned or accepted T SM Transfer error acknowledge Assertion of TEA indicates an error condi tion has occurred during the bus cycle and the bus cycle is terminated This signal overrides any other cycle termination signals e g TA or ARETRY Data strobe Asserted by EBI at the end of a chip select controlled bus cycle Asserted after the chip select unit asserts the internal TA or TEA signal or the bus monitor timer asserts the internal TEA signal Also as serted at the end of a show cycle Arbitration MA Bus request When asserted indicates the potential bus master is re questing the bus Each master has its own bus request signal AM Bus grant When asserted by bus arbiter the bus is granted to the bus master Each master has its own bus grant signal gt Bus busy Asserted by current bus master to indicate the bus is currently in use Prospective new master should wait until the current master ne gates this signal Miscellaneous Cancel reservation Each PowerPC CPU has its own CR signal This signal shows the status of any outstanding reservation on the external bus When asserted CR indicates that there is no outstanding reserv
332. or the first access until it is completed If the first region requires an extra clock to turn off its buffer the chip select logic allows an extra clock for the region 5 5 16 Chip Select Timing Diagrams The diagrams in this section show the different device interfaces that the chip select module supports Where applicable the diagrams indicate how the various signals address data and chip select signals are correlated CAUTION The user must not assume that CE is always asserted simulta neously with TS Depending on the state of the pipeline which depends on the interface types of the devices being accessed the chip select unit may delay asserting CE until one or more clock cycles after TS is asserted 5 5 16 1 Asynchronous Interface An external device with an asynchronous interface requires the address and the chip select signals CE OE and WE to be valid until the end of the access The next access to the same device must wait for the previous access to complete No overlap MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 59 of accesses is allowed Figure 5 17 and Figure 5 18 illustrate the asynchronous inter face for read and write accesses For the asynchronous write the external memory latches the data when WE is asserted CLKOUT ADDR CLKOUT ADDR
333. ot count watchpoints detected when MSR HI 2 0 See 8 2 4 Breakpoint Masking When counting watchpoints programmed on the actual instructions that alter the counters the counters will have unpredictable values A sync instruction should be inserted before a read of an active counter 8 2 2 2 Trap Enable Programming The trap enable bits can be programmed by regular supervisor level software by writ ing to the ICTRL or LCTRL2 with the mtspr instruction or on the fly using the development port interface For more information on the latter method refer to 8 3 5 Trap Enable Input Transmissions The value used by the breakpoints generation logic is the bit wise OR of the software trap enable bits the bits written using the mtspr and the development port trap enable bits the bits serially shifted using the development port All bits the software trap enable bits and the development port trap enable bits can be read from ICTRL and the LCTRL2 using mfspr For the exact bits placement refer to Table 8 30 and Table 8 32 8 2 2 3 Ignore First Match In order to facilitate the debugger utilities of continue and go from x the option to ignore the first match is supported for the I bus breakpoints When an I bus breakpoint is first enabled as a result of the first write to the I bus support control register or as a result of the assertion of the MSR RI bit in masked mode the first instruction will not cause an l bus breakpoint
334. ot used It is assumed the OE pin enables the outputs of all four bytes of the region onto the 32 bit E bus Thus typically a writable region would have multiple WEs one OE and one CE 5 5 12 3 Region Control The REGION field indicates which memory region the pin is assigned to This field is used only when the pin is configured to be a WE or OE pin For example a PCON MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 51 encoding of 0610 and a REGION encoding of 06001 configures the pin as OE of the memory region defined by CS1 REGION field encodings are shown in Table 5 26 Table 5 26 REGION Field Encodings REGION Memory Region Defined by 0b000 CSBOOT 0b001 CS1 0b010 CS2 06011 CS3 0b100 CS4 0b101 CS5 0b110 Reserved 0b111 Reserved 5 5 13 Interface Types The chip select module supports a wide variety of devices The interface type ITYPE field in the option registers for CSBOOT and CS 1 5 identifies the characteristics of the device interface These characteristics include whether the external device interface Is synchronous or asynchronous Supports pipelined accesses Can hold off its internal data ES ED Has a synchronous OE an asynchronous OE or no OE Is burstable or non burstable Uses the LAST or BDIP protocol for ending a burst transmission The following paragraphs define these concepts A burstable device can accept
335. out on a read or receives data on a write for the previous access 1010 1111 Reserved 1001 5 5 13 2 Turn Off Times for Different Interface Types The turn off time for asynchronous devices is equal to the time for OE to negate plus the time for device s outputs to go to a high impedance state For devices with an MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 54 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL of zero turn off time is less than or equal to one clock cycle For devices with an ITYPE of one turn off time is two clock cycles The turn off time of asynchronous devices must be taken into account in systems that pipeline accesses to devices controlled by chip selects with accesses to devices that are not under chip select control Otherwise external bus contention can result The turn off time for synchronous devices is equal to the time from the rising edge of the device s clock to the time the device s outputs are in a high impedance state This turn off time must be less than or equal to one clock period 5 5 13 3 Interface Type and BI Generation During a burst access to a region under chip select control that does not support burst accesses the chip select unit asserts the BI signal internally Only regions with an ITYPE of five seven and eight support burst accesses CAUTION It is recommended that the BI pin not be asserted during accesses to memory regions controlled by chip selects instead the chip select
336. p 146 2 controlrf 0 amp 147 6 A 27 bidir X 148 0 amp 148 2 controlr 0 Y amp 149 BC 6 A 26 bidir X 505 0 Li ge amp 150 BG 2 controlr 0 amp 151 BC 6 A 25 bidir X 525 Q Zi gr n amp 152 7 controlr 0 amp 153 BC 6 A 24 bidir X 54 0 5 amp SISA Ey Cont rolr 100 3 N amp 155 BC 6 A 23 bidir 365 56 0 Z y Y amp 56 2 p controls 20025 amp 157 BC_6 A 22 bidir X 58 0 Zu amp 158 2p controlr 0 amp 159 BC 6 A 21 bidir X 60 0 zy c amp MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 14 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL num 11 port function safe 11 dsval rslt W160 BG 2 controlr Q amp 161 BC 6 A 20 bidir X 162 0 Zi amp q62 BO 27 t cGontrolr 0 amp 163 BC 6 A 19 bidir X 164 0 Z amp 164 _2 controlr 0 amp 165 BC 6 A 18 bidir X 166 0 A amp SIEG BEC Z2 2 Gontrolr amp 167 BC 6 A 17 bidir X 168 07 Z amp 168 BC 2 controtr 0 amp 169 BC 6 A 16 bidir X 170 0 ZA amp 1770 2 controlr 0 amp 171 6 A 15 bidir X 172 0 amp 2 controlr 0 amp 173 6 A 14 bidir X 174 0 Z amp ME
337. pied The mtfsf mtfsfi mtfsb0 and mtfsb1 instructions can set or clear FPSCR FX explicitly This is a sticky bit FEX Floating point enabled exception summary This bit signals the occurrence of any of the enabled exception conditions It is the logical OR of all the floating point exception bits masked with their respective enable bits The merfs instruction implicitly clears FPSCR FEX if the result of the log ical OR described above becomes zero The mtfsf mtfsfi mtfsb0 and mtfsb1 instructions cannot set or clear FPSCR FEX explicitly This is not a sticky bit VX Floating point invalid operation exception summary This bit signals the occurrence of any invalid operation exception It is the logical OR of all of the invalid operation exceptions The merfs instruction implicitly clears FPSCR VX if the result of the logical OR described above becomes zero The mtfsf mtfsfi mtfsb0 and mtfsb1 instructions cannot set or clear FPSCR VX explic itly This is not a sticky bit OX Floating point overflow exception This is a sticky bit UX Floating point underflow exception This is a sticky bit ZX Floating point zero divide exception This is a sticky bit XX Floating point inexact exception This is a sticky bit VXSNAN Floating point invalid operation exception for SNaN This is a sticky bit VXISI Floating point invalid operation exception for x x This is a sticky bit VXIDI
338. port pin Each pin can be configured as an interrupt input or as digital I O If the pin is configured in the PQPAR as an edge sensitive interrupt request pin then the PQE bit acts as a status bit that indicates whether the corresponding interrupt request line is asserted The bit also acts as a status bit if the pins are configured as general pur pose inputs or outputs When the pin is configured in edge detect mode the status bit is cleared by reading the bit as a one and then writing it to zero In level sensitive mode the bit remains cleared A write to the port Q data register is stored in the internal data latch and if any PQ bit is configured as an output the value latched for that bit is driven onto the pin A read of this port returns the value at the pin only if the pin is configured as a discrete input Otherwise the value read is the value stored in the internal data latch The port Q data register can be read or written at any time PQEDGDAT Port Q Edge Detect Data Register 0x8007 EFDO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PQEO 1 2 4 5 6 0 1 2 4 5 PQ6 0 U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U Unaffected by reset 6 6 2 Port Q Pin Assignment Register The port Q pi
339. power on the boot region may be located at the uppermost or lowermost 1 Mbyte of the address range The CSBOOT base address specified in the BA field of CSBTBAR can be reset to OxFFFO 0000 or 0x0000 0000 accordingly The chip select logic asserts the CSBOOT signal for the entire 1 Mbyte range if the access is to external boot memory While RESET is asserted the MCU drives the chip select pins high negated to avoid a possible data bus conflict 5 6 Clock Submodule The system clock provides timing signals for the IMB2 and for an external peripheral bus The MCU drives the system clock onto the external bus on the CLKOUT pin The main timing reference for the MPC500 family is a 4 MHz crystal The system operating frequency is generated through a programmable phase locked loop The PLL is pro grammable in integer multiples of 4 MHz to generate operating frequencies of 16 MHz MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 67 to 44 MHz These frequencies can be divided by powers of two to generate other frequencies If the crystal ceases to function the loss of oscillator LOO bit is set and the PLL is forced to operate in the self clocked mode SCM This mode provides a system clock frequency of approximately 4 MHz The exact frequency depends on the voltage and temperature of the CPU but is optimized for nominal operating conditions The PLL can be bypassed by grounding the Vppsw pin Note that in this case
340. put sequence Table 9 1 JTAG Interface Pin Descriptions Internal Pull Up Signal Name Input Output Pulldown Provided Description Test data input pin Sampled on the rising edge of TCK TDI Input Pull up Has pull up resistor Test data output pin Actively driven during the shift IR and TDO Output None shift DR controller states Changes on the falling edge of TCK Can be placed in high impedance state Test mode select pin Sampled on the rising edge of TCK TMS Input Pull up to sequence the test controller s state machine Has a pull up resistor TCK Input Pulldown Test clock input to synchronize the test logic Has a pull down resistor TAP controller asynchronous reset Provides initialization TRST Input Pull up of the TAP controller and other logic as required by the standard Has a pull up resistor MOTOROLA IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MPC509 9 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 9 3 Operating Frequency The TCK frequency must be between 5 MHz and 10 MHz This pin is internally driven to a low value when disconnected 9 4 TAP Controller TRST is used to reset the TAP controller asynchronously The TRST pin ensures that the JTAG logic does not interfere with the normal operation of the chip This pin is op tional in the JTAG specification The TAP controller changes state either on the rising edge of TCK or when TRST is asserted The TDO signal remains in a high impedance
341. r X 116 0 amp STEFO controlr 20 Y amp 117 6 D 12 bidir X 118 0 Vio OY amp 1 8 BQ 2 Gontrolr 0 amp 119 BC 6 D 11 bidir X 120 0 Z amp num cell port function safe 11 dsval rslt 120 86 2 controle OJy amp 121 BC 6 D 10 bidir X 22 0 S amp Controlp 20 5 7 amp 123 BC 6 D 9 bidir X 24 0 Zig Y amp 124 BO 2 controlr 0 amp 125 BC 6 D 8 bidir X 26 0 amp 126 BEL Fy controlr 0 S amp 127 BC_6 D 7 bidir X 28 0 VAR amp 5292 controlr 20057 amp 129 BC_6 D 6 bidir X 30 Z gt amp 130 2 Gontrolr 0 5 amp 131 _6 D 5 bidir X 32 0 Z amp 132 BQ 25 controlr 0 amp 133 6 D 4 bidir X 34 0 Z g amp 134 Gontsolr 0 amp 135 BC 6 D 3 bidir X 36 0 amp 136 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 137 6 D 2 bidir X 38 0 Z amp W138 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 139 6 D 1 bidir Xy 140 0 amp num cell port function safe 11 dsval rslt SIAO BO 25 controlr Oyy amp 141 6 D 0 bidir X 142 0 2 amp 142 BC 2 controlr 0 amp 143 BC 6 A 29 bidir X 144 0 2 amp 144 2 controlr Og S amp 145 BC 6 A 28 bidir X 146 0 2 am
342. ram trace refer to 8 1 4 External Hardware During Program Trace 8 1 3 Program Flow Tracking Pins The following sets of pins are used in program flow tracking Instruction queue status pins VF 0 2 denote the type of the last fetched instruc tion or how many instructions were flushed from the instruction queue History buffer flushes status pins VFLS 0 1 denote how many instructions were MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL flushed from the history buffer during the current clock cycle Address type pin 1 AT1 indicates whether the cycle is transferring an instruction or data The write read pin WR when asserted during an instruction fetch show cycle indicates the current cycle results from an indirect change of flow Cycle type pins CT 0 3 indicate the type of bus cycle and are used to determine the address of an internal memory or register that is being accessed 8 1 3 1 Instruction Queue Status Pins Instruction queue status pins VF 0 2 indicate the type of the last fetched instruction or how many instructions were flushed from the instruction queue These status pins are used for both functions because queue flushes occur only during clock cycles in which there is no fetch type information to be reported Table 8 3 shows the possible instruction types Table 8 3 VF Pins Instruction Encodings VF 0 2 Instruction Type VF Next Clock Will Hold 000 None More i
343. ram using the microarchitecture defined below The RCPU implements a prefetch queue combined with parallel out of order pipe lined execution Instructions progress inside the processor from fetch to retire An instruction retires from the machine only after it and all preceding instructions finish execution with no exception Therefore only retired instructions can be considered architecturally executed These features together with the fact that most fetch cycles are performed internally e g from the increase performance but make it very difficult to provide the user with the real program trace In order to reconstruct a program trace the program code and the following additional information from the MCU are needed A description of the last fetched instruction stall sequential branch not taken branch direct taken branch indirect taken exception taken The addresses of the targets of all indirect flow change Indirect flow changes in clude all branches using the link and count registers as the target address all ex ceptions and rfi and mtmsr because they may cause a context switch The number of instructions canceled each clock Reporting on program trace during retirement would significantly complicate the visi bility support and increase the die size Complications arise because more than one instruction can retire in a clock cycle and because it is harder to report on indirect branches during re
344. rce for the time base and decrementer is the crystal oscillator divided by four With a 4 MHz oscillator frequency the period for the time base is Trp 284 1MHz 1 8 x 1013 seconds which is approximately 585 000 years With the same clock source the period for the decrementer is Tpgc 232 1MHz 4295 seconds which is approximately 71 6 minutes 5 6 9 2 Time Base Decrementer and Freeze Assertion The assertion of the global freeze signal can stop the clock to the time base and dec rementer if the SIUFRZ bit in the SIUMCR 0x8007 is set The actual freezing of the clock source occurs at the falling edge of the clock 5 6 9 3 Decrementer Clock Enable DCE Bit The decrementer clock enable DCE bit in the SCCR enables or disables the clock source to the decrementer The default state is to have the clock enabled The actual clock source is determined by the TBS bit The DCE bit does not affect the decre menter until after the next increment time as determined by the clock source 5 6 10 Clock Resets The following reset conditions cause the internal clock reset signal to be asserted external reset loss of oscillator when LOORE is set and loss of lock when LOLRE is set Clock reset causes the clock circuitry including the PLL oscillator SCCR and SCLSR to be reset Note that all reset sources cause normal reset processing to occur as described in 5 8 Reset Operation However only the reset sources menti
345. rence Manual RCPURM AD for detailed descriptions of these registers 3 9 10 4 Floating Point Exception Cause Register FPECR The FPECR is a 32 bit supervisor level internal status and control register used by the floating point assist software envelope Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for more information on this register 3 10 Instruction Set All PowerPC instructions are encoded as single words 32 bits Instruction formats are consistent among all instruction types permitting efficient decoding to occur in parallel with operand accesses This fixed instruction length and consistent format greatly sim plifies instruction pipelining The PowerPC instructions are divided into the following categories Integer instructions These include computational and logical instructions Integer arithmetic instructions MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MPC509 3 24 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL nteger compare instructions Integer logical instructions Integer rotate and shift instructions Floating point instructions These include floating point computational instruc tions as well as instructions that affect the floating point status and control regis ter FPSCR Floating point arithmetic instructions Floating point multiply add instructions Floating point rounding and conversion instructions Floating point compare instructions Floating point status and control instructions Lo
346. rence Manual RCPURM AD for more information on these signals 2 5 5 1 Chip Select for System Boot Memory CSBOOT Input only Module Chip selects MPC509 USER S MANUAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 17 State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted Indicates the boot memory device is being se lected In systems that have no external boot device this pin can be configured as a write enable or output enable of an external memory device At power up this pin defaults as a chip enable of the boot device Negated Indicates the boot device is not being selected Assertion Negation This is an address phase signal when used as chip enable of the boot device or a data phase signal when used as output enable or write enable of an external memory device When this signal is a chip en able assertion may be delayed from the assertion of TS 2 5 5 2 Chip Selects for External Memory CS 0 11 Output only Module Chip selects State Meaning Timing Comments 2 5 6 Clock Signals Asserted Indicates that the memory region for which the chip select is programmed is being accessed CS 1 5 can be programmed as chip enables output enables or write enables CS0 and CS 6 11 can be programmed as output enables or write enables Negated Indicates that the memory region for which the chip select is programmed is not being accessed Assertion Negation These are address phase signals when u
347. request The interrupt request remains pending until the PS bit is cleared If the counter reaches zero again before the interrupt service routine clears the PS bit the interrupt request remains pending until PS is cleared Any write to the PITC stops the current countdown and the count resumes with the new value in PITC If the PITC is loaded with the value 0 the PIT counts for the max imum period If the PIT enable PTE bit is not set the PIT is unable to count and retains the old count value Reads of the PIT register have no effect on the value in the PIT Figure 5 30 is a block diagram of the PIT MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 86 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLOCKS I PIT EXTAL p PITC i 1 DIVIDE I FREEZE BY 4 CLOCK 16 LOGIC gt LOGIC gt DISABLE DIVIDE gt MODULUS PS PIT INTERRUPT PCFS 2 0 PIE FREEZE Figure 5 30 Periodic Interrupt Timer Block Diagram 5 7 3 1 PIT Clock Frequency Selection The PIT clock frequency select PCFS field in the PICSR selects the appropriate fre quency for the PIT clock source over a range of external clock or crystal frequencies The bit encodings are shown in Table 5 41 Table 5 41 PCFS Encodings PCFS Encoding 06000 4 06001 8 06010 16 06011
348. res between memory and a set of 32 GPRs It also provides for word and double word operand loads and stores between memory and a set of 32 floating point registers FPRs Computational instructions do not modify memory To use a memory operand in a computation and then modify the same or another memory location the memory con tents must be loaded into a register modified and then written back to the target location with distinct instructions MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 25 PowerPC processors follow the program flow when they in the normal execution state However the flow of instructions can be interrupted directly by the execution of an instruction or by an asynchronous event Either kind of exception may cause one of several components of the system software to be invoked 3 10 1 Instruction Set Summary Table 3 18 provides a summary of RCPU instructions Refer to the RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for a detailed description of the instruction set Table 3 18 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic Operand Syntax Name add add addo addo rD rA rB Add addc addc addco addco rD rA rB Add Carrying adde adde addeo addeo rD rA rB Add Extended addi rD rA SIMM Add Immediate addic rD rA SIMM Add Immediate Carrying addic rD rA SIMM Add Immediate Carrying and Record addis r
349. ress phase Refer to 5 4 10 Address Retry and 5 4 11 Transfer Error Acknowledge Cycles for more information 5 4 5 3 Data Phase If the pipe depth before a cycle starts is zero or would have gone to zero if the new cycle had not started then the data phase always starts one clock cycle after the address phase starts If there is a previous data phase in progress one clock after an address phase starts then the data phase for that address phase starts as soon as the previous data phase completes The data phase completes when it is terminated by TA or TEA If the cycle is a burst cycle then multiple TA assertions are required to terminate the data phase During the data phase the following signals are used DATA 0 31 Burst data in progress BDIP The data phase can be terminated with either of the following signals Transfer acknowledge e Transfer error acknowledge AACK and are required for every cycle If under some error condition the slave asserts TA but not an AACK the SIU does not recover from this error condition If the external memory is under chip select control and the chip selects are pro grammed to return handshakes ACKEN 1 in the chip select option registers then the chip selects return TA unless the external TA pin is asserted first In that case the chip select module accepts the external pin information and does not generate internally A bus timer or system address protecti
350. ress register contains the high order bits bits 0 through 19 of the address block to which the associated chip select responds Register bit O corresponds to ADDRO register bit 19 corresponds to ADDR19 The BSIZE field determines how many of these bits are actually compared For the smallest block size encoding four Kbytes bits 0 through 19 are compared with ADDR 0 19 For larger block sizes not all of these bits are compared Table 5 20 shows the block size and address lines compared for each BSIZE encoding Table 5 20 Block Size Encoding TIED E I Address Lines Compared 9000 0001 4K ADDR O0 19 0010 8K ADDR 0 18 0011 16K ADDR 0 17 0100 32K ADDR 0 16 0101 64K ADDR 0 15 0110 128K ADDR 0 14 0111 256 K ADDR 0 13 1000 512K ADDR 0 12 1001 1M ADDR O0 1 1 1010 2M ADDR 0 10 1011 4M ADDR 0 9 1100 8M ADDR 0 8 1101 16M ADDR 0 7 1110 32M ADDR 0 6 1111 64M ADDR O0 5 Since the address decode logic of the chip select uses only the most significant address bits to determine an address match within its block size the value of the base address must be a multiple of the corresponding block size MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 45 Although the base address registers can be programmed to be any address within the address map the user must avoid programming these registers to values that overlap the addresses of interna
351. ring the previous cycle BG indicated to the MCU that it was free to take mastership if qualified SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 7 2 5 1 3 Bus Busy BB Input Output Module EBI State Meaning Asserted The current bus master asserts this signal to indicate the bus is currently in use The prospective new master must wait until the current master negates this sig nal Negated Indicates that the bus is not owned by another bus master and that the bus is available to the MCU when accompanied by a qualified bus grant Timing Comments Assertion BB is asserted during the address phase of each external bus cycle if it was previously negated It re mains asserted between internal atomic cycles any non burst word accesses to an external 16 bit port Negation Occurs during the clock cycle following termi nation of the data phase of an external bus cycle The sig nal is negated for half a clock cycle and then placed in a high impedance state 2 5 1 4 Cancel Reservation CR Input only Module EBI State Meaning Asserted By an external bus arbiter or reservation snooping logic indicates that there is no outstanding reser vation on the external bus Each RCPU has its own CR sig nal Assertion indicates that the processor should not perform any stwcx cycle to external memory Negated Indicates there is an outstanding reservation on the external bus Timing Comments Assertion Can
352. rnal glue logic Figure 5 11 is an example of a typical uniprocessor system This kind of system usu ally consists of a CPU some memories and some peripherals In single master systems the CPU is the only device that can be a bus master on the E bus memories and peripherals are slaves MCU CHIP SELECT INTERNAL MODULE EXTERNAL BUS SIGNALS CPU EBI PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL L BUS Figure 5 11 Simplified Uniprocessor System with Chip Select Logic MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 34 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL The chip select module provides the necessary control signals such as the chip enable CE write enable WE and output enable OE for the external memory and peripheral devices In addition the chip select module provides some handshakes for the external bus and some limited protection mechanisms for the system 5 5 1 Chip Select Features No external glue logic required for typical systems if the chip select module is used Modular architecture for ease of expansion Twelve chip select pins plus one CSBOOT pin Pins can be programmed as CEs six maximum OEs or WEs Capable of supporting pipelineable burstable devices Returns bus handshake signals for the selected address regions Provides up to seven programmable wait states for slave devices Controls the clocking of data to the slaves during write cycles Keeps slave sequentially consiste
353. rovide two clock cycle access In addition to the SIU ports described in this section port Q in the peripherals controller unit provides edge or level sensitive I O Refer to 6 5 Port Q for information on port Q Table 5 50 is an address map of the SIU port registers Table 5 50 SIU Port Registers Address Map Access Address Register S 0x8007 FC60 Port M Data Direction DDRM S 0x8007 FC64 Port M Pin Assignment PMPAR S U 0x8007 FC68 Port M Data PORTM __ 0x8007 FC6C 0x8007 FC80 Port A B Pin Assignment S 0x8007 FC84 PAPAR PBPAR S U 0x8007 FC88 Port A B Data PORTA PORTB e 0x8007 FC8C 0 8007 94 Port 1 J L Data Direction 5 DDRI DDRJ DDRK DDRL Port 1 J L Pin Assignment S PIPAR PJPAR PLPAR Port 1 J L Data Su PORTI PORTJ PORTK PORTL __ 0x8007 FCA4 R d 0x8007 FCFF erue 5 9 1 Port Timing MOTOROLA 5 102 Rev 15 June 98 Ports A through L can be used with a port replacement unit PRU These ports provide three clock cycle access If PRU mode is enabled at reset access to these registers is disabled and an external bus cycle is initiated Other non PRU ports provide two clock cycle access Input port pins are sampled synchronously After a pin assignment or data direction register is modified the change may require an additional clock cycle to take effect at the pin
354. rt number MPC509L and in a TTL compatible 5 V friendly configuration part number MPC509L3 1 1 Features Fully Integrated Single Chip Microcontroller RISC MCU Central Processing Unit RCPU 32 Bit PowerPC Architecture Compliant with PowerPC Architecture Book 1 Single Issue Processor Integrated Floating Point Unit Branch Prediction for Prefetch 32 Bit x 32 Bit General Purpose Register File 32 Bit x 64 Bit Floating Point Register File Precise Exception Model Internal Harvard Architecture Load Store Bus L Bus Instruction Bus PowerPC Time Base and Decrementer e System Interface Unit SIU Chip Select Logic to Reduce or Eliminate External Decoding Logic External Bus Interface EBI that Supports Synchronous Asynchronous Burst Transfer and Pipeline Transfer Memory Types System Protection Features Including Bus Monitor and Periodic Interrupt Timer MPC509 INTRODUCTION MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 1 1 On Chip Phase Locked Loop PLL 16 MHz to 44 MHz Five Dual Purpose l O Ports Two Dual Purpose Output Ports Peripheral Control Unit PCU Software Watchdog Interrupt Controller to Manage External and Internal Interrupts to the CPU Dual Purpose I O Port L Bus IMB Interface LIMB Connecting L Bus to Intermodule Bus 2 IMB2 4 Kbyte On Chip Instruction Cache 4 Kbyte On Chip Static Data RAM SRAM 3 3 V Supply Vol
355. rupt request levels register PITQIL determines the interrupt request level assigned to each interrupt source If a bit in the IRQPEND register is asserted indicating that an interrupt request at the associated level is pending and the corresponding bit in the IRQENABLE register is asserted then the interrupt request line to the CPU will be asserted These registers are described in greater detail in 6 5 3 Interrupt Controller Registers Figure 6 2 provides an overview of MPC509 interrupt management MPC509 PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT TIMER PICSR PIT PITQIL 27 31 RCPU gt IRQPEND EIE gt IRQENABLE EID PORT IRQAND NRI maoe PQEDGDAT PITQIL 0 26 a Figure 6 2 Interrupt Structure Block Diagram The interrupt controller does not enforce a priority scheme All interrupt priority is determined by the software In addition the interrupt controller does not automatically update the interrupt mask upon entering or leaving interrupt processing Any updates to the interrupt mask are the responsibility of software In this way the system is not limited to a particular interrupt priority updating scheme In addition to the interrupt controller on the MCU external peripheral chips in an MPC509 based system may contain their own interrupt controllers Each int
356. s 7 2 supervisor space only 7 3 INDEX MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 1998 Index 7 two cycle mode 7 3 SRAMMCR 7 3 SRRO 3 21 3 22 Static RAM See SRAM STME 5 85 STMS 5 85 STOP 6 3 Storage reservation support 5 31 stwex 5 31 Sub block 5 43 5 46 option register 5 47 Summary overflow 3 16 SUP 5 5 SUPER 5 48 Supervisor mode 3 18 and chip selects 5 43 5 48 and PCU registers 6 3 and SIU registers 5 5 and SRAM 7 3 SUPV 5 43 6 3 SUSG 8 50 SUSH 8 50 SW 5 93 SWCR 6 4 SWE 6 4 6 5 SWLK 6 4 6 5 SWR 6 5 SWSR 6 4 SWTC 6 4 6 5 Synchronous burst interface 5 63 interface 5 60 5 61 OE 5 53 region 5 53 SYSE 8 54 SYSEE 8 56 System clock 5 67 lock bits 5 79 sources 5 71 See also CLKOUT System protection 5 85 delay 5 44 5 49 TA 2 14 5 14 5 21 5 49 TADLY 5 44 5 49 TAP controller 9 3 TB 3 17 TBL 3 17 3 20 TBU 3 17 3 20 TCK 9 2 TDI 9 2 TDO 9 2 TEA cycles 5 28 TEA 2 15 5 14 5 21 5 28 5 90 TECR 8 25 Test MOTOROLA Index 8 access port controller See TAP controller clock 9 2 data input 9 2 data output 9 2 mode select 9 2 reset 9 2 Time base 3 17 5 80 Time out period PIT 5 88 Timing instruction 3 33 TMS 9 2 TMSCAN 9 8 TR 8 54 Trace 8 8 window 8 8 Transfer acknowledge See TA Transfer error acknowledge See TEA Transfer start See TS Trap enable control register 8 25 input transmissions 8 30 programming 8 20 TRE 8 56 TRST 9 2 TS 2 10 5 13 5 20 Two cycle mode SRAM 7 3 U
357. s Programming Options Programming Options Comparator E Comparator G LWO L bus 5 oint Comparators E amp F Comparators G amp H P Comparators E F Comparators G H or don t care or don t care Comparator E Comparator G Comparator F Comparator H LW1 E oint Comparators Comparators G amp H P Comparators E F Comparators G H or don t care or don t care 8 2 1 6 Treating Floating Point Numbers The data comparators can detect match events on floating point single precision val ues in floating point load store instructions When floating point values are compared the comparators must be programmed to operate in signed word mode During the execution of a load store instruction of a floating point double operand the L data comparators never generate a match If L data events are programmed for don t care i e LCTRL2 LWOLADGO 0 L bus watchpoint and breakpoint events can be generated from the L address events even if the instruction is a load store double instruction 8 2 2 Internal Breakpoints MPC509 USER S MANUAL Internal breakpoints are generated from the watchpoints The user may enable a watchpoint to create a breakpoint by setting the associated software trap enable bit in the ICTRL or LCTRL2 register This can be done by a software monitor program exe cuted by the MCU An external development tool can also enable in
358. s also indicated by a cycle type encoding of 0001 when AT1 1 Refer to 8 1 1 1 Marking the Indirect Change of Flow Attribute for additional information 8 1 4 External Hardware During Program Trace When program trace is needed external hardware needs to record the status pins VF 0 2 and VFLS 0 1 of each clock and record the address of all cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 7 Program trace can be used in various ways Two types of traces that can be imple mented are the back trace and the window trace 8 1 4 1 Back Trace A back trace provides a record of the program trace before some event occurred An example of such an event is some system failure When a back trace is needed the external hardware should start sampling the status pins and the address of all cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute immediately after reset is negated Since the ISCTL field in the ICTRL has a value of is 0000 show all cycles out of reset all cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute are visible on the external bus VSYNC should be asserted sometime after reset and negated when the programmed event occurs VSYNC must be asserted before the ISCTL encoding is changed to 0011 no show cycles if such an encoding is selected Note that in case the timing of the programmed event is unknown it is possible to use cyclic buffers
359. s remain set until they are cleared by an mcrfs mtfsfi mtfsf or mtfsbO instruction Table 3 2 summarizes which bits in the FPSCR are sticky status bits which are nor mal status bits and which are control bits Table 3 2 FPSCR Bit Categories Bits Type 0 3 12 21 23 Status sticky 1 2 13 20 Status not sticky 24 31 Control FEX and VX are the logical ORs of other FPSCR bits Therefore these two bits are not listed among the FPSCR bits directly affected by the various instructions FPSCR Floating Point Status and Control Register 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 FX FEX OX ux zx XX Men VXISI VXIDI a VXIMZ VXVC FR FI RESET UNCHANGED 16 17 18 19 20 A 22 283 24 2 26 27 28 2 9 31 FPRF 1 4 0 ae VXCVI VE UE ZE NI RN RESET UNCHANGED A listing of FPSCR bit settings is shown in Table 3 3 MPC509 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 11 Table 3 3 FPSCR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description FX Floating point exception summary Every floating point instruction implicitly sets FPSCR FX if that instruction causes any of the floating point exception bits in the FPSCR to change from zero to one The merfs instruction implicitly clears FPSCR FX if the FPSCR field containing FPSCR FX is co
360. s system The address retry mechanism can also be used for error correction purposes After receiving TS the external device must wait at least one clock cycle before assert ing ARETRY Note that this could be an issue at low frequencies it is possible for an external device to receive TS decode the address and assert ARETRY in the same clock cycle This is illegal The SIU does not guarantee word coherency if ARETRY is asserted for the second half of a word cycle of a decomposed word transfer The external arbiter is responsible for maintaining the coherency by monitoring the byte enable lines and making sure that no other master updates that location until the retried cycle is successfully completed Note that BB is not negated until the second clock cycle after ARETRY assertion CAUTION TA or TEA must not be asserted during a cycle in which ARETRY is asserted If TA is asserted for any part of a burst cycle ARETRY must not be asserted at any time during the cycle if ARETRY is asserted during a burst cycle it must be asserted before the first beat is terminated with TA 5 4 11 Transfer Error Acknowledge Cycles A bus timer or system address protection mechanism can assert transfer error acknowledge TEA to terminate the data phase when one of the following types of bus error conditions is encountered Write to a read only address space Access to a non existent address TEA assertion overrides the assertion of TA Assert
361. sa Rete 8 18 8 5 Development PORE Support oun pH Rt 5 ue aed 8 22 8 6 Development Port Registers and Data Paths 8 24 8 7 Enabling Clock Mode Following Reset 2222 112 8 27 8 8 Asynchronous Clocked Serial Communications 8 28 8 9 Synchronous Clocked Serial Communications 8 29 8 10 Synchronous Self Clocked Serial Communications 8 30 8 11 Enabling Debug Mode at Reset 8 35 8 12 Entering Debug Mode Following Reset 8 36 8 13 General Port Usage Sequence Diagram 8 40 Debug Mode EDO usua oracio best d US RR dca 8 44 9 1 S ER E eran E E 9 1 9 2 cio eds MIB CNET 9 2 9 2 Sample EXTEST Connection enin dir ek 9 4 9 4 R c 9 5 9 5 Typical Clamp Example 2 9 6 9 6 TER duca aside o uad 9 7 MOTOROLA LIST OF FIGURES MPC509 xiv Rev 15 June 1998 USER S MANUAL LIST OF TABLES Table Title Page eeepc 2 1 2c DEMONE 22 pk d atn Perl
362. se four modes When one of the three low power modes is selected the EBI prevents the CPU from starting any more bus cycles but allows the current bus cycle to terminate At the end of the current bus cycle the appropriate clocks are stopped and the EBI continues operation as defined for the low power mode selected Note that in debug mode the crystal and the PLL are not shut down but continue to run and provide clocks to the debug module The LPM bits can be protected against further writes by setting the LPM lock LPML bit in the SCLSR register 5 6 6 1 Normal Mode The normal operating mode state 0x0 is the state out of clock reset This is also the state the bits go to when the low power mode exit signal arrives 5 6 6 2 Single Chip Mode Mode 0 1 is single chip mode In this mode CLKOUT is turned off This mode can be selected when the MCU is used by itself and does not need to provide a system clock Turning off CLKOUT saves power and improves electromagnetic compatibility The low power mode exit signal is the logical OR of the external reset pin the IRQ 0 1 pins if LPMM 1 the decrementer interrupt and the PIT interrupt Since the oscillator and PLL are still running and locked the low power mode exit sig nal must be a minimum of two system clock cycles and exiting this state does not incur a PLL lock time 5 6 6 3 Doze Mode Mode 0x2 is doze mode In this state not only is CLKOUT turned off but also all inter
363. se is also required External bus cycles can be single or multiple burst data cycles Burst cycles normally have four data words associated with the cycle Refer to 5 4 6 Burst Cycles for infor mation on burst cycles 5 4 3 1 Read Cycle Flow Figure 5 4 is a flow diagram of a single read cycle on the external bus MPC509 USER S MANUAL SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MOTOROLA 5 15 MASTER SLAVE RECEIVE ADDRESS IS BUS GRANTED CAN SLAVE PIPELINE REQUEST BUS BUS GRANT RECEIVED ASSERT ADDRESS ACKNOWLEDGE BUS BEING Y RETURN DATA DRIVEN BY ANOTHER MASTER ASSERT TRANSFER ACKNOWLEDGE ASSERT BUS BUSY Y ASSERT TRANSFER ADDRESS SIT ACKNOWLEDGE ASSERT ADDRESS Y ALREADY ACKNOWLEDGE DRIVE ADDRESS ASSERTED AND ATTRIBUTES 1 1 ERE Y RECEIVE DATA Figure 5 4 Flow Diagram of a Single Read Cycle Figure 5 5 is a simplified timing diagram of a read cycle MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 16 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLKOUT EQUEST BUS amp RECEIVE GRANT BEGIN DRIVING ADDRESS AND ASSERT TS PIPELINED ADDRESS ATTRIBUTES WR T
364. sed as chip enables CS 1 5 only or data phase signals when used as output enables or write enables When these signals are chip enables assertion may be de layed from the assertion of TS 2 5 6 1 Clock Output CLKOUT Output only Module Clocks State Meaning MOTOROLA 2 18 Asserted Negated Provides a clock which runs continu ously All signals driven on the E bus must be synchronized to the rising edge of this clock SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 2 5 6 2 Engineering Clock Output ECROUT Output only Module Clocks State Meaning Asserted Negated Provides a buffered clock reference output with a frequency equal to the crystal oscillator fre quency taken from the PLL feedback signal 2 5 6 3 Crystal Oscillator Connections EXTAL XTAL Input Output Module EBI State Meaning Connections for the external crystal to the internal oscillator circuit An external oscillator should serve as input to the EXTAL pin when used 2 5 6 4 External Filter Capacitor Pins XFCP XFCN Input only Module EBI State Meaning Used to add an external capacitor to the filter circuit of the phase locked loop 2 5 6 5 Clock Mode MODCLK Input only Module EBI Reset Operation During reset this signal and Vppsn select the source of the system clock Refer to 5 8 3 Configuration During Reset for details 2 5 6 6 Phase Locked Loop Lock Signal PLLL Output only Module Clocks Sta
365. select module allow fixed burst accesses the chip select module keeps the OE or WE asserted for the length of four words unless the cycle is ter minated early For a burst access to a non burstable region the chip select module asserts the burst inhibit indication to the EBI and treats the access as a single word access For a fixed burst access to a burstable small port 16 bit device the chip select module keeps the OE or WE valid until the EBI terminates the burst Depending on the starting address of the burst the EBI breaks the access into two or more cycles and increments the address appropriately The small port device is expect ed to wrap as specified in 5 4 External Bus Interface For a single word access to a device with a small port the chip select module al ways performs a single access to the small port device and indicates to the EBI that the device has a 16 bit port If more data is needed the EBI requests the chip selects to perform another access to the device to complete the transfer MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 66 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 5 18 Chip Select Reset Operation The data bus configuration word specifies how the MCU is configured at reset Table 5 29 summarizes the data bus configuration bits that affect chip selects Table 5 29 Data Bus Configuration Word Settings for Chip Selects Configuration Function Bit s Affected Description 0 Address bus chip selects
366. ses the bits that are set in either register i e it performs a logical OR on the associ ated bits in the two registers When the SBLK bit in CSOR1 CSOR3 or CSOR5 is set the corresponding chip select pin cannot act as a CE pin since its decoder is used for multi level protection The pin however can still be configured by programming the PCON field to function as an OE WE or non chip select pin If the pin is configured as a WE or OE it can be assigned to any region not just the region associated with the sub block The CSBOOT CS2 and CS4 regions cannot be sub blocks They can only be the main blocks Setting the SBLOCK bit in any of these registers has no effect 5 5 6 3 Multi Level Protection for CSBOOT The CSBOOT region has a dedicated sub block decoder in addition to its paired sub block decoder CS1 If both sub block decoders are used the CS1 decoder has higher priority than the dedicated sub block decoder That is if an address is con tained in both sub blocks the protections specified in the CS1 option register are used If an address is contained in the dedicated sub block and the CSBOOT main block but not the CS1 sub block the protections specified in the CSBOOT sub block option register are used The SBLK bit of the dedicated sub block option register is cleared at power on The bit can be modified after reset if needed The boot region would need to contain enough MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA
367. should be calculated according to the first two VF pin reports Assume VF1 and VF2 are the two first VF pin reports and T1 and T2 are the addresses of the first two cycles marked with the indirect change of flow attribute that were latched in the trace buffer Use Table 8 7 to calculate the trace window starting address Table 8 7 Detecting the Trace Buffer Starting Point VF1 VF2 Starting Point Description 011 001 T1 VSYNC asserted followed by a sequential instruction VSYNC Sequential The starting address is T1 011 110 T1 4 offset VSYNC asserted followed by a taken direct branch VSYNC Branch direct T1 4 The starting address is the target of the direct branch taken 011 101 T2 VSYNC asserted followed by a taken indirect branch VSYNC Branch indirect The starting address is the target of the indirect taken branch 8 1 4 5 Detecting the Assertion or Negation of VSYNC Since the VF pins are used for reporting both instruction type information and queue flush information special care must be taken when trying to detect the assertion or negation of VSYNC A VF 0 2 encoding of 011 indicates the assertion or negation of VSYNC only if the previous VF 0 2 pin values were 000 001 or 010 8 1 4 6 Detecting the Trace Window Ending Address The information on the VF and VFLS status pins changes every clock Cycles marked with the indirect change of flow are generated on the external bus only when poss
368. source for the MCU The configuration modes are shown in Table 5 32 Table 5 32 System Clock Sources VppsN MODCLK PLL Options 1 1 Normal Operation 1 0 1 1 mode CLKOUT frequency is equal to oscillator frequency PLL bypass mode CLKOUT frequency is equal to one half the oscillator frequency 0 0 Special test mode When both pins are high the CPU clocks are configured for normal operation and the PLL is fully programmable If MODCLK 0 and Vppsn 1 then the PLL enters 1 1 frequency mode In this mode CLKOUT frequency is equal to the oscillator frequency and is not affected by the RFD bits The oscillator can be driven by either an external crystal or an external clock Source If VppsN 0 and MODCLK 1 then the PLL is disabled and bypassed In this case CLKOUT frequency is equal to one half the oscillator frequency In this mode the oscillator source must have a 50 duty cycle In each clock mode except bypass mode CLKOUT frequency can be reduced by pro gramming the RFD field to a non zero value Refer to 5 6 5 CLKOUT Frequency Control for details If VppsN 0 and MODCLK 0 then the CPU clocks are configured in special test mode In this mode the PLL and most of the clock generation circuitry are bypassed This mode is intended for factory test only CAUTION When the clock is in PLL bypass mode or special test mode setting the LOLRE bit in the SCCR generates a loss of lock reset
369. state except during the shift DR or shift IR controller states During these controller states TDO is updated on the falling edge of TCK The TAP controller states are designed as specified in the IEEE 1149 1 standard 9 5 Instruction Register The MPC509 implementation of the IEEE 1149 1 interface includes the three manda tory public instructions BYPASS SAMPLE PRELOAD and EXTEST and five public instructions CLAMP HIGHZ EXTEST PULLUP TMSCAN and IDCODE The MPC509 contains a four bit instruction register without parity consisting of a shift reg ister with four parallel outputs Data is transferred form the shift register to the parallel outputs during update IR controller state The four bits are used to decode eight unique instructions as shown in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Instruction Register Encoding Code B3 B2 Bi BO Instruction 1 1 1 1 BYPASS 1 1 1 0 SAMPLE PRELOAD 1 1 0 1 IDCODE 1 1 0 0 TMSCAN 1 0 X X Reserved 0 1 X X Reserved 0 0 1 1 CLAMP 0 0 1 0 HIGHZ 0 0 0 1 EXTEST PULLUP 0 0 0 0 EXTEST The parallel output of the instruction register is reset to 1101 in the Test Logic Reset controller state Note that this preset state is equivalent to the IDCODE instruction In the Capture IR state 1101 is loaded into the instruction shift register stage New in structions can be shifted into the instruction shift register stage on Shift IR state MPC509 IEEE 1149
370. stem frequency to 16 MHz write the RFD bits to Ox1 then write the MF bits to OxO After the PLL locks write the RFD bits to 0 0 When the PLL is operating in one to one mode the multiplication factor is set to one and MF is ignored Figure 5 27 shows how the PLL uses the MF bits to multiply the input crystal fre quency The output of the VCO is divided down to generate the feedback signal to the phase comparator The MF bits control the value of the divider in the PLL feedback loop The phase comparator determines the phase shift between the feedback signal MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 76 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL and the reference clock This difference results in either an increase or decrease in the VCO output frequency 5 6 5 2 Reduced Frequency Divider RFD 0 3 The RFD bits control a prescaler at the output of the PLL The reset state of the RFD bits is 0 3 which divides the output of the VCO by eight These bits can be changed without affecting the PLL s VCO i e no re lock delay is incurred All changes in frequency are synchronized to the next falling edge of the cur rent system clock Table 5 35 summarizes the possible values for the RFD bits Table 5 35 Reduced Frequency Divider Bits RFD Field Binary Divider 0000 1 0001 2 0010 4 0011 8 0100 16 0101 32 0110 64 0111 128 1000 256 1001 512 1010 1024 1011 1024 1100 1024 110
371. ster have no effect In debug mode however the lock bit can be cleared by software The register can be read at any time SWCR SWTC Software Watchdog Control Field Timing Count 0x8007 EFC4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWE SWLK SWTC RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SWTC RESET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT MPC509 6 4 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 6 3 SWCR SWTC Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 5 Reserved Software watchdog enable 6 SWE 0 Disable watchdog counter 1 Enable watchdog counter Software watchdog lock 7 SWLK 0 Enable changes to SWLK SWE SWTC 1 Ignore writes to SWLK SWE SWTC Software watchdog timing count This 24 bit register contains the count for the software watch 8 31 SWTC 909 timer which counts at system clock frequency If this register is loaded with zero the maximum time out is programmed 6 4 3 Software Watchdog Register The software watchdog register SWR is a read only register that shows the current value of the software watchdog down counter Writes to this register have no effect SWR Software Watchdog Register 0x8007 EFC8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 45 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RESERVED SWR RESET X X X X X X X X 41 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
372. struction Instruction fetch marked fetch cycle marked as an indirect change of flow cycle Both the address as indirect change of flow if ad and the data phase are seen on the external bus This cycle requires an dress AACK and a TA signal This cycle type is used when an external ad type is instruction dress is the destination of a branch instruction or the destination of an exception or VSYNC cycle This is special external bus cycle to emulation memory replacing inter Emulation memory select not 0010 supported in MPC509 bs 1 or L mem and not resulting in a cache hit The MPC509 oes not support this cycle type MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 29 Table 5 14 Cycle Type Encodings Continued CT 0 3 Cycle Type Description This is a normal external bus cycle access to a port replacement chip used for emulation support Both the address and the data phase are PRU select not supported in cA 0011 seen on the external bus This cycle requires an AACK and a TA signal MPC509 5a 4 It indicates that an access was made which would have gone to an ternal port control register if the chip were not operating in PRU mode 0100 1 not supported in These are internal visibility cycles This cycle is self terminating and MPC509 does not require AACK and signals These encod
373. t Refer to Table 5 33 0000 1 0001 0010 4 0011 0100 16 0101 32 0110 64 0111 128 1000 256 1001 512 1010 1024 1011 1024 1100 1024 1101 1024 1110 1024 1111 1024 5 6 12 System The system Clock Lock and Status Register SCLSR clock lock and status register SCLSR contains lock and status bits for the PLL It is powered by VDDKAP1 The SCLSR is not affected by reset conditions that do not cause clock reset Clock reset caused by loss of oscillator loss of lock or external reset causes the register to be reset as indicated in the diagram SCLSR System Clock Lock and Status Register 0x8007 FC54 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 RESERVED MPL LPML RESERVED STMS CLOCK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 2 22 283 24 25 26 27 28 2 30 8 RESERVED WUR RESERVED ia SPLS LOO CLOCK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 0 0 U U U U Unaffected by clock reset MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 84 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 39 SCLSR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 3 Reserved System PLL test mode enable 4 STME 0 Test mode disabled 1 2 Test mode enabled MF lock 5 MPL 0 Writes to MF field in SCCR allowed 1 Writes to MF field have no effect Low power mode lock 6 LPML 0 Writes to LPM bits allowed 1 Writes to LPM bits have
374. t bit or bits Refer ences to low and high bytes are spelled out MOTOROLA PREFACE MPC509 Xx USER S MANUAL SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION The MPC509 is a member of the PowerPC Family of reduced instruction set computer RISC microcontrollers MCUs The MPC509 implements the 32 bit portion of the PowerPC architecture which provides 32 bit effective addresses integer data types of eight 16 and 32 bits and floating point data types of 32 and 64 bits The RISC MCU processor RCPU integrates four execution units an integer unit IU a load store unit LSU a branch processing unit BPU and a floating point unit FPU The RCPU is capable of issuing one sequential non branch instruction per clock In addition branch instructions are evaluated ahead of time when possible resulting in zero cycle execution time for many branch instructions Instructions can complete out of order for increased performance however the MPC509 makes them appear sequential The MPC509 includes an on chip 4 Kbyte two way set associative physically addressed instruction cache chip select logic to reduce or eliminate external decoding logic four Kbytes of static RAM and extensive processor debugging functionality The MPC509 has a high bandwidth 32 bit data bus and a 32 bit address bus The MCU supports 16 bit and 32 bit memories and both single beat and burst data mem accesses 509 is available in a 3 V only configuration pa
375. t of SRAM in Memory Map The SRAM module consists of two separately addressable sections The first is the array itself The second section is a set of registers used for configuration and testing of the SRAM array The SRAM array is assigned to one of four locations in the MCU address map by pro gramming the LMEMBASE field in the SIU internal memory mapping register MEMMAP Note that the user must reserve the entire 32 Kbyte block containing the selected 4 Kbyte block of SRAM Table 7 1 indicates the location of the SRAM array and the associated reserved locations for each value of LMEMBASE Table 7 1 MPC509 SRAM Module Addresses LMEMBASE SRAM Location Reserved Location 00 0x0000 0000 0x0000 6FFF 0x0000 7FFF 0x0000 7FFF 01 0x000F 8000 0x000F EFFF F000 0x000F FFFF 10 OxFFFO 0000 OxFFFO 6FFF OxFFFO 7FFC OxFFFO 7FFF 11 OxFFFF 8000 OxFFFF EFFF OxFFFF F000 OxFFFF FFFF Refer to 5 2 SIU Module Configuration for a diagram of the MEMMAP register MPC509 STATIC RAM MODULE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 7 1 Figure 7 1 a memory map of the 509 shows the possible locations of the SRAM array VECTOR TABLE LOCATION IP BIT 0 POSSIBLE SRAM LOCATION 28 KBYTES 0x0000 0000 0x0000 6FFF EXTERNAL POSSIBLE SRAM 0 000 8000 ONE OF FOUR POSSIBLE LOCATIO LOCATION SELECTED FOR SRAM aa 0 000 EFFF EXTERNAL 0x8000 0000 EXTERNAL
376. t support burst accesses It is recommended that the BI pin not be asserted during accesses to memory regions controlled by chip selects instead the chip select unit will generate the BI signal inter nally when appropriate 5 4 7 Decomposed Cycles and Address Wrapping If a burst cycle initiated by one of the internal buses is burst inhibited by the chip selects or by the pins the EBI decomposes this cycle into four single beat accesses The EBI increments the address internally and sends the received data from the four single external reads back to the originating bus as a burst transaction The EBI breaks a burst access to a device with a 16 bit port into two or three cycles depending on the starting address or eight cycles if BI is asserted and increments the address appropriately Examples of burst access address wrapping are shown in Table 5 9 If a burst access to a device with a 16 bit port is burst inhibited by the chip selects or by external memory asserting the BI pin the EBI decomposes the transfer into eight single beat accesses Depending on the starting address for the burst access and whether the address is word or double word aligned the EBI wraps the address to fetch the correct data from memory four words or eight half words If the receives TEA for one part of a decomposed cycle it generates TEA internally for the remaining parts of the decomposed cycle as well MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 24
377. ta Register ICDAT Bits Mnemonic Description 0 31 DAT The data received when reading information from the I cache 4 4 Cache Operation On an instruction fetch bits 21 27 of the instruction s address are used as an index into the cache to retrieve the tags and data of one set The tags from both accessed lines are then compared to bits 0 20 of the instruction s address If a match is found and the matched entry is valid then the access is a cache hit If neither tag matches or if the matched tag is not valid the access is a cache miss includes one burst buffer that holds the last line received from the bus and one line buffer that holds the last line received from the cache array If the requested data is found in one of these buffers the access is considered a cache hit To minimize power consumption the attempts to make use of data stored in one of its internal buffers Using a special indication from the CPU it is also possible in some cases to detect that the requested data is in one of the buffers early enough so the cache array is not activated at all 4 4 1 Cache Hit On a cache hit bits 28 29 of the instruction s address are used to select one word from the cache line whose tag matched In the same clock cycle the instruction is trans ferred to the instruction unit of the processor 4 4 2 Cache Miss On a cache miss the address of the missed instruction is drive
378. tage Tolerates Input Signals from 5 V Peripherals 1 2 Block Diagram INTERMODULE BUS 2 IMB2 SYSTEM INTERFACE PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT PCU UNIT RISC MCU SIU EXTERNAL PROCESSOR INTERNAL LOAD STORE BUS L BUS BUS RCPU 4 KBYTE SRAM INTERNAL INSTRUCTION BUS I BUS _ 4 I CACHE DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT DEVELOPMENT PORT Figure 1 1 MPC509 Block Diagram Notice in Figure 1 1 that the IMB2 connects the processor to any on chip peripherals No such peripherals are present on the MPC509 MOTOROLA INTRODUCTION MPC509 1 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 1 3 Pin Connections ADDR10 CS10 ADDR11 CS11 ADDR7 CS7 ADDR8 CS8 ADDR9 CS9 VDDEO ADDR6 CS6 VSSE11 VDDE11 DATA27 DATA26 DATA25 DATA24 DATA23 DATA22 DATA21 DATA20 VSSE10 VDDE10 DATA19 DATA18 O lt VSSEO ADDR5 CS5 ADDR4 CS4 ADDR3 CS3 ADDR2 CS2 ADDR1 CS1 ADDRO CSO CSBOOT o i MPC509 VDDKAP1 XTAL EXTAL VSSSN XFCN XFCP VDDSN RESETOUT RESET VDDE3 VF2 1 1 DSDO PLLL ADDR12 ADDR13 VDDE6 Figure 1 2 MPC509 Pin Assignments MPC509 INTRODUCTION MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 1 3 orc PERIPHERAL T CONTROL 1
379. tchpoint 21 SIW1EN Software trap enable selection of the 2nd 1 watchpoint 0 trap disabled reset value Software trap enable selection of 1 trap enabled 22 SINGEN the 3rd I bus watchpoint Software trap enable selection of 23 SIWSEN the 4th l bus watchpoint Development port trap enable 24 DIWOEN selection of the 1st l bus watchpoint read only bit Development port trap enable 25 DIW1EN selection of the 2nd 1 watchpoint read only bit 0 trap disabled reset value Development port trap enable 1 trap enabled 26 DIW2EN selection of the 3rd I bus watchpoint read only bit Development port trap enable 27 DIWSEN selection of the 4th I bus watchpoint read only bit MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 48 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 8 30 ICTRL Bit Settings Continued Bits Mnemonic Description Function 28 Ignore first match only for I bus breakpoints 0 Do not ignore first match used for go to x re set value 1 Ignore first match used for continue 29 31 ISCT SER Instruction fetch show cycle and RCPU serialize control 000 RCPU is fully serialized and show cycle will be performed for all fetched instructions reset value 001 RCPU is fully serialized and show cycle will be performed for all changes in the program flow 010 RCPU is fully serialized and show cycle will be performed for all indirect changes in the program flow 0
380. te Meaning Asserted Indicates that the phase locked loop is locked Negated Indicates that the phase locked loop is not locked 2 5 6 7 Power Down Wake Up PDWU Output only Module EBI State Meaning Asserted Can be used as power down wakeup to exter nal power on reset circuit or assertion can signal other events depending on system requirements PDWU is as serted when bit 0 of the decrementer register changes from zero to one and can also be asserted by software See the MPC509 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 2 19 RCPU Reference Manual RCPURM AD for details on decrementer exceptions Negated By software indicates the event causing as sertion of PDWU is not or is no longer occurring Timing Comments Negation Does not occur until at least one decrementer clock following assertion 2 5 7 Reset Signals The RESET and RESETOUT signals are used while the part is being placed into or coming out of reset Refer to 5 8 Reset Operation for more details on these pins 2 5 7 1 Reset RESET Input only Module Reset State Meaning Asserted Indicates that devices on the bus must reset Negated Indicates normal operation Timing Comments For timing information refer to 5 8 Reset Operation 2 5 7 2 Reset Output RESETOUT Output only Module Reset State Meaning Asserted During reset instructs all devices monitoring this signal to reset all parts within t
381. te a burst transfer If the slave can per form burst transfers it negates the burst inhibit signal BI If the slave does not support burst transfers it asserts BI An example of a burst read on the external bus is shown in Figure 5 9 MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 22 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL CLKOUT ADDR A1 lt PIPELINED ADDRESS a LAST DATA Figure 5 9 External Burst Read Cycle 5 4 6 1 Termination of Burst Cycles During the data phase of a burst read cycle the master receives data from the addressed slave The EBI asserts the BDIP signal at the beginning of a burst data phase and negates BDIP during the last beat of a burst The slave device stops driving new data after it receives the negation of BDIP at the rising edge of the clock The EBI can terminate a burst cycle early by asserting the BDIP pin Early termination is used for a word aligned not double word aligned burst to a small port The LST bit in the SIU module configuration register SIUMCR determines the timing used for the BDIP pin If LST is cleared then the pin uses BDIP timing If the bit is set the pin uses LAST timing The timing protocol of the external memory determines whether this bit should be set or cleared Refer to 5 5 16 6 Synchronous Burst Inter face for examples of both types of t
382. ternal breakpoints from watchpoints by setting the associated development port trap enable bit using the development port serial interface Internal breakpoints can also be generated by assigning a breakpoint counter to a par ticular watchpoint The counter counts down for each watchpoint and a breakpoint is generated when the counter reaches zero An internal breakpoint progresses in the machine along with the instruction that caused it fetch or load store cycle When a breakpoint reaches the top of the history buffer the machine processes the breakpoint exception An instruction that causes an l bus breakpoint is not retired The processor branches to the breakpoint exception routine before it executes the instruction An instruction DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 8 19 that causes an L bus breakpoint is executed The processor branches to the break point exception routine after it executes the instruction The address of the load store cycle that generated the L bus breakpoint is stored in the breakpoint address register BAR 8 2 2 1 Breakpoint Counters There are two 16 bit down counters Each counter is able to count one of the I bus watchpoints or one of the L bus watchpoints Both generate the corresponding break point when they reach zero If the instruction associated with the watchpoint is not retired the counter is adjusted back so that it reflects actual execution In the masked mode the counters do n
383. the TECR or into the breakpoints bits of the TECR as shown in Table 8 11 and Table 8 12 Table 8 11 Trap Enable Data Shifted Into Development Port Shift Register 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st 2nd o Start Length Control 1 L bus Usage Watchpoint Trap Enables gt Input data for trap enable 1 1 0 0 disabled 1 enabled control register Table 8 12 Breakpoint Data Shifted Into Development Port Shift Register Non Maskable Start Length Control Maskable Reserved bits Usage Breakpoints Input data for trap enable control register 1 1 1 0 negate 1 assert 8 3 6 CPU Input Transmissions If the length bit in the serial input sequence is cleared the transmission is an input to the CPU This transmission type is legal only when the processor is in debug mode For transmissions to the CPU the 35 bits of the development port shift register are interpreted as a start bit a length bit a control bit and 32 bits of instructions or data The encoding of data shifted into the development port shift register through the DSDI pin is shown in Table 8 13 Table 8 13 CPU Instructions Data Shifted into Shift Register Start Length Control Instruction Data 32 Bits Usage 1 0 0 CPU Instruction Input instruction for the CPU 1 0 1 CPU Data Input data for the CPU The control
384. the history buffer If a data dependency exists the machine is stalled until the dependency is re solved In the execute stage each execution unit that has an executable instruction ex ecutes the instruction For some instructions this occurs over multiple cycles In the writeback stage the execution unit writes the result to the destination reg ister and reports to the history buffer that the instruction is completed In the retirement stage the history buffer retires instructions in architectural or CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 3 33 der An instruction retires from the machine if it completes execution with no ex ceptions and if all instructions preceding it in the instruction stream have finished execution with no exceptions As many as six instructions can be re tired in one clock The history buffer maintains the correct architectural machine state An exception is taken only when the instruction is ready to be retired from the machine i e after all previously issued instructions have already been retired from the machine When an exception is taken all instructions following the excepting instruction are canceled i e the values of the affected destination registers are restored using the values saved in the history buffer during the dispatch stage Figure 3 4 shows basic instruction pipeline timing FETCH H X 2 X gt DECODE READ AND EXECUTE WRITE BACK TO DEST RE
385. the input frequency needs to be twice the desired operating system frequency With Vppsn grounded the multiplication factor MF bits in the system clock control register SCCR no longer have any effect on the system frequency but the reduced frequency RFD bits and the low power mode LPM bits do have an effect Three different low power modes are available to minimize standby power usage Nor mal operation or one of the three low power modes is selected by programming the LPM bits in the SCCR The clock submodule also provides a clock source for the PowerPC time base and decrementer The oscillator time base and decrementer are powered from the keep alive power supply VDDKAP1 This allows the time base to continue incrementing even when the main power to the MCU is off While the power is off the decrementer also continues to count The power down wakeup pin PDWU can be programmed to signal an external power on reset circuit to enable power to the system whenever the MSB of the decrementer changes from a zero to a one Figure 5 26 is a block diagram of the SIU clock module MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 68 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL x x 2 5 malts 98 lt gt gt oe OSCCLK EEMI RFD 0 3 RFD 5 VCOOUT A LPM3 o SPLL MF 0 3 A ECROUT
386. the second access if a read can be pipelined with the first 2 For any two consecutive accesses if the latency of either region is not known to the chip select logic the two accesses are pipelined only if the second ac cess is a read access to a region with an interface type that can hold off the data until the data bus is available See Table 5 27 For example suppose the first access is to a region that supplies its own TA signal the second access is to another region with ITYPE 8 and TA is re turned by the chip select logic for the second access In this case the chip se lect logic must hold off the second access until the first access is completed because the second region may not be able to hold off its data without an OE On the other hand suppose the first access is to a region that supplies its own TA signal the second access is to another region with ITYPE 3 synchronous OE and is returned by the chip select logic for the second access In this MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 58 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL case the second region can hold off its data until its OE is asserted The chip select module can pipeline the second access if a read with the first access after it has received the AACK signal for the first access The chip select logic asserts the CE of the second access while the data phase of the first access is still in progress if the second access is issued before the first access is com
387. tirement Therefore program trace is reported during fetch Since not all fetched instructions eventually retire an indication on canceled instructions is reported Instructions are fetched sequentially until branches direct or indirect or exceptions appear in the program flow or some stall in execution causes the machine not to fetch the next address Instructions may be architecturally executed or they may be can celed in some stage of the machine pipeline The following sections define how this information is generated and how it should be used to reconstruct the program trace The issue of data compression that could reduce the amount of memory needed by the debug system is also mentioned 8 1 1 Indirect Change of Flow Cycles An indirect change of flow attribute is attached to all fetch cycles that result from indi rect flow changes Indirect flow changes include the following types of instructions or events Assertion or negation of VSYNC MOTOROLA DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MPC509 8 2 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Exception taken Indirect branch taken Execution of the following sequential instructions rfi isync mtmsr and mtspr to CMPA CMPF ICTRL ECR and DER When a program trace recording is needed the user can ensure that cycles which result from an indirect change of flow are visible on the external bus The user can do this in one of two ways by setting the VSYNC bit or by programming the ISCTL bits in th
388. to assert BI to prevent bursts Assertion Negation Sampled when AACK is asserted A burst transfer can only be burst inhibited before the first TA assertion Simple asynchronous memory devices should keep AACK negated to keep the address valid They can assert BI at the same time as or before AACK and at the same time as the first TA assertion Synchronous pipelineable memory devices that do not support bursting should return BI with AACK as soon as they are ready to receive the next address SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MOTOROLA Rev 15 June 98 2 11 Burstable memory devices should negate BI at the same time as or before they assert AACK 2 5 2 8 Address Retry ARETRY Input only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments Asserted If the MCU is the bus master ARETRY indi cates that the MCU must retry the preceding address phase The MCU will not begin a bus cycle for the clock cycle following assertion of ARETRY Note that the subse quent address retried may not be the same one associated with the assertion of the ARETRY signal Assertion of ARE TRY overrides the assertion of AACK Negated High Impedance Indicates that the MCU does not need to retry the last address phase Assertion Must occur at least one clock cycle following the assertion of TS if a retry is required TA or TEA must not be asserted during a cycle in which ARETRY is asserted If TA is asserted for any part of a burst cycle A
389. to drive the data for the current write or must wait to sample the data for reads Assertion Must not occur before AACK is asserted for the current transaction TA must not be asserted on cycles terminated by ARETRY and must not be asserted after the cycle has been terminated The system can withhold asser tion of TA to indicate that the MCU should insert wait states to extend the duration of the data beat Negation Must occur after the clock cycle of the final or SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS MPC509 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL only data beat of the transfer For a burst transfer that is not under chip select control the system can assert TA for one clock cycle and then negate it to advance the burst transfer to the next beat and insert wait states during the next beat 2 5 3 4 Transfer Error Acknowledge Input only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments 2 5 3 5 Data Strobe DS Output only Module EBI State Meaning Timing Comments MPC509 USER S MANUAL Asserted By an external device signals a bus error con dition TEA assertion terminates the data phase of the cur rent bus cycle and overrides the assertion of TA If AACK has not been asserted for the current bus cycle TEA termi nates both the address phase and the data phase This signal is intended for the cases of a write to a read only address space or an access to a non existent address The signal can be output by a bus monitor t
390. torage reservation loss indication signals routed from every remote bus to every PowerPC master BUS MASTER WR CT 0 3 E BUS SNOOP NON LOCAL LOGIC BUS MCU SIU ARETRY ARETRY NON LOCAL BUS E BUS INTERFACE Figure 5 10 Storage Reservation Signaling 5 4 14 1 PowerPC Architecture Reservation Requirements The PowerPC architecture requires that the reservation protocol meets the following requirements Each PowerPC processor has at most one reservation instruction establishes a reservation instruction by the same processor clears the first reservation and es tablishes a new one The stwex instruction by the same processor clears the reservation A normal store by the same processor does not clear the reservation A normal store by some other processor or other mechanism such as a DMA to an address with an existing reservation clears the reservation e f the storage reservation is lost it is guaranteed that stwex instruction will not modify storage The granularity of the address compare is a multiple of the coherent block size which should be a multiple of four bytes MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 32 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL 5 4 14 2 E bus Storage Reservation Implementation The E bus reservation protocol requires local external bus reservation logic if needed to Snoop
391. tput Asserted or negated respectively by software setting Powerdowniwake or clearing the WUR bit in the SCLSR Also asserted PDWU Output when decrementer counts down to zero Can be used as power down wakeup to external power on reset circuit 5 6 2 Clock Power Supplies The power supply for each block of the clock submodule is shown in Table 5 31 Table 5 31 Clock Module Power Supplies Power Supply Blocks Vppi CLKOUT ECR PIT Clock RFD PLL Digital VDDKAP1 Decrementer Time Base Clock Oscillator SCCR SCCSR PLL Analog To improve noise immunity the PLL has its own set of power supply pins Vppsyn and GNDeyn Only the charge pump and the VCO are powered by these pins The oscillator system clock control register and system clock control and status reg ister are powered from the keep alive power supply VDDKAP1 and In addition VDDKAP1 powers the PowerPC time base and decrementer This allows the time MOTOROLA 5 70 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL base to continue incrementing at 1 MHz even when the main power to the MCU is off While the power is off the decrementer also continues to count and may be used to signal the external power supply to enable power to the system at specific intervals This is the power down wakeup feature 5 6 3 System Clock Sources The Vppsn and MODCLK pins are used to configure the clock
392. truction Data for Trap Enable Port updates trap enable control register 1 Control Register CPU waits continues fetch Any CPU instruction Port ignores data terminates DPDR read with error latches sequence error 5 CPU signals exception to port fetches next instruction 2 Null 5 Data for CPU Port transfers data to CPU CPU reads data from DPDR fetches next 1 instruction Data for trap enable Port updates TECR 2 control register CPU waits continue data read CPU instruction non Port transfers instruction to CPU DPDR CPU executes instruction fetches next 1 instruction CPU instruction DPDR Port transfers instruction to CPU 2 read CPU executes instruction reads DPDR CPU instruction DPDR Port transfers instruction to CPU 3 write CPU data CPU writes DPDR fetches next instruction 3 CPU instruction with Port transfers instruction to CPU exception CPU signals exception to port fetches next 4 instruction Data for CPU Port ignores data terminates fetch with error latches sequence error 5 CPU signals exception to port fetches next instruction Data for trap enable 7 MSB of CPU Port updates TECR 1 control register data CPU waits continues fetch Any ignored by port Port ignores data 3 Exception CPU waits continues fetch Any ignored by port Port ignores data 2 sequence Error CPU waits continues fetch 4 MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 5 2 Debug Mode Sequence Diagram
393. try into debug mode All bits are set by the hardware and cleared when the register is read when debug mode is disabled or if the processor is in debug mode Attempts to write to this register are ignored When the hardware sets a bit in this register debug mode is entered only if debug mode is enabled and the corresponding mask bit in the DER is set All bits are cleared to zero following reset MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 53 ECR Exception Cause Register SPR 148 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RESERVED mce pse pre Reserven svse TR RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 SEE RESERVED LBRK FBRK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 8 35 ECR Bit Settings Bit s Name Description 0 1 Reserved 2 CHSTP Checkstop bit Set when the processor enters checkstop state 3 MCE Machine check interrupt bit Set when a machine check exception other than one caused by a data storage or instruction storage error is asserted 4 DSE Data storage exception bit Set when a machine check exception caused by a data storage error is asserted 5 ISE Instruction storage exception bit Set when a machine chec
394. ttempts to resolve it early achieving the effect of a zero cycle branch in many cases The BPU uses a bitin the instruction encoding to predict the direction of the conditional branch Therefore when an unresolved conditional branch instruction is encountered the processor prefetches instructions from the predicted target stream until the condi tional branch is resolved The BPU contains an adder to compute branch target addresses and three special purpose user accessible registers the link register LR the count register CTR and the condition register CR The BPU calculates the return pointer for subroutine calls and saves it into the LR The LR also contains the branch target address for the branch conditional to link register bclrx instruction The CTR contains the branch tar get address for the branch conditional to count register bcctrx instruction The contents of the LR and CTR can be copied to or from any GPR Because the BPU uses dedicated registers rather than general purpose or floating point registers execution of branch instructions is independent from execution of integer and floating point instructions 3 4 2 Integer Unit IU The IU executes all integer processor instructions except the integer storage access instructions which are implemented by the load store unit The IU contains the follow ing subunits The IMUL IDIV unit includes the implementation of the integer multiply and divide instructions
395. ttribute TAP SCAN MODE of TMS signal is true attribute TAP SCAN RESET of TRST L signal is true attribute TAP SCAN CLOCK of TCK signal is 10 0e6 BOTH attribute INSTRUCTION LENGTH of MPC509 entity is 4 attribute INSTRUCTION OPCODE of MPC509 entity is EXTES 0000 amp EXTEST PULLUP 0001 amp HIGHZ 0010 amp CLAMP 0011 amp TMSCAN UETOO I dg IDCODE ok SAMPLE 1110 amp BYPASS 1111 attribute INSTRUCTION CAPTURI attribute INSTRUCTION PRIVATI of MPC509 entity is 0001 of MPC509 entity is TMSCAN attribute IDCODE REGISTER of MPC509 entity is 0000 amp version 000010 amp design center 0000000000 amp sequence number 00000001110 amp motorola NDA S required by 1149 1 attribute REGISTER ACCESS of MPC509 entity is BOUNDARY EXTEST PULLUP NS attribute BOUNDARY CELLS of MPC509 entity is BC 2 4 BC 6 attribute BOUNDARY LENGTH of MPC509 entity is 217 attribute BOUNDARY REGISTER of MPC509 entity is PORT DESCRIPTION DECODE port port name or port name with suffix such as a 1 cell BC 4 for inputs BC 6 for bidirectionals BC 2 all other function input input only IEEE 1149 1 COMPLIANT INTERFACE MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 9 11 bidir directional
396. tus Register Bit Settings 1 arri ek nie 5 93 5 47 Reset Behavior for Different Clock Modes 5 97 5 48 Pin Configuration During RESET ui ie ria eni oet mend mad li proa ct Decii ida 5 98 5 49 Data Bus Reset Configuration Word 5 100 5 50 SIU Port Registers Address Mapa iris eoicitte ditus iip tratte pinus 5 102 Ra I EU RTT 5 104 5 52 Port A Pin Assignments 5 105 DOS E Pil 5 105 5 54 Port Pin Assignments 5 107 cout a oo UI RR T TM 5 107 5 56 K Pn 5 108 Dor 5 108 6 1 PCU Address Map deat pain Konner int 6 2 Ga tcc Tm 6 3 6 3 SWUORH SWTO Bit Settings 6 5 G A IMBZ Interupt eaa eodein en dei noia est ao ips aa ned Qe 6 8 6 5 pi RT m 6 8 6 6 PITQIL Bit 6 10 DX PLU pd d EAE 6 12 6 8 Port Q Edge Select Field Encoding 6 12 7 1 509 SRAM Module 7 1 7 2 SRAMMCR Bit Settings 7 3 8 1 Program Trace Cycle Attribute 6
397. ures the associated pin to function as a chip enable CE write enable WE output enable OE or alternate function pin For pins configured for their alternate function the port A pin assignment register configures the pin as either an address bus signal ADDR 0 11 or a port A or B output signal 0 7 and PB 0 3 Notice that the CSBOOT pin has no alternate function Table 5 16 describes the chip select pins MOTOROLA 5 36 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT Rev 15 June 98 MPC509 USER S MANUAL Table 5 16 Chip Select Pin Functions A Alternate a Chip Select Function Function Pin Function in Chip Select Mode Can be the CE of the system boot memory power on default In sys CSBOOT tems with no external boot device this pin can be configured as WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs CSU Can be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs When configured as a chip ADDRO PAO select this pin is assigned to be the OE of the CSBOOT pin following CSBTOE reset S1 ADDR1 PA1 WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs S2 ADDR2 PA2 be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs S3 ADDR3 PAS3 be CE WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs 54 ADDR4 PA4 WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs S5 ADDRS5 PA5 WE or OE of EPROMs SRAMs S6 ADDR6 PA6 be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs 57 7 7 Can be WE or OE of EPROMs or SRAMs S8 ADDR8 PBO
398. us 2 13 configuration mode 5 98 reset configuration word 5 40 5 99 phase 5 21 space only 5 43 7 3 space protection 5 48 strobe See DS DCE 5 81 5 83 DDRI 5 106 5 106 DDRK 5 106 DDRL 5 106 DDRM 5 103 Debug enable register 8 55 Debug mode 5 28 5 48 8 34 and reset 5 98 checkstop state 8 37 enabling 8 35 entering 8 35 exiting 8 37 program trace 8 6 Debug register lock 5 5 DEC 3 20 DECE 8 54 DECEE 8 55 INDEX MPC509 Rev 15 June 1998 User s Manual Decomposed cycles 5 24 Decrementer 5 80 and freeze assertion 5 12 clock enable 5 81 5 83 register 3 20 DER 8 55 Development serial clock See DSCK serial data in See DSDI serial data out See DSDI Development port 8 22 clock mode selection 8 25 input transmissions 8 30 8 31 ready bit 8 34 registers 8 24 serial data out 8 31 shift register 8 25 signals 8 22 transmission sequence 8 38 transmissions 8 30 trap enable selection 8 48 Development serial clock 8 23 Development serial data in 8 23 Development serial data out 8 24 Development support 8 1 bus support 8 15 L bus support 8 17 registers 8 43 DIS 7 3 DIWOEN 8 48 DIW1EN 8 48 DIW2EN 8 48 8 48 DLK 5 5 DLWOEN 8 52 DLW1EN 8 52 Doze mode 5 78 DPI 8 54 DPIR DPDR input transmissions 8 31 DS 2 15 5 14 5 22 DSCK 2 16 5 98 8 23 DSDI 2 16 5 98 8 23 DSDO 2 16 5 70 8 24 DSE 8 54 DSEE 8 55 DSISR 3 19 DSP 5 43 DSPACE 5 48 E EA 3 30 Early overlapping of accesses 5
399. us device and has the ability to hold off its internal data on a read access until OE is asserted Note that with this interface type if the MCU receives TA before asserting OE OE may still be asserted and may remain asserted 0010 Synchronous region no burst with synchronous OE Refer to Figure 5 21 A de vice with this type of interface is pipelineable can function as an asynchronous device and has the ability to hold off its internal data on a read access until OE is asserted The chip select logic asserts OE for one clock cycle on accesses to 0011 devices with this interface type A device with synchronous OE must be programmed for one or more wait states If the region is programmed for zero wait states with synchronous OE the chip select logic still generates the OE as if the region were programmed for one wait state 0100 Reserved MPC509 SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 5 53 Table 5 27 Interface Types Continued ITYPE Binary Interface Type Region with fixed burst access capability burst type 1 and asynchronous OE Refer to Figure 5 23 and Figure 5 24 A device of this type is pipelineable and can hold off its internal data until OE is asserted The interface keeps the first data beat valid until the BDIP signal indicates that it should send out the next data 0101 This interface type can function as an asynchronous interface That is a device with this ITYPE
400. value in the SPECADDR register MOTOROLA SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT MPC509 5 26 Rev 15 June 98 USER S MANUAL Table 5 12 Example Speculative Mask Values pode S Protected Region 000000 1 Kbyte block 111111 64 Kbyte block 111110 Every second 1 Kbyte block within a 64 Kbyte block 111101 Every second 2 Kbyte block within a 64 Kbyte block 110011 Every fourth 4 Kbyte block within a 64 Kbyte block 100011 Every eighth 4 Kbyte block within a 64 Kbyte block 010000 Every sixteenth 1 Kbyte block within a 32 Kbyte block Protection from speculative loads can be disabled by setting the SPECADDR register to an internal or unimplemented address range 5 4 9 Accesses to 16 Bit Ports The EBI supports accesses to 16 bit ports on the external bus 16 bit port size is a chip select option the access must be initiated using one of the chip selects A 16 bit port must connect its data lines to the upper 16 bits of the external data bus DATA 0 15 During an access to a 16 bit port byte enable signals BE 0 1 are used to indicate which bytes of the half word are being accessed and the BE2 ADDR30 pin functions as ADDR30 active high BE3 is asserted low if the operand size is a word and negated high if the operand size is a byte or half word This encoding is needed to maintain coherency of word accesses on the external bus Table 5 13 shows how EBI decomposes the word half word and byte accesses to a 16 bit port
401. xternal bus reflecting 10xx 1 0 an access to internal register or memory or 110x a cache hit Refer to 8 1 3 Program Flow Tracking Pins for more information on the use of these pins for program flow tracking 8 1 1 2 Sequential Instructions with the Indirect Change of Flow Attribute Because certain sequential instructions rfi isync mtmsr and mtspr to CMPF ICTRL ECR and DER affect the machine in a manner similar to indirect branch instructions the processor marks these instructions as indirect branch instruc tions VF 101 see Table 8 3 and marks the subsequent instruction address with the indirect change of flow attribute as if it were an indirect branch target Therefore when the processor detects one of these instructions the address of the following MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 3 instruction is visible externally This enables the reconstructing software to correctly evaluate the effect of these instructions 8 1 2 Instruction Fetch Show Cycle Control Instruction fetch show cycles are controlled by the bits in the ICTRL and the state of VSYNC as illustrated in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Fetch Show Cycles Control VSYNC Sow Cora Show Cycles Generated X 00 All fetch cycles X 01 All change of flow direct amp indirect X 10 All indirect change of flow 0 11 No show cycles are performed 1 11 All indirect change of flow Note that
402. y the MSR RI bit unless the non masked control bit BRKNOMSK in LCTRL2 is set The development port maskable breakpoint and breakpoints from internal peripherals are masked by the MSR RI bit The develop ment port non maskable breakpoint is not masked by this bit Figure 8 1 is a diagram of watchpoint and breakpoint support in the RCPU MPC509 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT MOTOROLA USER S MANUAL Rev 15 June 98 8 11 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM OR EXTERNAL PERIPHERALS DEVELOPMENT INTERNAL PERIPHERALS MASKABLE BREAKPOINT qoem NON MASKABLE BREAKPOINT PORT BREAKPOINT DEVELOPMENT PORT TRAP ENABLE BITS TO CPU SOFTWARE TRAP ENABLE BITS LCTRL2 NON MASKED CONTROL BIT INTERNAL WATCHPOINTS WATCHPOINTS LOGIC BITWISE AND ED BITWISE OR Figure 8 1 Watchpoint and Breakpoint Support in the RCPU COUNTERS TO WATCHPOINTS PINS 8 2 1 Watchpoints Watchpoints are based on eight comparators on the l bus and L bus two counters and two AND OR logic structures There are four comparators on the instruction address bus l address two comparators on the load store address bus L address and two comparators on the load store data bus L data The comparators are able to detect the following conditions equal not equal greater than and less than Greater than or equal and less than or equal are easily obtained from these four conditions For more informat
403. y the reset control block Once the reset request passes through the synchronization phase the chip enters reset The RESETOUT pin and the internal reset signal are driven while the chip is in reset Note that this internal reset signal is an output from the reset control block that is sent to the internal MCU modules This signal is different from internal reset request which are inputs to the reset control block Six clock cycles after RESET is negated all mode select pins are sampled except for the VDDSN and MODCLK pins These two pins are sampled at the rising edge of RESETOUT After the RESET pin is negated RESETOUT is held for a minimum of 17 clock cycles After the 17 clock cycles the state of data bus configuration bit 19 and the phase locked loop PLL mode determine when RESETOUT is released e If the PLL is operating in 1 1 mode or the data bus configuration bit 19 is cleared RESETOUT is released when the PLL is locked f data bus configuration bit 19 is set and the PLL is not operating in 1 1 mode RESETOUT is released as soon as the 17 clock cycles have finished When the PLL is operating in 1 1 mode the MCU waits until the PLL is locked before releasing RESETOUT since the clock which is an input to the MCU may also be used as an input to other bus devices In addition if other bus devices use the MCU CLKOUT signal to feed a PLL the user must ensure that the PLL is locked before RESETOUT is released This is achieved
404. yte addressed by the ICADR is in the cache If it is the line is locked and the command terminates with no exception If the line is not in the cache a regular miss sequence is initiated After the whole line is placed in the cache the line is locked The user needs to check the error type bits in the ICCST to determine if the operation completed properly or not The load amp lock command can generate two errors Type 1 bus error in one of the cycles that fetches the line Type 2 no place to lock It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that there is at least one unlocked way in the appropriate set 4 5 4 Unlock Line The unlock line operation is used to unlock locked cache lines The unlock line oper ation is performed on a single cache line If the line is found in the cache cache hit itis unlocked and starts to operate as a regular valid cache line If the line is not found in the cache cache miss no operation is performed and the command terminates with no exception This command has no error cases that the user needs to check 4 5 5 Unlock The unlock all operation is used to unlock the whole cache This operation is per formed on all cache lines If a line is locked it is unlocked and starts to operate as a regular valid cache line If a line is not locked or if it is invalid no operation is performed This command has no error cases that the user needs to check MPC509 INSTRUCTION CACHE MOTORO

MPC500 Family MPC509 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents